REL 670 v.1.1 Technical Reference manual-UEN PDF

Technical reference manual
Line distance protection IED

REL 670
Innovation
from
ABB
Document ID: 1MRK506275-UEN

Issued: December 2007
Revision: B
IED product version: 1.1
Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved
COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT
THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL
PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN
PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD
PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN
CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY
REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS
BELOW.
THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR
THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE
DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN
THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO
ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST
TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT
THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW
PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT.
Manufacturer:
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1
Introduction.....................................................................27
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................27
About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................27
About the technical reference manual.........................................28
Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................29
Introduction.............................................................................29
Principle of operation..............................................................29
Input and output signals.........................................................32
Function block........................................................................32
Setting parameters.................................................................32
Technical data........................................................................32
Intended audience.......................................................................33
Related documents......................................................................33
Revision notes.............................................................................34
Section 2
Local human-machine interface.....................................35

Human machine interface.................................................................35
Small size graphic HMI.....................................................................37
Introduction..................................................................................37
Design.........................................................................................37
Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................38
Introduction..................................................................................38
Design.........................................................................................38
Keypad.............................................................................................39
LED...................................................................................................41
Introduction..................................................................................41
Status indication LEDs................................................................41
Indication LEDs...........................................................................41
LHMI related functions......................................................................42
Introduction..................................................................................42
General setting parameters.........................................................42
Status indication LEDs................................................................43
Design....................................................................................43
Function block........................................................................43
Indication LEDs...........................................................................44
Introduction.............................................................................44
Design....................................................................................44
Function block........................................................................51
REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Setting parameters.................................................................51
Section 3
Basic IED functions........................................................55

Analog inputs....................................................................................55
Introduction..................................................................................55
Principle of operation...................................................................55
Function block.............................................................................56
Setting parameters......................................................................56
Authorization.....................................................................................62
Authorization handling in the tool................................................63
Authorization handling in the IED................................................68
Self supervision with internal event list.............................................68
Introduction..................................................................................68
Internal signals.......................................................................70
Run-time model......................................................................72
Function block.............................................................................73
Output signals..............................................................................73
Technical data.............................................................................74
Time synchronization........................................................................74
Introduction..................................................................................74
General concepts...................................................................74
Real Time Clock (RTC) operation..........................................75
Synchronization alternatives..................................................76
Function block.............................................................................80
Output signals..............................................................................80
Technical data.............................................................................83
Parameter setting groups.................................................................84
Introduction..................................................................................84
Function block.............................................................................85
Input and output signals..............................................................85
Test mode functionality.....................................................................87
Introduction..................................................................................87
Function block.............................................................................88
IED identifiers...................................................................................89

REL 670
Table of contents
Introduction..................................................................................89
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)..............................................90
Introduction..................................................................................90
Function block.............................................................................91
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................91
Introduction..................................................................................91
Function block.............................................................................92
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)..................................................93
Introduction..................................................................................93
Function block.............................................................................93
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................94
Introduction..................................................................................94
Function block.............................................................................94
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................97
Introduction..................................................................................97
Function block.............................................................................98
Authority status (AUTS)....................................................................99
Introduction..................................................................................99
Function block...........................................................................100
Output signals............................................................................100
Setting parameters....................................................................100
Goose binary receive......................................................................101
Function block...........................................................................101
Input and output signals............................................................101
Section 4
Differential protection...................................................105
High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)..........................105
Introduction................................................................................105
Principle of operation.................................................................105
REL 670

Table of contents
Logic diagram.......................................................................106
Function block...........................................................................106
Technical data...........................................................................107
Section 5
Impedance protection ..................................................109

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS,
21) .................................................................................................109
Introduction................................................................................109
Full scheme measurement...................................................110
Impedance characteristic.....................................................111
Minimum operating current...................................................115
Measuring principles............................................................116
Directional lines....................................................................118
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................119
Function block...........................................................................123
Technical data...........................................................................127
Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (PDIS) .............................................................128
Introduction................................................................................128
Directionality for series compensation..................................135
Function block...........................................................................141
Technical data...........................................................................147
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21.....148
Introduction................................................................................148
Basic operation characteristics.............................................150
Theory for operation.............................................................152
Function block...........................................................................163

REL 670
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................166
Mho impedance supervision logic..................................................167
Introduction................................................................................167
Fault inception detection......................................................168
Function block...........................................................................169
Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21).....................171
Introduction................................................................................171
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................173
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................175
Three phase faults................................................................176
Load encroachment..............................................................177
Minimum operate currents....................................................180
Function block...........................................................................185
Technical data...........................................................................187
Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho..................187
Introduction................................................................................188
Directional lines....................................................................192
Function block...........................................................................197
Technical data...........................................................................198
Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS,
21)..................................................................................................199
Introduction................................................................................199
The phase selection function................................................200
Function block...........................................................................210
REL 670

Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................212
Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)................................................212
Introduction................................................................................213
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic,
ZDM......................................................................................213
Additional distance protection directional function for
earth faults, ZDA .................................................................215
Function block...........................................................................217
Phase preference logic...................................................................220
Introduction................................................................................220
Function block...........................................................................223
Technical data...........................................................................224
Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)................................................225
Introduction................................................................................225
Resistive reach in forward direction.....................................226
Resistive reach in reverse direction.....................................227
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction..................228
Basic detection logic.............................................................228
Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................230
Function block...........................................................................231
Technical data...........................................................................233
Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)........................................................234
Introduction................................................................................234
Communication and tripping logic........................................234
Blocking logic.......................................................................235
Function block...........................................................................237
Technical data...........................................................................238
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)......................................................238
Introduction................................................................................238
Function block...........................................................................242

REL 670
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................244
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based
(SFCV) ...........................................................................................244
Introduction................................................................................244
Function block...........................................................................247
Technical data...........................................................................248
Section 6
Current protection.........................................................249
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)................249
Introduction................................................................................249
Function block...........................................................................250
Technical data...........................................................................251
Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)................251
Introduction................................................................................252
Function block...........................................................................256
Technical data...........................................................................264
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)...........265
Introduction................................................................................265
Function block...........................................................................266
Technical data...........................................................................267
Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N).........267
Introduction................................................................................268
Operating quantity within the function..................................268
Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................269
External polarizing facility for EFGround Fault function.......271
Base quantities within the function.......................................272
Internal EFGround Fault function structure..........................272
Four residual overcurrent stages..........................................272
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparision stage ..............................................273
REL 670

Table of contents
Second harmonic blocking element.....................................276

Switch on to fault feature......................................................278
Function block...........................................................................281
Technical data...........................................................................289
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
(PSDE, 67N) ..................................................................................290
Introduction................................................................................290
Introduction...........................................................................291
Function block...........................................................................297
Technical data...........................................................................303
Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)..........304
Introduction................................................................................304
Function block...........................................................................308
Technical data...........................................................................309
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)........................................310
Introduction................................................................................310
Function block...........................................................................314
Technical data...........................................................................316
Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB).....................................................316
Introduction................................................................................317
Function block...........................................................................318
Technical data...........................................................................319
Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)...................................319
Introduction................................................................................320
Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker..................323
Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................323
Function block...........................................................................324

REL 670
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................325
Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)..............................325
Introduction................................................................................325
Low pass filtering..................................................................328
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................329
Function block...........................................................................330
Technical data...........................................................................332
Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)................................333
Introduction................................................................................333
Low pass filtering..................................................................336
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................336
Function block...........................................................................337
Technical data...........................................................................340
Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)..............................................340
Introduction................................................................................340
Function block...........................................................................342
Technical data...........................................................................343
Section 7
Voltage protection........................................................345
Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)...............................345
Introduction................................................................................345
Measurement principle.........................................................346
Time delay............................................................................346
Blocking................................................................................349
Design..................................................................................351
Function block...........................................................................352
Technical data...........................................................................356
Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59).................................356
Introduction................................................................................357
REL 670

Table of contents
Time delay............................................................................358
Blocking................................................................................360
Design..................................................................................360
Function block...........................................................................362
Technical data...........................................................................365
Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N).................366
Introduction................................................................................366
Time delay............................................................................367
Blocking................................................................................370
Design..................................................................................371
Function block...........................................................................372
Technical data...........................................................................375
Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24).............................................375
Introduction................................................................................376
Measured voltage.................................................................378
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................379
Cooling.................................................................................382
OEX protection function measurands...................................382
Overexcitation alarm............................................................383
Logic diagram.......................................................................384
Function block...........................................................................384
Technical data...........................................................................386
Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)......................................387
Introduction................................................................................387
Function block...........................................................................388
Technical data...........................................................................390
Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)..................................................390
Introduction................................................................................390
Function block...........................................................................392
10

REL 670
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................393
Section 8
Frequency protection....................................................395
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)..........................................395
Introduction................................................................................395
Time delay............................................................................396
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................396
Blocking................................................................................397
Design..................................................................................398
Function block...........................................................................399
Technical data...........................................................................400
Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)............................................400
Introduction................................................................................401
Time delay............................................................................401
Blocking................................................................................402
Design..................................................................................402
Function block...........................................................................403
Technical data...........................................................................404
Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)..........................404
Introduction................................................................................405
Time delay............................................................................406
Blocking................................................................................406
Design..................................................................................406
Function block...........................................................................407
Technical data...........................................................................408
Section 9
Multipurpose protection................................................411
General current and voltage protection (GAPC).............................411
Introduction................................................................................411
Inadvertent generator energization......................................411
REL 670

11
Table of contents
Measured quantities within the function...............................412

Base quantities for GF function............................................414
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................415
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................420
Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................420
Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................421
Inadvertent generator energization......................................421
Logic diagram.......................................................................423
Function block...........................................................................428
Technical data...........................................................................440
Section 10 Secondary system supervision.....................................443

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)..................................................443
Introduction................................................................................443
Function block...........................................................................445
Technical data...........................................................................446
Fuse failure supervision (RFUF).....................................................446
Introduction................................................................................446
Zero sequence ....................................................................447
Negative sequence...............................................................450
du/dt and di/dt.......................................................................450
Operation modes..................................................................451
Dead line detection...............................................................452
Function block...........................................................................452
Technical data...........................................................................454
Section 11 Control..........................................................................455
Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN,
25)..................................................................................................455
Introduction................................................................................455
Basic functionality.................................................................456
Logic diagrams.....................................................................456
Function block...........................................................................464
12

REL 670
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................469
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................470
Introduction................................................................................470
Logic Diagrams....................................................................471
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................471
Auto-reclosing mode selection.............................................471
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing
cycle ....................................................................................472
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............473
Long trip signal.....................................................................474
Time sequence diagrams.....................................................480
Function block...........................................................................483
Technical data...........................................................................487
Apparatus control (APC).................................................................488
Introduction................................................................................488
Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................489
Introduction...........................................................................489
Principle of operation............................................................489
Function block......................................................................490
Input and output signals.......................................................491
Setting parameters...............................................................491
Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)..............491
Introduction...........................................................................491
Function block......................................................................492
Switch controller (SCSWI).........................................................495
Introduction...........................................................................495
Function block......................................................................500
Circuit breaker (SXCBR)...........................................................502
Introduction...........................................................................502
Function block......................................................................507
REL 670

13
Table of contents
Circuit switch (SXSWI)..............................................................508

Introduction...........................................................................508
Function block......................................................................513
Bay reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................514
Introduction...........................................................................514
Function block......................................................................517
Reservation input (RESIN)........................................................519
Introduction...........................................................................519
Function block......................................................................520
Interlocking.....................................................................................521
Introduction................................................................................521
Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)........................................524
Introduction...........................................................................524
Function block......................................................................525
Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE).........................................526
Introduction...........................................................................526
Function block......................................................................527
Logic diagram.......................................................................528
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)...............................535
Introduction...........................................................................535
Function block......................................................................536
Logic diagram.......................................................................537
Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)...........................544
Introduction...........................................................................544
Function block......................................................................545
Logic diagram.......................................................................546
Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)........................551
Introduction...........................................................................551
14

REL 670
Table of contents
Function block......................................................................551
Logic diagram.......................................................................552
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)...............555
Introduction...........................................................................555
Function block......................................................................555
Logic diagram.......................................................................556
Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES).......559
Introduction...........................................................................559
Function block......................................................................559
Logic diagram.......................................................................560
Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)..........................................560
Introduction...........................................................................560
Function block......................................................................561
Logic diagrams.....................................................................562
Input and output signals ......................................................569
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)....................................................572
Introduction...........................................................................572
Function blocks....................................................................573
Logic diagrams.....................................................................575
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking.............588
Function block......................................................................588
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation (SLGGIO)...................................................................590
Introduction................................................................................590
Functionality and behaviour ................................................592
Graphical display..................................................................592
Function block...........................................................................594
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)......................................................596
Introduction................................................................................596
Function block...........................................................................597
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................598
REL 670

15
Table of contents
Introduction................................................................................599
Function block...........................................................................599
Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO).......................600
Introduction................................................................................600
Function block...........................................................................600
Section 12 Scheme communication...............................................603

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH,
85) .................................................................................................603
Introduction................................................................................603
Blocking scheme..................................................................604
Permissive underreach scheme...........................................604
Permissive overreach scheme.............................................605
Unblocking scheme..............................................................605
Intertrip scheme....................................................................606
Simplified logic diagram.......................................................606
Function block...........................................................................608
Technical data...........................................................................609
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection (PSCH, 85) ...................................................................609
Introduction................................................................................610
Blocking scheme..................................................................611
Permissive underreach scheme...........................................611
Permissive overreach scheme.............................................612
Intertrip scheme....................................................................612
Simplified logic diagram.......................................................612
Function block...........................................................................614
Technical data...........................................................................616
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance
protection (PSCH, 85)....................................................................616
Introduction................................................................................616
16

REL 670
Table of contents
Current reversal logic...........................................................617
Weak end infeed logic..........................................................617
Function block...........................................................................619
Technical data...........................................................................620
Local acceleration logic (PLAL)......................................................620
Introduction................................................................................621
Zone extension.....................................................................621
Loss-of-load acceleration.....................................................622
Function block...........................................................................622
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
(PSCH, 85).....................................................................................624
Introduction................................................................................624
Blocking scheme..................................................................625
Permissive under/overreach scheme...................................626
Function block...........................................................................628
Technical data...........................................................................629
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).................................................630
Introduction................................................................................630
Directional comparison logic function...................................630
Fault current reversal logic...................................................631
Weak and infeed logic..........................................................631
Function block...........................................................................633
Technical data...........................................................................634
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
segregated communication (PSCH) ..............................................634
Introduction................................................................................635
Current reversal logic ..........................................................635
Function block...........................................................................637
REL 670

17
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................639
Section 13 Logic.............................................................................641
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)...............................................................641
Introduction................................................................................641
Logic diagram.......................................................................643
Function block...........................................................................646
Technical data...........................................................................648
Trip matrix logic (GGIO).................................................................648
Application.................................................................................648
Function block...........................................................................650
Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................652
Introduction................................................................................652
Inverter function block (INV)......................................................652
OR function block (OR).............................................................652
AND function block (AND).........................................................653
Timer function block (Timer)......................................................654
Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................655
Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................655
Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................656
Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................657
Settable timer function block (TS).............................................657
Technical data...........................................................................658
Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................659
Introduction................................................................................659
Function block...........................................................................659
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................660
Introduction................................................................................660
Function block......................................................................661
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
(B16IGGIO)....................................................................................662
18

REL 670
Table of contents
Introduction................................................................................662
Function block...........................................................................663
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)........................................664
Introduction................................................................................664
Function block...........................................................................665
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
(IB16GGIO)....................................................................................666
Introduction................................................................................666
Function block...........................................................................667
Section 14 Monitoring.....................................................................669
Measurements (MMXU).................................................................669
Introduction................................................................................670
Measurement supervision....................................................671
Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................676
Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................680
Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP).................................681
Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................681
Function block...........................................................................681
Technical data...........................................................................699
Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................700
Introduction................................................................................700
Reporting..............................................................................701
Design..................................................................................701
Function block...........................................................................701
Input signals..............................................................................701
Technical data...........................................................................702
Event function (EV).........................................................................702
Introduction................................................................................702
REL 670

19
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................704
Fault locator (RFLO).......................................................................707
Introduction................................................................................707
Measuring Principle..............................................................709
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....709
The non-compensated impedance model............................712
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................713
Function block...........................................................................713
Technical data...........................................................................715
Measured value expander block.....................................................715
Introduction................................................................................715
Function block...........................................................................716
Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................717
Introduction................................................................................717
Function block...........................................................................725
Technical data...........................................................................739
Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................740
Introduction................................................................................740
Function block...........................................................................741
Input signals..............................................................................741
Technical data...........................................................................741
Indications (RDRE).........................................................................741
Introduction................................................................................741
Function block...........................................................................743
Input signals..............................................................................743
Technical data...........................................................................743
Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................743
Introduction................................................................................743
Function block...........................................................................744
Input signals..............................................................................744
20

REL 670
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................744
Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................745
Introduction................................................................................745
Function block...........................................................................746
Input signals..............................................................................746
Technical data...........................................................................746
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................746
Introduction................................................................................746
Memory and storage............................................................747
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................749
Function block...........................................................................749
Technical data...........................................................................749
Section 15 Metering.......................................................................751
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)............................................................751
Introduction................................................................................751
Function block...........................................................................753
Technical data...........................................................................754
Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)...........................755
Introduction................................................................................755
Function block...........................................................................756
Section 16 Station communication.................................................759

Overview.........................................................................................759
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................759
Introduction................................................................................759
Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................760
Introduction...........................................................................760
Function block......................................................................760
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................761
Introduction...........................................................................761
REL 670

21
Table of contents
Function block......................................................................762
Technical data...........................................................................763
LON communication protocol.........................................................764
Introduction................................................................................764
Technical data...........................................................................783
SPA communication protocol.........................................................783
Introduction................................................................................783
Communication ports...........................................................791
Design.......................................................................................792
Technical data...........................................................................793
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................793
Introduction................................................................................793
General.................................................................................793
Communication ports...........................................................803
Function block...........................................................................803
Technical data...........................................................................814
Automation bits (AUBI)...................................................................814
Introduction................................................................................814
Function block...........................................................................815
Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................831
Introduction................................................................................831
Function block...........................................................................832
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................833
Introduction................................................................................833
Design.......................................................................................834
22

REL 670
Table of contents
General.................................................................................834
Function block...........................................................................834
Section 17 Remote communication................................................839

Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................839
Introduction................................................................................839
Function block...........................................................................840
Section 18 Hardware......................................................................847
Overview.........................................................................................847
Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................847
Case from the rear side.............................................................849
Hardware modules.........................................................................854
Overview....................................................................................854
Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................855
Introduction...........................................................................855
Functionality.........................................................................855
Design..................................................................................856
Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................858
Introduction...........................................................................858
Functionality.........................................................................858
Design..................................................................................858
Power supply module (PSM).....................................................860
Introduction...........................................................................860
Design..................................................................................860
Technical data......................................................................861
Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................861
Introduction...........................................................................861
Functionality.........................................................................862
Block diagram.......................................................................863
Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................863
Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................863
Introduction...........................................................................863
Design..................................................................................864
Technical data......................................................................864
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
(ADM) .......................................................................................865
Introduction...........................................................................865
Design..................................................................................865
REL 670

23
Table of contents
Binary input module (BIM).........................................................867

Introduction...........................................................................867
Design..................................................................................867
Technical data......................................................................870
Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................871
Introduction...........................................................................871
Design..................................................................................871
Technical data......................................................................873
Static binary output module (SOM)...........................................874
Introduction...........................................................................874
Design..................................................................................874
Technical data......................................................................876
Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................877
Introduction...........................................................................877
Design..................................................................................877
Technical data......................................................................879
Line data communication module (LDCM)................................880
Introduction...........................................................................880
Design..................................................................................881
Technical data......................................................................881
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)..............882
Introduction...........................................................................882
Design..................................................................................882
Functionality.........................................................................884
Technical data......................................................................885
Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication
module (SLM) ...........................................................................885
Introduction...........................................................................885
Design..................................................................................885
Technical data......................................................................886
Galvanic RS485 communication module...................................887
Introduction...........................................................................887
Design..................................................................................887
Technical data......................................................................888
Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................889
Introduction...........................................................................889
Functionality.........................................................................889
Design..................................................................................889
Technical data......................................................................890
mA input module (MIM).............................................................890
Introduction...........................................................................890
Design..................................................................................890
Technical data......................................................................891
24

REL 670
Table of contents
GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................892

Introduction...........................................................................892
Design..................................................................................892
Technical data......................................................................894
GPS antenna.............................................................................894
Introduction...........................................................................894
Design..................................................................................894
Technical data......................................................................896
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B.............................897
Introduction...........................................................................897
Design..................................................................................897
Technical data......................................................................898
Dimensions.....................................................................................898
Case without rear cover.............................................................898
Case with rear cover..................................................................899
Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................901
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................902
Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................903
External resistor unit for high impedance differential
protection...................................................................................903
Mounting alternatives.....................................................................904
Flush mounting..........................................................................904
Overview..............................................................................904
Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................905
19 panel rack mounting............................................................906
Overview..............................................................................906
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.................907
Wall mounting............................................................................907
Overview..............................................................................907
Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................908
How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................908
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.................................................909
Overview..............................................................................909
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............910
IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case.................................910
Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................911
Overview..............................................................................911
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........912
Technical data................................................................................912
Enclosure...................................................................................912
Connection system....................................................................913
Influencing factors.....................................................................913
Type tests according to standard..............................................914
REL 670

25
Table of contents
Section 19 Labels...........................................................................917
Different labels................................................................................917
Section 20 Connection diagrams...................................................921

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics.........................................937
Application......................................................................................937
Principle of operation......................................................................939
Mode of operation......................................................................939
Inverse characteristics....................................................................945
Section 22 Glossary.......................................................................959
Glossary.........................................................................................959
26

REL 670
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
About this chapter
This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides
information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.
1.1
Introduction to the technical reference manual
1.1.1
About the complete set of manuals for an IED

The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Application
manual
Technical
reference
manual
Installation and
commissioning
manual
Operators
manual
Engineering
guide
en06000097.vsd
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines

and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to
find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The
manual should also be used when calculating settings.
The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality
descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals,
setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference
manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how
to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a
reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and
electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and
configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section
numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned.
The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection
IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual
REL 670

27
Section 1
Introduction
can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and
measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.
The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the
IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED
670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read
disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third
part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670
products and the PCM 600 tool.
The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850
station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600
and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor
and how to set up projects and communication.
1.1.2
About the technical reference manual

The technical reference manual contains the following chapters:
28
The chapter Local human-machine interface describes the control panel on

the IED. Display characteristics, control keys and various local human-machine
interface features are explained.
The chapter Basic IED functions presents functions that are included in all
IEDs regardless of the type of protection they are designed for. These are
functions like Time synchronization, Self supervision with event list, Test mode
and other functions of a general nature.
The chapter Distance protection describes the functions for distance zones
with their quadrilateral characteristics, phase selection with load encroachment,
power swing detection and similar.
The chapter Current protection describes functions such as overcurrent
protection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance.
The chapter Voltage protection describes functions like undervoltage and
overvoltage protection as well as residual overvoltage protection.
The chapter Frequency protection describes functions for overfrequency,
underfrequency and rate of change of frequency.
The chapter Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function
for current and voltage.
The chapter Secondary system supervision includes descriptions of functions
like current based Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision.
The chapter Control describes the control functions. These are functions like
the Synchronization and energizing check as well as several others which are
product specific.
The chapter Scheme communication describes among others functions related
to current reversal and weak end infeed logic.
The chapter Logic describes trip logic and related functions.
The chapter Monitoring describes measurement related functions used to
provide data regarding relevant quantities, events, faults and the like.
The chapter Metering describes primarily Pulse counter logic.

REL 670
Section 1
Introduction
1.1.3
The chapter Station communication describes Ethernet based communication

in general including the use of IEC61850, and horizontal communication via
GOOSE.
The chapter Remote communication describes binary and analog signal
transfer, and the associated hardware.
The chapter Hardware provides descriptions of the IED and its components.
The chapter Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and
information regarding connections to and from the IED.
The chapter Time inverse characteristics describes and explains inverse time
delay, inverse time curves and their effects.
The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in
ABB technical documentation.
Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)

The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where
applicable). The different sections are outlined below.
1.1.3.1
Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.
1.1.3.2
Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and
measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.
Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered
by dashed lines.
Signal names
Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes.
The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for
the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the
particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in
figure 4 is as follows:
BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from
the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand
side. Settings are not displayed.
Input and output signals
In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the
outer border of the diagram.
REL 670

29
Section 1
Introduction
Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can be
connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs.
Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals
are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3.
Setting parameters
Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting
parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their
values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the
symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes.
Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.
Internal signals
Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from the
frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues,
see figure 3.
BLKTR
TEST
TEST
&
Block TUV=Yes
>1
BLOCK-int.
BLOCK
VTSU
BLOCK-int.
STUL1N
&
BLOCK-int.
&
STUL2N
BLOCK-int.
STUL3N
&
>1
&
TRIP
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
xx04000375.vsd
Figure 1:
Logic diagram example with -int signals
External signals
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram
have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.
30

REL 670
Section 1
Introduction
STZMPP-cont.
>1
STCND
STNDL1L2-cont.
&
1L1L2
STNDL2L3-cont.
&
1L2L3
1L3L1
1L1N
1L2N
&
STNDL3L1-cont.
&
STNDL1N-cont.
&
STNDL2N-cont.
STNDL3N-cont.
&
1L3N
STNDPE-cont.
>1
>1
1--VTSZ
&
>1
1--BLOCK
1--STND
BLK-cont.
xx04000376.vsd
Figure 2:
Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal
STNDL1N-cont.
>1
STNDL2N-cont.
STNDL3N-cont.
STNDL1L2-cont.
>1
&
15 ms
t
STL1
&
15 ms
t
STL2
&
15 ms
t
STL3
&
15 ms
t
START
STNDL2L3-cont.
STNDL3L1-cont.
>1
>1
BLK-cont.
xx04000377.vsd
Figure 3:
REL 670
Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

31
Section 1
Introduction
1.1.3.3

Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of
two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column
contains the description of the signal.
1.1.3.4
Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically.
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand
side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available.
These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and are
therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described
in the settings table.
IEC 61850 - 8 -1
Logical Node
CAP531 Name
Inputs
TUV1PH2PUVM
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
TRIP
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Outputs
Diagram
Number
en05000330.vsd
Figure 4:
1.1.3.5
Example of a function block
Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function
in question.
1.1.3.6
Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function
or hardware described.
32

REL 670
Section 1
Introduction
1.1.4
Intended audience
General
This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in
normal service.
Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,
protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in
the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a
basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.
1.1.5
Related documents
Documents related to REL 670
Identity number
Operators manual
1MRK 506 276-UEN
Installation and commissioning manual
1MRK 506 277-UEN
1MRK 506 275-UEN
Application manual
1MRK 506 278-UEN
Buyers guide
1MRK 506 280-BEN
Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr.
1MRK 002 801-BA
Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr.
1MRK 002 801-CA
Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr.
1MRK 002 801-DA
Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr.
1MRK 002 801-EA
Configuration diagram A, Single breaker with single or double busbar, 3 pole

tripping (A31)
1MRK 004 500-86
Configuration diagram B, Single breaker with single or double busbar, 1/3 pole 1MRK 004 500-87
tripping (A32)
Configuration diagram C, Multi breaker such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. 3 pole 1MRK 004 500-88
tripping (B31)
Configuration diagram D, Multi breaker such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. 1/3 pole 1MRK 004 500-89
tripping (B32)
Setting example 1, 400 kV Long overhead power line with 1 1/2 CB arr.
Quadrilaterial characteristic.
1MRK 506 267-WEN
Setting example 2, Setting example 1, 400 kV Long overhead power line with
1 1/2 CB arr. Mho characteristic.
1MRK 506 291-WEN
Setting example 3, 230 kV Extremely long overhead power line, double bus,
single CB arr. Quadrilaterial characteristic.
1MRK 506 268-WEN
Setting example 4, 230 kV Extremely long overhead power line, double bus,
single CB arr. Mho characteristic.
1MRK 506 292-WEN
Setting example 5, 132 kV Short overhead power line, double bus, single CB
arr. Quadrilaterial characteristic.
1MRK 506 269-WEN
Table continued on next page
REL 670

33
Section 1
Introduction
Documents related to REL 670
Setting example 6, 132 kV Short overhead power line, double bus, single CB
arr. Mho characteristic.
Identity number
1MRK 506 290-WEN
Setting example 7, 70 kV power line on a resonance earth system. Double bus, 1MRK 506 293-WEN
single breaker arrangement.
Setting example 8, 400 kV long series compensated line. 1 1/2 breaker
arrangement.
1MRK 506 294-WEN
Connection and Installation components
1MRK 013 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST
1MRK 512 001-BEN
Accessories for IED 670
1MRK 514 012-BEN
Getting started guide IED 670
1MRK 500 080-UEN
SPA and LON signal list for IED 670, ver. 1.1
1MRK 500 083-WEN
IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670, ver. 1.1
1MRK 500 084-WEN
Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package
1KHA001027-UEN
Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet
1MRS755552
Engineering guide IED 670 products
1MRK 511 179-UEN
Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation
1.1.6
Revision notes
Revision
B
34
Description
No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.

REL 670
Section 2
Local human-machine interface
Section 2

About this chapter
This chapter describes the structure and use of the Local human machine interface
(LHMI) or in other words, the control panel on the IED.
2.1
Human machine interface

The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized
model. The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small
size LCD can display seven line of text and the medium size LCD can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page.
Up to 12 SLD pages can be defined, depending on the product capability.
The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects.
The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole front
plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality:
REL 670
Status indication LEDs

Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with
user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool
Liquid crystal display (LCD)
Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for
selection between local and remote control and reset
An isolated RJ45 communication port

35
Section 2
36
Figure 5:
Small graphic HMI
Figure 6:
Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects

REL 670
Section 2
2.2
Small size graphic HMI
2.2.1
Introduction
The small sized HMI is available for 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19 case. The LCD on the
small HMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per
line. The first line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time.
The remaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.
2.2.2
Design
The LHMI is identical for both the 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the
small LHMI is shown in figure 7
3
Figure 7:
en05000055.eps
Small graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD
REL 670

37
Section 2
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ 45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad
2.3
Medium size graphic HMI
2.3.1
Introduction
The 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19 cases can be equipped with the medium size LCD. This is
a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines
with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is
required.
2.3.2
Design
The different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 8The LHMI, exists
in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad operation
buttons and the yellow LED designation.
38

REL 670
Section 2
Figure 8:
en05000056.eps
Medium size graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad
2.4
Keypad
REL 670

39
Section 2
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look
and feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differ
but the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 9.
Figure 9:
The HMI keypad.
The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.
Table 1:
Key
HMI keys on the front of the IED

Function
This key closes (energizes) a breaker or disconnector.
This key opens a breaker or disconnector.
The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.
This key is used to clear entries, It cancels commands and edits.
Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.
The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.
This key opens the reset screen.
The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.
The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode.
40

REL 670
Section 2
Key
Function
The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.
The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
2.5
LED
2.5.1
Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events
may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something
that has occurred and needs some sort of action.
2.5.2

There are three LEDs above the LCD. The information they communicate is described
in the table below.
LED Indication
Information
Green:
Steady
In service
Flashing
Internal failure
Dark
No power supply
Yellow:
Steady
Dist. rep. triggered
Flashing
Terminal in test mode
Red:
Steady
2.5.3
Trip command issued
Indication LEDs
The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in IED 670s. Its main
purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or
alarm signals.
There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right hand
side of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen.
They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.
REL 670

41
Section 2
The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they are
dependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally on
the HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow:
Bay controller failure

CB close blocked
Interlocking bypassed
SF6 Gas refill
Position error
CB spring charge alarm
Oil temperature alarm
Thermal overload trip
The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established
between the IED and a computer.
The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or
remote control of the IED is active.
2.6
LHMI related functions
2.6.1
Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with:
2.6.2
function block LHMI (LocalHMI)

function block HLED (LEDMonitor)
setting parameters
General setting parameters

Table 2:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Language
English
OptionalLanguage
English
Local HMI language
DisplayTimeout
10 - 120
10
60
Min
Local HMI display

timeout
AutoRepeat
Off
On
On
Activation of autorepeat (On) or not

(Off)
ContrastLevel
-10 - 20
Contrast level for

display
42

REL 670
Section 2
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DefaultScreen
0-0
Default screen
EvListSrtOrder
Latest on top
Oldest on top
Latest on top
Sort order of event list
SymbolFont
IEC
ANSI
IEC
Symbol font for Single

Line Diagram
2.6.3
2.6.3.1
Design
The function block LHMI (LocalHMI) controls and supplies information about the
status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI are
configured with the PCM 600 tool.
The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration
logic.
See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.
2.6.3.2
Function block
LHMILocalHMI
CLRLEDS
HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
en05000773.vsd
Figure 10:
2.6.3.3
LHMI function block

Table 3:
Input signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block
Signal
Description
CLRLEDS
Table 4:
Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
Output signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block
Signal
Description
HMI-ON
Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S
Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S
Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
REL 670

43
Section 2
Signal
Description
YELLOW-F
Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE
A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are

cleared
LEDSCLRD
Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active
2.6.4
Indication LEDs
2.6.4.1
Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about
the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are
configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected
individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for
trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow.
Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to
Technical reference manual.
2.6.4.2
Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in
some of the modes of the HLED. The latest LED picture appears immediately after
the IED is successfully restarted.
Operating modes
Collecting mode
Re-starting mode
44
LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is
suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.
In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only
LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A

REL 670
Section 2
disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI
From function input
The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual

acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is
performed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, refer
to the Operators manual.
The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,

RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a
binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive
edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is
continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications
active at the moment when the button is first pressed.
Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequences
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow
the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function
is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only
working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and restarting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady
and F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected
sequence diagrams below.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 11.
REL 670

45
Section 2
= No indication
= Steady light
= Flash
en05000506.vsd
Figure 11:
Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
en01000228.vsd
Figure 12:
Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the
signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it
gets a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
Figure 13:
Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.
46

REL 670
Section 2
Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation
of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
en01000235.vsd
Figure 14:
Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge
of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals
is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of
LEDs set for other sequences.
Definition of a disturbance
A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated
until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs
set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and
some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does
not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all
signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown
in figure 15.
REL 670

47
Section 2
From
disturbance
length control
per LED
set to
sequence 6
New
disturbance
tRestart
t
&
&
1
&
en01000237.vsd
Figure 15:
Activation of new disturbance
In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each
LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition
of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i
diagram in figure 16.
Activating signal
To LED
AND
tMax
To disturbance
length control
t
en05000507.vsd
Figure 16:
Length control of activating signals
Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
48

REL 670
Section 2
Disturbance
t Restart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 17:
en01000239.vsd
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance
Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.
Disturbance
t Restart
Disturbance
t Restart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 18:
REL 670
en01000240.vsd
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

49
Section 2
Figure 19 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance
t Restart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
en01000241.vsd
Figure 19:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 20 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance
t Restart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
en01000242.vsd
Figure 20:
50
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

REL 670
Section 2
2.6.4.3
Function block
HLEDLEDMonitor
BLOCK
RESET
LEDTEST
NEWIND
ACK
en05000508.vsd
Figure 21:
2.6.4.4
HLED function block

Table 5:
Input signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Input to block the operation of the LED-unit
RESET
Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit
LEDTEST
Input for external LED test
Table 6:
Output signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block
Signal
2.6.4.5
Description
NEWIND
A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs
ACK
A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
Setting parameters
Table 7:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation mode for

the LED function
tRestart
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Defines the
disturbance length
tMax
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Maximum time for the

definition of a
disturbance
SeqTypeLED1
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 1
REL 670

51
Section 2
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SeqTypeLED2
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 2
SeqTypeLED3
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 3
SeqTypeLED4
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 4
SeqTypeLED5
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 5
SeqTypeLED6
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 6
SeqTypeLED7
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 7
SeqTypeLED8
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
sequence type for

LED 8
SeqTypeLED9
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 9
SeqTypeLED10
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 10
52

REL 670
Section 2
Parameter
REL 670
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SeqTypeLED11
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 11
SeqTypeLED12
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 12
SeqTypeLED13
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 13
SeqTypeLED14
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 14
SeqTypeLED15
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 15

53
54
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Section 3
Basic IED functions

About this chapter
This chapter presents functions that are basic to all REx670 IEDs. Typical functions
in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.
3.1
Analog inputs
3.1.1
Introduction
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations
the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring
and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must
be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using
primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well.
Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current
and voltage transformers.
In order to make Service Values reading easier it is possible to define a reference
PhaseAngleRef. Then this analog channels phase angle will be always fixed to zero
degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input.
During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be freely
change in order to facilitate testing and service values reading.
VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of
Transformer Input Module (TRM).
3.1.2
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. The
main CTs are typically star connected and can be connected with the star point to the
object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED. The convention
of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power etc.
means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means
direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object
is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse, see
figure 22
REL 670

55
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
Figure 22:
Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670
With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or

ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction
defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primary
system quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ratios of the main CTs
and VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under General
settings/Analog module in the parameter settings tool PST.
3.1.3
Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The
signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the
configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can
be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and used
internally in the configuration.
3.1.4
Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.
Table 8:
Parameter
PhaseAngleRef
56
General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function

Range
1 - 24

Step
1
Default
1
Unit
Ch
Description
Reference channel
for phase angle
presentation
REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 9:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
REL 670

57
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Parameter
58
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec7
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec8
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec9
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint10
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec10
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim10
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint11
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec11
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim11
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint12
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec12
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim12
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 10:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
REL 670

59
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec7
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec8
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec9
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
Table 11:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
60

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim7
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim8
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim9
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
REL 670

61
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Parameter
3.2
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated VT primary
voltage
Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are
accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept
of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based
on the following facts:
There are two types of points of access to the IED 670:
local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different
areas of the IED and tools functionality; the pre-defined user types are defined
as follows:
User type
Access rights
Guest
Read only
SuperUser
Full access
SPAGuest
Read only + control
SystemOperator
Control from LHMI, no bypass
ProtectionEngineer
All settings
DesignEngineer
Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and CMT)
UserAdministrator
User and password administration for the IED
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management
Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of
the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.
62

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.2.1
Authorization handling in the tool

Upon the creation of an IED in the Plant Structure, the User Management Tool is
immediately accessible, by right clicking with the mouse on that specific IED name:
Figure 23:
Right-clicking to get the User Management Tool IED Users.
By left-clicking on the IED Users submenu, the tool will open in the right-side
panel:
REL 670

63
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Figure 24:
User Manager Tool opened in the right-side panel.
By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate
the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User
Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users
and Groups existent in the IED.
If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing
settings in the User Management Tool database.
Even if the administrator empties the tool database, the users
previously defined are still in the IED. They cannot be erased by
downloading the empty list into the IED (the tool wont download an
empty list), so it is strongly recommended that before you create any
user you create one that belongs to the SuperUser group.
If the administrator marks the check box User must logon to this IED, then the
fields under the User Management tab are becoming accessible and one can add,
delete and edit users.
To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black
arrow, see figure 25 on the User subtab:
64

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Figure 25:
User subtab and creation of a new user.
Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter
details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing Next and
advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:
Figure 26:
REL 670
Enter details about the user.

65
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Figure 27:
Assign the user to a group.
Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there
are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 28
Figure 28:
Operations on users in the users list.
No. Description
1
Delete selected user
Change password
Add another group to the user permissions
The Group subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details
of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:
66

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Figure 29:
The Groups subtab.
It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in
the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the Users subtab.
The Functions subtab is a descriptional area, showing in detail what Read/Write
permissions has each user group, in respect to various tools and components.
Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means
of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as
from the other tools:
No. Description
REL 670
Upload from IED
Download to IED

67
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.2.2
Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the superuser. No LogOn is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the UMT(User Management Tool). See Application
manual for more details.
Once a user is created and downloaded into the IED, that user can perform a LogOn,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will cause the display to show a message
box saying: No user defined!
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Settings
\General Settings\HMI\Screen\ Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED will return to a
Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes
at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the UMT and downloaded into the IED,
then, when a user intentionally attempts a LogOn or when the user attempts to perform
an operation that is password protected, the LogOn window will appear
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, one
can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down
arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again.
When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will
show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the pasword. After all the letters
are introduced (passwords are case sensitive!) choose OK and press E key again.
If everything is O.K. at a voluntary LogOn the LHMI returns to the Authorization
screen. If the LogOn is OK, when required to change for example a password
protected setting, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the LogOn has
failed, then the LogOn window will pop-up again, until either the user makes it right
or presses Cancel.
3.3
Self supervision with internal event list
3.3.1
Introduction
The self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated
by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in
an internal event list.
3.3.2
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
68

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

Checking of digitized measuring signals.
Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCS
system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under
Diagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the
Installation and Commissioning manual for a detailed list of supervision signals
that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI.
A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm
contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of
this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 31 and
a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 30
Figure 30:
REL 670
Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

69
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Figure 31:
Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block.
Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signals
from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system.
The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs for
signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions
if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module
in the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained
from the time synchronization block TIME.
3.3.2.1
Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One group
handles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another group
handles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. The
standard signals are listed in table 12. The hardware dependent internal signals are
listed in table 13. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 14.
70

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 12:
Self-supervision's standard internal signals
Name of signal
Description
FAIL
Internal Fail status
WARNING
Internal Warning status
NUMFAIL
CPU module Fail status
NUMWARNING
CPU module Warning status
RTCERROR
Real Time Clock status
TIMESYNCHERROR
Time Synchronization status
RTEERROR
Runtime Execution Error status
IEC61850ERROR
IEC 61850 Error status
WATCHDOG
SW Watchdog Error status
LMDERROR
LON/Mip Device Error status
APPERROR
Runtime Application Error status
SETCHGD
Settings changed
SETGRPCHGD
Setting groups changed
FTFERROR
Fault Tolerant Filesystem status
Table 13:
Card
Self-supervision's HW dependent internal signals

Name of signal
Description
ADxx
ADxx
Analog In Module Error status
BIM
BIM-Error
Binary In Module Error status
BOM
BOM-Error
Binary Out Module Error status
IOM
IOM-Error
In/Out Module Error status
MIM
MIM-Error
Millampere Input Module Error status
LDCM
LDCM-Error
Line Differential Communication Error status
Table 14:
Explanations of internal signals
Name of signal
Reasons for activation
FAIL
This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; INT--NUMFAIL, INT--LMDERROR, INT-WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT-FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals
WARNING

signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR,
INT--TIMESYNCHERROR
NUMFAIL

signals are active; INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT-RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR
NUMWARNING

signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR
This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the
real time clock.
REL 670

71
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Name of signal
3.3.2.2
Reasons for activation
TIMESYNCHERROR
This signal will be active when the source of the time

synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time
reset.
RTEERROR
This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some

actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of
settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups,
loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR
This signal will be active if the IEC61850 stack did not succeed in
some actions like reading IEC61850 configuration, startup etc.
WATCHDOG
This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too
heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
LMDERROR
LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error

state.
APPERROR
This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads

are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can
be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc.
SETCHGD
This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list
if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD
This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list
if any setting groups are changed.
FTFERROR
This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file
are corrupted and can not be recovered.
Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure
32.
Figure 32:
Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the 600 platform.
The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converters with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal
72

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm
is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves
the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.
The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller
function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the
validation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU,
i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times
higherADx_HI.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison
of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed
and an alarm will be given.
The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.
3.3.3
Function block
IS--InternalSignal
FAIL
WARNING
CPUFAIL
CPUWARN
T SYNCERR
RT CERR
en04000392.vsd
Figure 33:
3.3.4
Output signals
Table 15:
3.3.5
IS function block
Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block
Signal
Description
FAIL
Internal fail
WARNING
Internal warning
CPUFAIL
CPU fail
CPUWARN
CPU warning
TSYNCERR
Time synchronization status
RTCERR
Real time clock status
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
REL 670

73
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.3.6
Technical data
Table 16:
Self supervision with internal event list
Data
Value
Recording manner
Continuous, event controlled
List size
1000 events, first in-first out
3.4
Time synchronization
3.4.1
Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolute
time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison of
events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
General concepts
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the
time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the
clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock
gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that knows its own faults and
tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.

A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower
levels.
74

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Syncronization from
a higher level
Module
Optional syncronization of
modules at a lower level
en05000206.vsd
Figure 34:
Synchronization principle
A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of:
3.4.2.2
The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message
The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.
Real Time Clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond.
The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098.
RTC at power off
During power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC that
will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time
in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the
time will be lost completely.
RTC at startup
At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last
up time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC
power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will
start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time
synchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization".
Time synchronization startup procedure
The first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) will
give an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is
REL 670

75
Section 3
Basic IED functions
thereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three
things will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as
fine:
If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from its
origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used
directly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED will remove this time-message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in the
synchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100
milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a
safe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lower
than the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is
removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7
minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial setting
of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal
time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.
Rate accuracy
In the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IED
is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if the
surrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach full
accuracy.
Time-out on synchronization sources
All synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receive
time-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-out
is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than
one message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given.
3.4.2.3
Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the
synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IED
as a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to a
binary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time
in the IEDs.
Synchronization via SNTP
SNTP provides a Ping-Pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from

an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling in
a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operate
76

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
properly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server.
SNTP server requirements
The SNTP server to be used shall be connected to the local network, i.e. not more
than 4-5 switches/routers away from the IED. The SNTP server shall be dedicated
for its task, or at least equipped with at real-time operating system, i.e. not a PC with
SNTP server software. The SNTP server shall be stable, i.e. either synchronized from
a stable source like GPS, or local i.e. without synchronization. Using a local SNTP
server i.e. without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant
configuration is not recommended.
Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)
On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are
sent.
Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e.
year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset between
the local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in
events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized from
various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a local time for each 103
session.
The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).
Synchronization via Built-in-GPS
The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the
global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization
Module (GSM).
Synchronization via binary input
The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be
generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is not
synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the
substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal
is also considered as a fine signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED.
The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation
and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute
pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute
pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the
IED.
REL 670

77
Section 3
Basic IED functions
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after
the last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:
Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

Pulse length (b):
Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.

Maximum pulse length is optional.
Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".
Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.
a
b
c
en05000251.vsd
Figure 35:
Binary minute pulses
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The
next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,
contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting
the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 ms
between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will
not be accepted.
Example, binary synchronization
A IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a
binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute
pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is
that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is
not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike
filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the
78

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the
time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC
backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for
instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the
internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected.
The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will
either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time,
if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to
a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its
destination within 1.7 minutes.
Synchronization via IRIG
Synchronization with DNP3.0
The DNP3.0 communication can be the source for the course time synchronization,
while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy.
The IRIG interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods, IRIGB and PPS.
IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there is a number of
figures stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via
the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the
galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a figure in
the range 1-7.
00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation
is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains
information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information only contains the time
within the year, and year information has to come from the tool or HMI.
The IRIG Module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by many IRIGB clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of time-zone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG
module. In this case, also send the local time in the messages, as this local time plus
the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.
PPS
REL 670

79
Section 3
Basic IED functions
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG module.
The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +- 2 us after
another PPS signal. The allowed jitter of 2 us is settable.
3.4.3
Function block
TIMETIME
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
en05000425.vsd
Figure 36:
3.4.4
TIME function block
Output signals
Table 17:
Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block
Signal
3.4.5
Description
TSYNCERR
Time synchronization error
RTCERR
Real time clock error
Setting parameters
Path in local HMI: Setting/Time
Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization
Table 18:
Parameter
80
Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Off
SPA
LON
SNTP
Off
Coarse time
synchronization
source
FineSyncSource
Off
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
Off
Fine time
synchronization
source
SyncMaster
Off
SNTP-Server
Off
Activate IEDas
synchronization
master
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
Fast
Fast
Adjust rate for time

synchronization

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 19:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Off
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
Off
Coarse time
synchronization
source
FineSyncSource
Off
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
Off
Fine time
synchronization
source
SyncMaster
Off
SNTP-Server
Off
Activate IEDas
synchronization
master
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
Fast
Slow
Adjust rate for time

synchronization
Table 20:
Parameter
General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ModulePosition
3 - 16
Hardware position of
IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput
1 - 16
Binary input number

for time
synchronization
BinDetection
PositiveEdge
NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Positive or negative
edge detection
Table 21:
Parameter
REL 670
Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function
General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ServerIP-Add
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Redundant server IPaddress

81
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 22:
Parameter
82
General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
March
Month in year when

daylight time starts
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Day in week when

WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Week in month when

UTCTimeOfDay
0 - 86400
3600
UTC Time of day in

seconds when

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 23:
Parameter
General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
October
Month in year when

daylight time ends
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Day in week when

daylight time ends
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Week in month when

daylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay
0 - 86400
3600
UTC Time of day in

seconds when
daylight time ends
Table 24:
Parameter
NoHalfHourUTC
Table 25:
Parameter
General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function

Range
-24 - 24
Step
1
Default
0
Unit
-
Description
Number of half-hours
from UTC
Basic general settings for the TimeSynchIRIGB (TIRI-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SynchType
BNC
Opto
Opto
Type of
synchronization
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
Time zone as in 1344

standard
3.4.6
Technical data
REL 670

83
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 26:
Time synchronization, time tagging
Function
Value
Time tagging resolution, Events and Sampled

Measurement Values
1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min

(minute pulse synchronization), Events and
Sampled Measurement Values
1.0 ms typically
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization,

Sampled Measurement Values
1.0 ms typically
3.5
Parameter setting groups
3.5.1
Introduction
Use the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions.
By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the humanmachine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED
that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.
3.5.2
The ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the
setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active
setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration
purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.
84

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Figure 37:
Connection of the function to external circuits
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.
The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will
be shown on the PST setting tool.
3.5.3
Function block
ACGRActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
ACTGRP5
GRP5
ACTGRP6
GRP6
SETCHGD
en05000433.vsd
Figure 38:
ACGR function block
SGC-NoOfSetGrp
MAXSETGR
en05000716.vsd
3.5.4
REL 670

85
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 27:
Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block
Signal
Description
ACTGRP1
Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2
ACTGRP3
ACTGRP4
ACTGRP5
ACTGRP6
Table 28:
Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block
Signal
3.5.5
GRP1
Setting group 1 is active
GRP2
GRP3
GRP4
GRP5
GRP6
SETCHGD
Pulse when setting changed
Setting parameters
Table 29:
Parameter
t
Table 30:
Parameter
86
Description
General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function

Range
0.0 - 10.0
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Unit
s
Description
Pulse length of pulse
when setting changed
General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ActiveSetGrp
SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
SettingGroup1
ActiveSettingGroup
NoOfSetGrp
1-6
No
Number of possible
setting groups to
switch between

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.6
Test mode functionality
3.6.1
Introduction
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test
mode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are
disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.
3.6.2
To be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TEST
mode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode:
By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST.

By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test
mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST is
activated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which is
the generator of the Test mode: On state input from configuration (OUTPUT
output activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions
are blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality and
event signalling.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (the
output ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 39.
When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled
and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set
and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes
are possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.
The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test
handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30)
can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.
REL 670

87
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. A
typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 39.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus
to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events e.g. during a
maintenance test.
Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
Figure 39:
3.6.3
Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection

function.
Function block
TESTTest
INPUT
ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
en05000443.vsd
Figure 40:
TEST function block
3.6.4
88

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 31:
Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT
Table 32:
Sets terminal in test mode when active
Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block
Signal
3.6.5
Description
ACTIVE
Terminal in test mode when active
OUTPUT
Test input is active
SETTING
Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)
NOEVENT
Event disabled during testmode
Setting parameters
Table 33:
Basic general settings for the Test (TEST-) function
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TestMode
Off
On
Off
Test mode in
operation (On) or not
(Off)
EventDisable
Off
On
Off
Event disable during

testmode
CmdTestBit
Off
On
Off
Command bit for test

required or not during
testmode
3.7
IED identifiers
3.7.1
Introduction
There are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually:
ProductInformation function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but
nevertheless very important:
IED Type
ProductDef
FirmwareVer
IEDMainFunType
SerialNo.
Ordering No.
ProductionDate.
The settings are visable on the local HMI, under:

REL 670

89
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Diagnostics/IED Status/ProductIdentifiers
They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
TerminalID function is allowing you to identify the individual IED in your system,
not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
3.7.2
Setting parameters
Table 34:
General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
StationName
0 - 18
Station name
Station name
StationNumber
0 - 99999
Station number
ObjectName
0 - 18
Object name
Object name
ObjectNumber
0 - 99999
Object number
UnitName
0 - 18
Unit name
Unit name
UnitNumber
0 - 99999
Unit number
3.8
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)
3.8.1
Introduction
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal
Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way
binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
3.8.2
The SMBI function block, see figure 41, receives its inputs from the real (hardware)
binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration
via its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be
tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall
be connected between physical IO and the SMBI function block.
90

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.8.3
Function block
SI01SMBI
INSTNAME
BI1NAME
BI2NAME
BI3NAME
BI4NAME
BI5NAME
BI6NAME
BI7NAME
BI8NAME
BI9NAME
BI10NAME
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI7
BI8
BI9
BI10
en05000434.vsd
Figure 41:
3.8.4
SI function block

Table 35:
Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block
Signal
Description
BI1
Binary input 1
BI2
Binary input 2
BI3
Binary input 3
BI4
Binary input 4
BI5
Binary input 5
BI6
Binary input 6
BI7
Binary input 7
BI8
Binary input 8
BI9
Binary input 9
BI10
Binary input 10
3.9
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)
3.9.1
Introduction
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
binary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.
REL 670

91
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.9.2
The SMBO function block, see figure 42, receives logical signal from the IED
configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT. The
inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function
block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which
signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
3.9.3
Function block
SO01SMBO
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
INSTNAME
BO1NAME
BO2NAME
BO3NAME
BO4NAME
BO5NAME
BO6NAME
BO7NAME
BO8NAME
BO9NAME
BO10NAME
en05000439.vsd
Figure 42:
3.9.4
SO function block

Table 36:
Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block
Signal
92
Description
BO1
Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.10
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)
3.10.1
Introduction
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED670 configuration.
3.10.2
The SMMI function block, see figure 43, receives its inputs from the real (hardware)
mA inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via
its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be
tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT.
The outputs on the SMMI are normally connected to the MVGGIO function block
for further use of the mA signals.
3.10.3
Function block
SMI1SMMI
INSTNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
AI5NAME
AI6NAME
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AI5
AI6
en05000440.vsd
Figure 43:
3.10.4
SMI function block

Table 37:
Output signals for the SMMI (SMI1-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
AI1
Analog milliampere input 1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AI5
AI6

93
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.11
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)
3.11.1
Introduction
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known)
is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please
see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter
Engineering of the IED). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one
IED 670 configuration.
3.11.2
Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one
neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 44 and figure 45. The outputs of
the SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals
acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244
values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the function block.
The output singal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the in SMT connected input to AI1
to AI4. AIN is always the neutral current, calculated residual sum or the signal
connected to AI4. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of
current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few
exceptions (HEDIF, BBDIF) shall always be connected to AI3P.
3.11.3
Function block
PR01SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
en05000705.vsd
Figure 44:
PR01 function block

PR02SMAI
BLOCK
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
en07000130.vsd
Figure 45:
94
PR0212 function block

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.11.4

Table 38:
Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block group 1
DFTSYNC
Synchronisation of DFT calculation
DFTSPFC
Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT

calculation
Table 39:
Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block
Signal
Description
SYNCOUT
Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function
SPFCOUT
Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT

reference function
AI3P
Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
AI1
Group 1 analog input 1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
Table 40:
Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Table 41:
Block group 2
Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block
Signal
Description
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
3.11.5
Setting parameters
REL 670

95
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal
frequency DFT reference is then the reference.
Table 42:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference for

external output
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Input connection type
TYPE
1-2
Ch
1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 43:
Parameter
96
Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function
Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Negation
Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Off
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Limit for frequency

calculation in % of
UBase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base Voltage

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 44:
Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Input connection type
TYPE
1-2
Ch
1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 45:
Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Negation
Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Off
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Limit for frequency

calculation in % of
UBase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base Voltage
3.12
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)
3.12.1
Introduction
The SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analog
signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
3.12.2
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, see
figure 46. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the
function block.
REL 670

97
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.12.3
Function block
SU01Sum3Ph
BLOCK
DFTSYNC
DFTSPFC
G1AI3P
G2AI3P
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
en05000441.vsd
Figure 46:
3.12.4
SU function block

Table 46:
Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block
DFTSYNC
Synchronisation of DFT calculation
DFTSPFC
Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT

calculation
G1AI3P
G2AI3P
Table 47:
Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block
Signal
3.12.5
Description
AI3P
Group analog input 3-phase group
AI1
Group 1 analog input
AI2
AI3
AI4
Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default
value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
98

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 48:
Basic general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SummationType
Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
(Group1+Group2)
Group1+Group2
Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
Table 49:
Advanced general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FreqMeasMinVal
5 - 200
10
Amplitude limit for

frequency calculation
in % of Ubase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
3.13
Authority status (AUTS)
3.13.1
Introduction
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication
function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:
3.13.2
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever on of the two events described above happens, the specific output
(USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) will be activated. The output can e.g. be connected
on Event function block for LON/SPA. The signals are also available on IEC 61850
station bus.
REL 670

99
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.13.3
Function block
AUTSAuthStatus
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
en06000503.vsd
Figure 47:
3.13.4
AUTS function block
Output signals
Table 50:
Output signals for the AuthStatus (AUTS-) function block
Signal
3.13.5
Description
USRBLKED
At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON
At least one user is logged on
Setting parameters
100

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
3.14
Goose binary receive
3.14.1
Function block
GB01GooseBinRcv
BLOCK
INSTNAME
OUT1
OUT1VAL
OUT2
OUT2VAL
OUT3
OUT3VAL
OUT4
OUT4VAL
OUT5
OUT5VAL
OUT6
OUT6VAL
OUT7
OUT7VAL
OUT8
OUT8VAL
OUT9
OUT9VAL
OUT10
OUT10VAL
OUT11
OUT11VAL
OUT12
OUT12VAL
OUT13
OUT13VAL
OUT14
OUT14VAL
OUT15
OUT15VAL
OUT16
OUT16VAL
OUT1NAM
OUT2NAM
OUT3NAM
OUT4NAM
OUT5NAM
OUT6NAM
OUT7NAM
OUT8NAM
OUT9NAM
OUT10NAM
OUT11NAM
OUT12NAM
OUT13NAM
OUT14NAM
OUT15NAM
OUT16NAM
en07000047.vsd
Figure 48:
GB function block
3.14.2
REL 670

101
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Table 51:
Input signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of output signals
INSTNAME
Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool
Table 52:
Output signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block
Signal
Description
OUT1
Binary output 1
OUT1VAL
Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2
Binary output 2
OUT2VAL
OUT3
Binary output 3
OUT3VAL
OUT4
Binary output 4
OUT4VAL
OUT5
Binary output 5
OUT5VAL
OUT6
Binary output 6
OUT6VAL
OUT7
Binary output 7
OUT7VAL
OUT8
Binary output 8
OUT8VAL
OUT9
Binary output 9
OUT9VAL
OUT10
Binary output 10
OUT10VAL
OUT11
Binary output 11
OUT11VAL
OUT12
Binary output 12
OUT12VAL
OUT13
Binary output 13
OUT13VAL
OUT14
Binary output 14
OUT14VAL
OUT15
Binary output 15
OUT15VAL
OUT16
Binary output 16
OUT16VAL
102

REL 670
Section 3
Basic IED functions
Signal
3.14.3
Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT2NAM
OUT3NAM
OUT4NAM
OUT5NAM
OUT6NAM
OUT7NAM
OUT8NAM
OUT9NAM
OUT10NAM
OUT11NAM
OUT12NAM
OUT13NAM
OUT14NAM
OUT15NAM
OUT16NAM
Setting parameters
Table 53:
Parameter
Operation
REL 670
Description
OUT1NAM
Basic general settings for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function

Range
Off
On

Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation Off/On
103
104
Section 4
Differential protection
Section 4
About this chapter
This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in
differential protection.
4.1
High impedance differential protection (PDIF,

87)
Function block name: HZDx-
IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
ANSI number: 87
IEC 61850 logical node name:
HZPDIF
4.1.1
IdN
Introduction
The high impedance differential protection can be used when the involved CT cores
have the same turn ratio and similar magnetizing characteristic. It utilizes an external
summation of the phases and neutral current and a series resistor and a voltage
dependent resistor externally to the relay.
4.1.2
The high impedance differential function is based on one current input with external
stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors. Three functions can be used to
provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value
is calculated from the relay operating value UR calculated to achieve through fault
stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct
resistance value.
Refer to Application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
REL 670

105
Section 4
4.1.2.1
Logic diagram
The logic diagram see figure 49 shows the operation principles for the high impedance
differential protection function. It is a basically a simple one step relay with an
additional lower alarm level. The function can be totally blocked totally or only
tripping, can be blocked, by activating inputs from external signals.
Figure 49:
4.1.3
Logic diagram for High impedance differential protection.
Function block
HZD1HZPDIF_87
ISI
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
ALARM
MEASVOLT
en05000363.vsd
Figure 50:
4.1.4
HZD function block

Table 54:
Input signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block
Signal
106
Description
ISI
Group signal for current input
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Block of trip

REL 670
Section 4
Table 55:
4.1.5
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip signal
ALARM
Alarm signal
MEASVOLT
Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
Setting parameters
Table 56:
Parameter
4.1.6
REL 670
Output signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block
Basic parameter group settings for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
U>Alarm
2 - 500
10
Alarm voltage level in

volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay to activate

alarm
U>Trip
5 - 900
100
Operate voltage level

in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor
10 - 20000
250
ohm
Value of series
resistor in Ohms
Technical data
Table 57:
High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage
(20-400) V
1.0% of Ur for U < Ur

1.0% of U for U > Ur
Reset ratio
>95%
Maximum continuous voltage
U>TripPickup2/series
resistor
Operate time
10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud
Reset time
Critical impulse time
200 W

107
108
Section 5
Impedance protection
Section 5
About this chapter
This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes
function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance
protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated
functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.
5.1
Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral

characteristic (PDIS, 21)
Function block name: ZMQ-
ANSI number: 21
ZMQPDIS
5.1.1
Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach
gives flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Mho alternative Quad characteristic is available.
The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines(see figure 51).
REL 670

109
Section 5
X
Forward
operation
R
Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
Figure 51:
Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load
exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 52 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.
110

REL 670
Section 5
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 5
en05000458.vsd
Figure 52:
The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase

fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
5.1.2.2
Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase
faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 53 and figure 54. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
REL 670

111
Section 5
X
RFPE
R1+Rn
RFPE
Xn =
X1+Xn
Rn =
f N
RFPE
f N
X0 - X1
3
R0 - R1
3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE
X1+Xn
RFPE
R1+Rn
RFPE
en05000661.vsd
Figure 53:
112
Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

REL 670
Section 5
RFPP
(Ohm/phase)
2R1
RFPP
2X1
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP
RFPP
2X1
RFPP
2R1
RFPP
en05000662.vsd
Figure 54:
Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 55. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
REL 670

113
Section 5
UL1
ILn
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
element
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1
RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2
UL1
IN
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP
IL2
(Arc resistance)
UL2
R1 + j X1
UL1
Three-phase
fault
IL1
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3
IL3
UL3
en05000181.vsd
Figure 55:
Fault loop model
where:
n
designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and
represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).
The R1 and jX1 in figure 55 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 55, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The theoretical parameters p and q outline the area of operation in quadrant 1 when
varied from 0 to 1.0. That is, for any combination of p and q, where both are between
0 and 1.0, the corresponding impedance is within the reach of the characteristic.
114

REL 670
Section 5
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 56. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is
symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore,
all reach settings apply to both directions.
X
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
Figure 56:
5.1.2.3
Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone
Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.
ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.
All three current limits IminOpPE, IminOpIN and IMinOpPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.
REL 670

115
Section 5
5.1.2.4
Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 1 (example
for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2
Zapp = ------------------------I L1 IL2
(Equation 1)
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults
(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 3.
U L1
Z app = -----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 2)
Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN
is defined as:
KN =
X0 - X1
3X1
where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point
to the fault on the protected line.
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 3 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought
from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
116

REL 670
Section 5
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 4,
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
(Equation 4)
in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
(Equation 5)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
(Equation 6)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 7)
where:
Re
designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im
designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0
designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation
for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 8)
(Equation 9)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.
REL 670

117
Section 5
5.1.2.5
Directional lines
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZD.
Equation 10 and equation 11 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction
for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
0.8 U1L1 + 0.2 U1L1M
-ArgDir < arg ------------------------------------------------------------ < ArgNegRes
IL1
(Equation 10)
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
0.8 U1L1L2 + 0.2 U1L1L2M
-ArgDir < arg ----------------------------------------------------------------------- < ArgNegRes
I L1L2
(Equation 11)
where:
ArgDir
is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 57.
U1L1
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U1L1M
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
IL1
is phase current in phase L1
U1L1L2
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U1L1L2M
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
IL1L2
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively.(see figure 57) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.
The ZD gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation
where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4 etc.
118

REL 670
Section 5
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
Figure 57:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds
4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
5.1.2.6
Simplified logic diagrams
REL 670

119
Section 5
Distance protection zones
The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the
corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one
logical signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 58.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ.
The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant
signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZD block.
120

REL 670
Section 5
Figure 58:
Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 59.
Figure 59:
REL 670
Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

121
Section 5
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 60.
STNDL1N
DIRL1N
AND
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N
STZMPE.
&
AND
STNDL3N
OR
DIRL3N
AND
STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2
AND
OR
&
15 ms
t
STL1
&
15 ms
t
STL2
&
15 ms
t
STL3
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3
AND
OR
STNDL3L1
DIRL3L1
AND
OR
STZMPP
&
BLK
OR
&
15 ms
t
START
en05000778.vsd
Figure 60:
Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 61.
122

REL 670
Section 5
Figure 61:
5.1.3
Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
Function block
ZM01ZMQPDIS_21
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
en06000256.vsd
Figure 62:
ZM function block
ZD01ZDRDIR
I3P
U3P
STDIR
en05000681.vsd
Figure 63:
ZD function block
5.1.4
REL 670

123
Section 5
Table 58:
Input signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK
Block of function
VTSZ
Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR
Blocks all trip outputs
STCND
External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND
External directional condition
Table 59:
Output signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1
Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2
TRL3
START
General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1
Start signal from phase L1
STL2
STL3
STND
Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop
Table 60:
Input signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Group connection
U3P
Group connection
Table 61:
Output signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block
Signal
STDIR
5.1.5
Setting parameters
124

Description
All start signals binary coded
REL 670
Section 5
Table 62:
Parameter
REL 670
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current, i.e.

rated current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage, i.e.

rated voltage
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Operation mode of
directionality NonDir /
Forw / Rev
X1
0.10 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0
0.10 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/p
Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
15.00
ohm/p
Zero seq. resistance

for zone characteristic
angle
RFPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-Ph
RFPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
OperationPP
Off
On
On
Operation mode Off /

On of Phase-Phase
loops
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

On of Zone timer, PhPh
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of trip, PhPh
OperationPE
Off
On
On

On of Phase-Earth
loops
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

On of Zone timer, PhE
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of trip, PhE
IMinOpPP
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN
5 - 30
%IB
Minimum operate
residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

125
Section 5
Table 63:
Parameter
126
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQAPDIS_21 (ZM02-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current, i.e.

rated current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage, i.e.

rated voltage
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Operation mode of
Forw / Rev
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for zone
X0
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
120.00
ohm/p
Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
15.00
ohm/p

angle
RFPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-Ph
RFPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
OperationPP
Off
On
On

On of Phase-Phase
loops
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPE
Off
On
On

On of Phase-Earth
loops
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

REL 670
Section 5
Table 64:
Parameter group settings for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function
Parameter
5.1.6
Range
Default
Unit
Description
ArgNegRes
90 - 175
115
Deg
Angle to blinder in
second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir
5 - 45
15
Deg
Angle to blinder in
fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOp
1 - 99999
10
%IB
Minimum operate
current in % of IBase
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base Current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base Voltage
Technical data
Table 65:
Distance measuring zone, Quad (PDIS, 21)
Function
REL 670
Step
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
5 with selectable direction
Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1
(5-30)% of Ibase
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph

and Ph-E
(10-30)% of Ibase
Positive sequence reactance,

zone 1
(0.10-3000.00) /phase
Positive sequence resistance,

zone 2-5
(0.50-3000.00) /phase
Positive sequence resistance
(0.10-1000.00) /phase
Zero sequence reactance, zone 1
(0.10-9000.00) /phase
2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Zero sequence resistance,

zone 2-5
(0.50-9000.00) /phase
Zero sequence resistance
(0.50-3000.00) /phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E
(1.00-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph
(1.00-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach
<5% at 85 degrees measured with

CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Impedance zone timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
24 ms typically
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically

127
Section 5
5.2
Distance protection zones, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated lines
(PDIS)
Function block name: ZMC
ANSI number: 21
ZMCPDIS
5.2.1
Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives
flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Quad characteristic is available.
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded linessee figure 51.
X
Forward
operation
R
Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
Figure 64:
128
Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated

REL 670
Section 5
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function prevents
overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded
power lines.
5.2.2
5.2.2.1

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type,
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
impedance-measuring zones.
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 5
en05000458.vsd
Figure 65:

fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
5.2.2.2
The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase
faults.
REL 670

129
Section 5
impedance characteristics presented in figure 66 and figure 67. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
X
RFRVE
(Ohm/loop)
R1+Rn RFFWPE
X 0PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG
1RVPG
-X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
3
3
PE
--1X
11FWPE
XX
00
PE
-X
X
0
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
=
XNFW
XNFW==
3 33
X1FWPE+XNFW
jN
jN
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRVE
RFFWPE
X1RVPE+XNRV
RFRVE
R1+Rn RFFWPE
en07000060.vsd
Figure 66:
130

domain.

REL 670
Section 5
X (Ohm/phase)
RFVPP
R1PP
RFFWPP
X 0PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG
1RVPG
-X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
XNRV ==
33
PE
--1X
11FWPE
XX
00
PE
-X
X
0
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
=
XNFW
XNFW==
3
3 3
X1FWPP
j
R (Ohm/phase)
RFRVPP
RFFWPP
X1RVPP
RFVPP
2
Figure 67:
R1PP
RFFWPP
2
en07000062.vsd
Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 68. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
REL 670

131
Section 5
UL1
ILn
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
element
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1
RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2
UL1
IN
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP
IL2
(Arc resistance)
UL2
R1 + j X1
UL1
Three-phase
fault
IL1
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3
IL3
UL3
en05000181.vsd
Figure 68:
Fault loop model
where:
n
designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and
represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 68, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
in figure 69. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is
symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both
directions.
132

REL 670
Section 5
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
Figure 69:
5.2.2.3

currents.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.
ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.
All three current limits IminOpPE, IminOpIN and IMinOpPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.
5.2.2.4
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 12 (example
for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
REL 670

133
Section 5
UL1 UL2
Zapp = ------------------------I L1 IL2
(Equation 12)
phase.
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults
(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 14.
U L1
Z app = -----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 13)
Where:
KN
is defined as:
KN =
X0 - X1
3X1
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the relay point. This results in the same
reactance X.
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
(Equation 15)
134

REL 670
Section 5
X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
(Equation 16)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
(Equation 17)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 18)
where:
Re
Im
f0
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
(Equation 19)
(Equation 20)
5.2.2.5
Directionality for series compensation

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an under voltage control. In case of series compensated line,
a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the memory
must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory control can not
be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series compensated network the
REL 670

135
Section 5
polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an impedance measurement

criterion.
The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is
continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to
run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A nondirectional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty
phase or phases.
At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases
are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.
The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the accuracy
of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network is at a three
phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition can only be
predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.
In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can
not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The achieved
direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is blocked and kept
until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored until the fault is
cleared).
This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three phase
fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of the
polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited to
100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance measurement
to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to cover (with some
margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDS.
Equation 21 and equation 22 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction
for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg
U 1L1M
< ArgNeg Re s
I L1
(Equation 21)
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
- ArgDir < arg
U 1L1L 2 M
< ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
(Equation 22)
where:
ArgDir
136

REL 670
Section 5
U1L1M
IL1
U1L1L2M
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
IL1L2
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
respectively.(see figure 70) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
The ZDS gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4
etc.
X
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
Figure 70:

180 degrees.
5.2.2.6

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
REL 670

137
Section 5

corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

above.
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ.
The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant
signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZDS block.
138

REL 670
Section 5
Figure 71:
Figure 72:
REL 670

139
Section 5
STNDL1N
DIRL1N
AND
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N
STZMPE.
&
AND
STNDL3N
OR
DIRL3N
AND
STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2
AND
OR
&
15 ms
t
STL1
&
15 ms
t
STL2
&
15 ms
t
STL3
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3
AND
OR
STNDL3L1
DIRL3L1
AND
OR
STZMPP
&
BLK
OR
&
15 ms
t
START
en05000778.vsd
Figure 73:
in figure 74.
140

REL 670
Section 5
Figure 74:
5.2.3
Function block
ZMC1ZMCPDIS_21
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
en07000036.vsd
Figure 75:
ZMC function block

ZDS1ZDSRDIR
I3P
U3P
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND
en07000035.vsd
Figure 76:
ZDS function block
5.2.4
REL 670

141
Section 5
Table 66:
Input signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
Table 67:
Output signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
Table 68:
Input signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Group connection for current
U3P
Group connection for voltage
Table 69:
Output signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block
Signal
Description
STFW
Start in forward direction
STRV
Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND
Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
5.2.5
Setting parameters
142

REL 670
Section 5
Table 70:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current, i.e.

rated current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage, i.e.

rated voltage
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Operation mode of
Forw / Rev
OperationPP
Off
On
On

On of Phase-Phase
loops
X1FwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
reactance reach, PhPh, forward
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-Ph
RFFwPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
reactance reach, PhPh, reverse
RFRvPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPE
Off
On
On

On of Phase-Earth
loops
X1FwPE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
reactance reach, PhE, forward
R1PE
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for
Ph-E
X0PE
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/p
Zero sequence
reactance reach, PhE
R0PE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
47.00
ohm/p

angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, forward
REL 670

143
Section 5
Parameter
Step
Default
X1RvPE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
reactance reach, PhE, reverse
RFRvPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, reverse
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN
5 - 30
%IB
Minimum operate
Phase-Earth loops
Table 71:
Parameter
Range
Unit
Description
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCAPDIS_21 (ZMC2-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current, i.e.

rated current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage, i.e.

rated voltage
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Operation mode of
Forw / Rev
OperationPP
Off
On
On

On of Phase-Phase
loops
X1FwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for
Ph-Ph
RFFwPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
X1RvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
RFRvPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
144

REL 670
Section 5
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPE
Off
On
On

On of Phase-Earth
loops
X1FwPE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
R1PE
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for
Ph-E
X0PE
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/p
Zero sequence
reactance reach, PhE
R0PE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
47.00
ohm/p

angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
X1RvPE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
RFRvPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
Table 72:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OperationSC
NoSeriesComp
SeriesComp
SeriesComp
Special directional
criteria for voltage
reversal
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current level
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

voltage level
REL 670

145
Section 5
Parameter
Range
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
Step
1
Default
5
Unit
%IB
Description
Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
10
%IB
Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
ArgNegRes
90 - 175
130
Deg
Angle of blinder in
second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir
5 - 45
15
Deg
Angle of blinder in
fourth quadrant for
forward direction
INReleasePE
10 - 100
20
%IPh
3I0 limit for releasing

phase-to-earth
measuring loops
INBlockPP
10 - 100
40
%IPh
3I0 limit for blocking

phase-to-phase
measuring loops
OperationLdCh
Off
On
On
Operation of load
discrimination
characteristic
RLdFw
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
Forward resistive
reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
Reverse resistive
impedance area
ArgLd
5 - 70
30
Deg
Load angle
determining the load
impedance area
X1FwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
7.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for
Ph-Ph
RFFwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
X1RvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
RFRvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
X1FwPE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
R1PE
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
7.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for
Ph-E
146

REL 670
Section 5
Parameter
5.2.6
Step
Default
X0FwPE
Range
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
120.00
ohm/p
Zero sequence
R0PE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
20.00
ohm/p

angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
X1RvPE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
X0RvPE
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
120.00
ohm/p
Zero sequence
RFRvPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
Description
Technical data
Table 73:
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines

(PDIS, 21)
Function
REL 670
Unit
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1
(5-30)% of Ibase
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph

and Ph-E
(10-30)% of Ibase
Positive sequence reactance,

zone 1
(0.10-3000.00) /phase
Positive sequence resistance,

zone 2-5
(0.50-3000.00) /phase
(0.10-1000.00) /phase
Zero sequence reactance, zone 1
(0.10-9000.00) /phase

accuracy
Conditions:
degrees
Zero sequence resistance,

zone 2-5
(0.50-9000.00) /phase
(0.50-3000.00) /phase
(1.00-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph
(1.00-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach

(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
24 ms typically
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically

147
Section 5
5.3
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho

characteristic, PDIS 21
Function block name: ZMHx--
ANSI number: 21
ZMHPDIS
5.3.1
Introduction
The numerical mho line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection for
back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults. The full scheme technique provides
back-up protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low requirement on
remote end communication. The fivezones have fully independent measuring and
settings which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.
The modern technical solution offers fast operating time down to cycles.
The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection
of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is
one, two- and/or three pole.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-toearth faults on heavily loaded power lines, see figure 77.
148

REL 670
Section 5
jX
Operation area
Operation area
Operation area
No operation area
No operation area
en07000117.vsd
Figure 77:
Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic
The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral impedance characteristic
together with the mho characteristic increases the possibility to overcome eventual
lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve at remote end
faults.
The integrated control and monitoring functions offers effective solutions for
operating and monitoring all types of transmission and sub transmission lines.
5.3.2
5.3.2.1

The execution of the different fault loops within the REx 6xx are of full scheme type,
are executed in parallel.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compare to switched
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
5.3.2.2
The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be
either forward or reverse with cross polarized mho characteristic alternatively self
polarized offset Mho characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic
is in accordance to figure 78 below where zone5 is selected offset Mho.
REL 670

149
Section 5
jX
X
Mho, zone4
Mho, zone3
Zs=0
Mho, zone2
R
Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
R
Zs=2Z1
Offset mho, zone5
en06000400.vsd
Figure 78:
Mho, offset Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the Mho characteristic
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead
of crossing the origin as for the offset mho in the left figure 78, which is only valid
where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates
of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown in the right
figure 78.
The polarisation quantities used for the mho circle is 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion
of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading
and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cut off a section
of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting
parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment function
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the
load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the PHSM
function, where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load
encroachment from the PHS to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the
input signal LDCND.
5.3.2.3
Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.
Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the
parameter DirMode .
The operation for phase to earth and phase to phase fault can be individually switched
On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.
150

REL 670
Section 5
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible
to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this
mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering
is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set
to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced.
The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3
elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either
because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these
elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.
The offset mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by
the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a
directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the
directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the
input DIRCND.
The zone reach for phase to earth fault and phase to phase fault is set individually in
polar coordinates. The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the
corresponding arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.
Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE. KNMag and
KNAng are defined according to equation 23 and equation 24.
KNMag =
Z0-Z1
3 Z1
Z0-Z1
KNAng = ( ZAngPE ) - arg
3 Z1
(Equation 23)
(Equation 24)
Where:
Z0
is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase
Z1
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase
ZAngP
E
line angle of the positive line impedance
The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time
delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be set
to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.
The function can be blocked in the following ways:
REL 670
activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based algorithm

151
Section 5
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the algorithm
for high SIR values
activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs
The activation of signal BLKZ can either be by external fuse failure function or from
the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases
the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ
in the Mho distance function block (ZMHODIS 21).
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected
by the Mho supervision logic to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall
be connected to the BLKZMTD output signal at the Mho supervision function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built
in resonance circuit in the CVT which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The
input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on the Mho supervision
logic for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when
permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.
5.3.2.4
Theory for operation

The Mho algorithm is based on phase comparison of a operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference phasor by more than
90 degrees, the function will operate and give a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as figure 79The condition for deriving the
angle is according to equation 25.
b = arg(U L1 L 2 - I L1 L 2 ZPP ) - arg(U pol )
(Equation 25)
where:
the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2
U L1 L 2
the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2
I L1 L 2
152
ZPP
the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault
Upol
is the polarizing voltage

REL 670
Section 5
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of
the Mho circle for close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270
IL1L2X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP
Upol
UL1L2
IL1L2R
en07000109.vsd
Figure 79:
Simplified mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase L1 to L2

fault.
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the
settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.
The condition for operation at phase to phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 figure 80. The
angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for L1 to L2 fault can be defined according to equation 29.
U-(-IL1L2 ZRevPP)
b = arg
U -IL1L2 ZPP
(Equation 28)
where:
REL 670

153
Section 5
= is the UL1L2 voltage
U
ZRevPP
= is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault in

reverse direction
IL1L2jX
Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP
U
Ucomp2 = U = IFZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R
- IL1L2 Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd
Figure 80:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase

L1 to L2 fault.
For operation the angle should be 90<<270.

Offset Mho, forward direction
When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside
the one for offset mho equation 30 is introdced, that is the angle between the voltage
and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth quadrant.
See figure 81 below. So the condition for operation will be
90 < b < 270
(Equation 30)
and
ArgDir < j < ArgNegR e s
154

(Equation 31)
REL 670
Section 5
where
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant
is calculated according to equation 29
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the
mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
chapter Mho directional element for information about the mho directionalety
element.
IL1L2jX
ZPP
UL1L2
ArgNegRes
IL1L2
ArgDir
en07000111.vsd
Figure 81:
Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase

L1 to L2 fault.
Offset Mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset Mho in reverse direction is according to figure 82. The
operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180.
The conditions for operation are
90 < b < 270
(Equation 32)
and
180 - ArgDir < j < ArgNeg Re s + 180
REL 670

(Equation 33)
155
Section 5
The is derived according to equation 29 for the mho circle and is the angle between
the voltage and current.
X
ZPP
ArgNegRes
IL1L2
ArgDir
UL1L2
ZRevPP
en06000469.eps
Figure 82:
Operation characteristice for reverse phase L1phase L2 fault.
Phase-to-earth fault
Mho
The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence
from the earth return path.
For a earth fault in phase L1A, we can derive the compensation voltage Ucomp see
figure 83 as
Ucomp = U pol - I L1 Z loop
(Equation 34)
where
Upol
is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1 to earth fault)
Zloop
is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as
Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN
156

REL 670
Section 5
where
Z1
positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)
KN
zero sequence compensator factor
The angle between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1 to earth fault
is
b = arg U L1 - I L1 + IN KN ZPE - arg(Upol)
(Equation 36)
where:
UL1
= phase voltage in faulty phase L1
VA
= phase voltage in faulty phase A
IL1
= phase current in faulty phase L1
IA
= phase current in faulty phase A
IN
= zero sequence current in faulty phase L1
KN
Z0-Z1
3 Z1
Upol
= 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage UL1
Vpol
= 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA
the setting parameter for the

zero sequence
compensation consisting of
the magnitude KN and the
angle KNAng.
It is to be noted that the angle KNAng is the difference angle between the positive
sequence impedance ZPE and the impedance ZN for the earth return path see figure
83
REL 670

157
Section 5
KNAng
IL1X
IL1ZN
Ucomp
IL1 Zloop
IL1ZPE
Upol
f
IL1 (Ref)
IL1R
en06000472.vsd
Figure 83:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase

L1 to earth fault.
Operation occurs if
90 b 270
(Equation 39)
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the settting reach for
the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector
ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP
is AngZPE+180
The condition for operation at phase to earth fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure
84. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for L1 to earth fault can be defined as
UL1- IL1L ZPE
UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )
UL1- IL1L ZPE
b = arg
UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )
b = arg
(Equation 40)
where
is the phase L1 phase voltage
U L1
158

REL 670
Section 5
IL1L 2 jX
U comp1 = UL1 - I L1 ZPE
IL1 ZPE
UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 ZRevPE)

IL1L2 R
- I L1 Z Re vPe
en 06000465.vsd
IABjX
V comp1 = VA - IA ZPE
IA ZPE
VA
V comp2 = VA - (-IA ZRevPE)

I AB R
- IA Z RevPe
en 06000465_ansi. vsd
Figure 84:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1

to L2 fault.
Operation occurs if
90 b 270
REL 670

(Equation 42)
159
Section 5
Offset Mho, forward direction
In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criteria for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset
mho according to equations 40 and 42, also the criteria that the angle between the
voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant.
See figure 85. The condition for operation will hereby be 90<<270 and
ArgDir<<ArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant.

is calculated according to equation 40
IL1 jX
UL1
ArgNegRes
IL1R
IL1
ArgDir
en 06000466.vsd
Figure 85:
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1 to

earth fault.
Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criteria for operation compare to the normal
offset Mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current
shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in
second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir and in fourth
quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 86
The conditions for operation of offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to earth fault
will be 90<<270 and 180-Argdir<<ArgNegRes+180.
160

REL 670
Section 5
The is derived according to equation 40 for the offset Mho circle and is the angle
between the voltage and current.
REL 670

161
Section 5
X
ZPE
ArgNegRes
IL1
ArgDir
UL1
ZRevPE
en06000470.eps
X
ZPE
ArgNegRes
IA
ArgDir
VA
ZRevPE
en06000470_ansi.eps
162

REL 670
Section 5
Figure 86:
5.3.3
Simplified characteristic for offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to

earth fault.
Function block
ZMH1ZMHPDIS_21
I3P
U3P
CURR_INP
VOLT_INP
POL_VOLT
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKZMTD
BLKHSIR
BLKTRIP
BLKPE
BLKPP
DIRCND
STCND
LDCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TRPE
TRPP
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STPE
STPP
en06000423.vsd
Figure 87:
5.3.4
ZMH function block

Table 74:
Input signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
I3P
Connection for current sample signals
U3P
Connection for voltage sample signals
CURR_INP
Connection for current signals
VOLT_INP
Connection for voltage signals
POL_VOLT
Connection for polarizing voltage
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKZ
Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD
Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR
Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP
Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPE
Blocks phase-to-earth operation
BLKPP
Blocks phase-to-phase operation
DIRCND
STCND
LDCND
External load condition (loop enabler)

163
Section 5
Table 75:
Output signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block
Signal
5.3.5
Description
TRIP
Trip General
TRL1
Trip phase L1
TRL2
Trip phase L2
TRL3
Trip phase L3
TRPE
Trip phase-to-earth
TRPP
Trip phase-to-phase
START
Start General
STL1
Start phase L1
STL2
Start phase L2
STL3
Start phase L3
STPE
Start phase-to-earth
STPP
Start phase-to-phase
Setting parameters
Table 76:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
ON
Operation Off/On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
DirMode
Off
Offset
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction mode
LoadEnchMode
Off
ON
Off
Load enchroachment
mode Off/On
ReachMode
OverReach
Underreach
OverReach
Reach mode Over/

Underreach
OpModePE
Off
ON
ON

On of Phase-Earth
loops
ZPE
0.005 - 3000.000
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
Positive sequence
impedance setting for
Phase-Earth loop
ZAngPE
10 - 90
80
Deg
Angle for positive

sequence line
impedance for PhaseEarth loop
KN
0.00 - 3.00
0.01
0.80
Magnitud of earth
return compensation
factor KN
164

REL 670
Section 5
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
-180 - 180
-15
Deg
Angle for earth return

compensation factor
KN
ZRevPE
0.005 - 3000.000
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
Reverse reach of the

phase to earth
loop(magnitude)
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Delay time for

operation of phase to
earth elements
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operation
phase to earth current
OpModePP
Off
ON
ON

On of Phase-Phase
loops
ZPP
0.005 - 3000.000
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
Impedance setting
reach for phase to
phase elements
ZAngPP
10 - 90
85
Deg
Angle for positive

sequence line
impedance for PhasePhase elements
ZRevPP
0.005 - 3000.000
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
Reverse reach of the

phase to phase
loop(magnitude)
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Delay time for

operation of phase to
phase
IMinOpPP
10 - 30
20
%UB
Minimum operation
phase to phase
current
Table 77:
Parameter
REL 670
Range
KNAng
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OffsetMhoDir
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Direction mode for

offset mho
OpModetPE
Off
ON
ON

OpModetPP
Off
ON
ON

On of Zone timer, Phph

165
Section 5
Table 78:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base value for current

measurement
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base value for voltage

measurement
PilotMode
Off
On
Off
Pilot mode Off/On
Zreach
0.1 - 3000.0
0.1
38.0
ohm
Line impedance
IMinOp
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operating
current for SIR
measurement
Table 79:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DeltaI
0 - 200
10
%IB
Current change level

in %IB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0
0 - 200
10
%IB
Zero seq current

change level in % of
IB
DeltaU
0 - 100
%UB
Voltage change level

in %UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3U0
0 - 100
%UB
Zero seq voltage

UB
SIRLevel
5 - 15
10
Settable level for

source impedance
ratio
5.3.6
Technical data
166

REL 670
Section 5
Table 80:
Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic (PDIS, 21)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones with selectable

directions
Minimum operate current
(1030)% of IBase
Positive sequence impedance,

phaseearth loop
(0.0053000.000) W/phase
Positive sequence impedance

angle, phaseearth loop
(1090) degrees
Reverse reach, phaseearth loop

(Magnitude)
(0.0053000.000) /phase

Conditions:
degrees
Impedance reach for phase

phase elements
(0.0053000.000) /phase
Angle for positive sequence

impedance, phasephase
elements
(1090) degrees
Reverse reach of phasephase

loop
(0.0053000.000) /phase
Magnitude of earth return

compensation factor KN
(0.003.00)
Angle for earth compensation

factor KN
(-180180) degrees
Dynamic overreach

CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
15 ms typically (with static

outputs)
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically
5.4
Mho impedance supervision logic
5.4.1
Introduction
The Mho impedance supervision logic includes features for fault inception detection
and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as
well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.
The Mho Impedance Supervision logic can mainly be decomposed in two different
parts:
REL 670

167
Section 5
1.
2.
A fault inception detection logic

High SIR detection logic
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
Fault inception detection

The aim for the fault inception detector is to very fast detect that a fault has occurred
on the system.
The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or
zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase
voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and
corresponding phase voltage or 3U0 and 3I0 exceeds the setting parameters DeltaI
and DeltaU respectively Delta3U0 and Delta3I0 and the input signal BLOCK is not
activated, the ouput signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has
occoured.
If the setting pilotMode is set to On in Blocking scheme and the fault inception
function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST will be issued and
send to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to
be fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:
1.
2.
3.
The setting parameter pilotMode has to be set to On

The breaker has to be closed, i.e. the input signal CBOPEN has to be deactivated
A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, i.e. input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal BLOCKCS
is not activated
OR
A fault inception is detected
If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote
end. The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:
1.
2.
3.
The function has to be in pilot mode, i.e. the setting parameter pilotMode has to
be set to On
The carrier send signal should be blocked, i.e. input signal BLOCKCS is On and,
A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was
not blocked, i.e.input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS is not activated.
The function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation of the
change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3U0). It operates if
the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting dULevel or 3U0 exceeds the setting
dU0Level.
168

REL 670
Section 5
If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection function
will be blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external fuse
failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated by
activating the output BLKZ, which shall be connected to the input BLKZ on the
distance Mho function block.
During fault inception a lot of transients will be developed which in turn might cause
the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic will increase the
filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by activating the
output BLKZMD, which shall be connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho distance
function block.
High SIR detection
High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and
distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.
The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any of
the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting parameter SIRLevel.The HSIR signal is
intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.
5.4.3
Function block
ZSM1ZSMGAPC
I3P
BLKZMTD
U3P
BLKCHST
BLOCK
CHSTOP
REVSTART
HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN
en06000426.vsd
ZSM1ZSMGAPC
I3P
V3P
BLOCK
REVSTART
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN
BLKZMTD
BLKCHST
CHSTOP
HSIR
en06000426_ansi.vsd
Figure 88:
ZSM1 function block
5.4.4
REL 670

169
Section 5
Table 81:
Input signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude
U3P
Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and DFT

magnitude
BLOCK
Block of the function
REVSTART
Indication of reverse start
BLOCKCS
Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end
CBOPEN
Indicates that the breaker is open
Table 82:
Output signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block
Signal
5.4.5
Block signal for blocking of time domained mho
BLKCHST
Blocking signal to remote end to block overreaching zone
CHSTOP
Stops the blocking signal to remote end
HSIR
Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit
Setting parameters
Table 83:
Parameter
170
Description
BLKZMTD
Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Default
Unit
IBase
Range
1 - 99999
3000

measurement
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV

measurement
PilotMode
Off
On
Off
Pilot mode Off/On
Zreach
0.1 - 3000.0
0.1
38.0
ohm
Line impedance
IMinOp
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operating
current for SIR
measurement

Step
Description
REL 670
Section 5
Table 84:
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter
5.5
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DeltaI
0 - 200
10
%IB
Current change level

in %IB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0
0 - 200
10
%IB
Zero seq current

IB
DeltaU
0 - 100
%UB
Voltage change level

in %UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3U0
0 - 100
%UB
Zero seq voltage

UB
SIRLevel
5 - 15
10
Settable level for

source impedance
ratio
Phase selection with load encroachment

(PDIS, 21)
Function block name: PHS-
ANSI number: 21
FDPSPDIS
5.5.1
Z<phs
Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement
of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power
lines. The ability to accurately and reliable classify the different types of fault so that
single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this
matter. The phase selection function is designed to accurately select the proper fault
loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore the function has a built in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with
the load.
REL 670

171
Section 5
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
5.5.2
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase-selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance-measuring function (see section "Distance
measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)"). The "phase selection"
includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and
three intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the zone measuring elements, is in the combination of
the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but the PHS function uses information
from the directional function block to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or
reverse. The directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line" in the figures below.
The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
Residual current criteria, i.e. separation of faults with and without earth
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
The current start condition STCNDI is based on the following criteria:

1.
2.
3.
Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load
area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by
the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
The STCNDI-output described above is non-directional. The directionality is

determined by the distance zones direction function block. There are still output from
the function that indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction, or in
between those (e.g. STFWL1 and STRVL1, and NDIR_A). These directional
indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function and the
impedance setting of the phase selection function. Their operate characteristics are
illustrated in figure 89.
172

REL 670
Section 5
60
60
R
60
R
60
Non-directional (ND)
Forward (FW)
Reverse (RV)
en05000668.vsd
Figure 89:
Characteristic for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of

PHS
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming
from the directionality block. It shall be connected to the STDIR output on the ZD
block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance
measuring zones, i.e. the ZM block. The code built up for the directionality is as
follows:
STDIR=
STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in forward
direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 5 then we have start in forward direction
in phase L1 and L2 etc.
The STCND (Z or I) output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded
information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault
loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND input on
the ZM blocks. The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32
5.5.2.1
Phase-to-earth fault
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by PHS function will be according
to equation 43.
REL 670

173
Section 5
ZPHSn =
ULn
ILn
(Equation 43)
where:
n
corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)
The characteristic for the PHS function at phase to earth fault is according to
figure 90. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 60.
The resistance RN and reactance XN is the impedance in the earth return path defined
according to equation 44 and equation 45.
RN =
XN =
R0 - R1
3
(Equation 44)
X 0 - X1
3
(Equation 45)
X (ohm/loop)
Kr(X1+XN)
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
X1+XN
RFFwPE
60 deg
60 deg
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE
X1
Kr =
1
tan(60 deg)
RFFwPE
RFRvPE
Kr(X1+XN)
en06000396.vsd
Figure 90:
Characteristic of PHS for phase to earth fault (setting parameters in

italic), ohm/loop domain
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 46 and equation 47.
174

REL 670
Section 5
3 I 0 0.5 IM in O p
3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
(Equation 46)
(Equation 47)
where:
IMinOp
is the minimum operation current for forward zones,
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the ph-E
fault loops (in %) and
Iphmax
5.5.2.2
is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured by the PHS function will be according to
equation 48.
ZPHS =
ULm - ULn
-2 ILn
(Equation 48)
ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the phase
current in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 91.
REL 670

175
Section 5
X (ohm/phase)
0.5FRvPP
0.5RFFwPP
KrX1
X1
0.5RFFwPP
60 deg
R (ohm/phase)
60 deg
0.5RFRvPP
X1
Kr =
1
tan(60 deg)
KrX1
0.5RFRvPP
0.5RFFwPP
en05000670.vsd
Figure 91:
The operation characteristic for PHS at phase-to-phase fault (setting

parameters in Italic), ohm/phase domain
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are
according to equation 49 or equation 50.
3I 0 < IN Re leasePE
3I 0 < INBlockPP Iph max
(Equation 49)
(Equation 50)
where:
INRelease
is 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and

Iphmax
5.5.2.3
is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
Three phase faults

The operation condition for three phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault
i.e. equation 48, equation 49 and equation 50 are used to release the operation of the
function.
176

REL 670
Section 5
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all

directions. At the same time the apparent impedance is rotated 30 degrees, counterclockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 92.
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1
3
90 deg
0.5RFFwPPK3
X1K3
4 RFFwPP
6
R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPPK3
K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg
en05000671.vsd
Figure 92:
5.5.2.4
The characteristic of PHS for three phase fault (setting parameters

in italic)
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 93. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.
REL 670

177
Section 5
RLdFw
ARGLd
ARGLd
ARGLd
RLdRv
ARGLd
en05000196.vsd
Figure 93:
Characteristic of load encroachment function
The influence of load encroachment function depending on the operation

characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of the PHS function. When
selection mode is STCNDZ, the characteristic for the PHS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic (see figure 94, left illustration).
When STCNDI is selected the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration
in figure 94. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current
and the distance measuring zones.
178

REL 670
Section 5
STCNDZ
STCNDI
en05000197.vsd
Figure 94:
Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode

when load encroachment is activated
When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone
the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 95. The figure
shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operate
area is highlighted in black.
X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone
Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line
en05000673.vsd
Figure 95:
REL 670
Operation characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is enabled

179
Section 5
Figure 95 is valid for phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase faults. During a threephase fault, or load, when the "quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject
to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 96.
Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection"
"quadrilateral" characteristic. Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder
in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that
is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase
the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary
to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load
impedance.
X (ohm/phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone
Distance measuring zone
R (ohm/phase)
en05000674.vsd
Figure 96:
5.5.2.5
Operation characteristic for PHS in forward direction for three-phase

fault, ohm/phase domain
Minimum operate currents

The operation of the PHS function is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls
below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS value
of the current in phase Ln.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).
180

REL 670
Section 5
5.5.2.6

Figure 97 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toearth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is available
within the terminal.
Figure 97:
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual current criteria)
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A STCNDI

output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and
current criteria, refer to figure 97. This signal can be configured to STCND functional
input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of
the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting and
tripping signals.
Figure 98 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective
signals PHS--STNDLn. Signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n change between
one and three according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled operating criteria
for each separate loop measuring element (i.e. within the "quadrilateral"
characteristic.
REL 670

181
Section 5
Figure 98:
Composition on non-directional phase selection signals
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 100 and figure 99. The directional criteria appears
as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity
for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network
configurations. Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding
directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW
(figure 100) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV
(figure 99) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within
the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 99 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which is
created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their
phase related starting and tripping signals.
182

REL 670
Section 5
Figure 99:
REL 670
Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

183
Section 5
Figure 100:
184
Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

REL 670
Section 5
5.5.3
Function block
PHS1FDPSPDIS_21
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
DIRCND
TRIP
START
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDI
en06000258.vsd
Figure 101:
5.5.4
PHS function block

Table 85:
Input signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
DIRCND
Table 86:
Output signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block
Signal
Description
STFWL1
Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1
Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
Earth fault detected in reverse direction
STNDL1
Non directional start in L1
STNDL2
REL 670

185
Section 5
Signal
5.5.5
Description
STNDL3
STNDPE
Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH
Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH
Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH
Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE
Current conditions release of phase-earth measuring

elements
STPP
Current conditions release of phase-phase measuring

elements
STCNDZ
Start condition (PHS,LE and I based)
STCNDI
Start condition (LE and I based)
Setting parameters
Table 87:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function

Default
Unit
IBase
Range
1 - 99999
Step
1
3000
Description
Base current for
current settings
INBlockPP
10 - 100
40
%IPh

phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE
10 - 100
20
%IPh
3I0 limit for releasing

phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
Forward resistive
impedance area
RLdRv
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
Reverse resistive
impedance area
ArgLd
5 - 70
30
Deg
Load angle
determining the load
impedance area
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
reactance reach
X0
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
120.00
ohm/p
Zero sequence
reactance reach
RFFwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
RFRvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
RFFwPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
186

REL 670
Section 5
Parameter
5.5.6
Step
Default
RFRvPE
Range
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
10
%IB
Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB
Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
Description
Technical data
Table 88:
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)
Function
5.6
Unit
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-30)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir
Reactive reach, positive

sequence, forward and reverse
(0.503000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, positive

sequence
(0.101000.00) /phase
Reactive reach, zero sequence,

forward and reverse
(0.509000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, zero sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase

accuracy
Conditions:
degrees
Fault resistance, phase-earth

faults, forward and reverse
(1.009000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-phase

faults, forward and reverse
(0.503000.00) /loop
Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
Reset ratio
105% typically
Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral

for Mho
Function block name: ZMMx--
ANSI number: 21
ZMMPDIS
REL 670

187
Section 5
5.6.1
Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone protection with three fault loops for phase
to earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone
resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of
different types and lengths.
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines (see figure 51).
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load
exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
5.6.2
5.6.2.1

The different fault loops within the IED 670 are operating in parallel in the same
principle as a full scheme measurement..
impedance-measuring zones l.
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 5
en07000080.vsd
Figure 102:
188

fault.

REL 670
Section 5
5.6.2.2
The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault
loop for each phase.
impedance characteristics presented in figure 103. The characteristic is illustrated
with the full loop reach.
X
RFPE
R1+Rn
RFPE
Xn =
X1+Xn
Rn =
f N
RFPE
f N
X0 - X1
3
R0 - R1
3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE
X1+Xn
RFPE
R1+Rn
RFPE
en05000661.vsd
Figure 103:

domain.
The fault loop reach may also be presented as in figure 104.

UL1
ILn
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1
Phase-to-earth
element
RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN
Figure 104:
REL 670
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
en06000412.vsd
Fault loop model

189
Section 5
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE is presented in order to convey the
fault resistance reach.
in figure 105. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach
is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction.
Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
X
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
Figure 105:
5.6.2.3

currents.
Both current limits IminOpPE and IminOpIN are automatically
reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in
reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.
190

REL 670
Section 5
5.6.2.4
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3).
The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-earth fault follow equation
52
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner.
U L1
Z app = -----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 51)
Where:
KN
is defined as:
KN =
X0 - X1
3X1
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same
reactance X.
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
REL 670

(Equation 53)
191
Section 5

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
(Equation 54)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
(Equation 55)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 56)
where:
Re
Im
f0
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
(Equation 57)
(Equation 58)
5.6.2.5
Directional lines
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM.
Equation 59 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-toearth fault.
192

REL 670
Section 5
- ArgDir < arg
0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 59)
where:
ArgDir
U1L1
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U1L1M
IL1
respectively (see figure 106) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
The ZDM gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4
etc.
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
Figure 106:
REL 670

193
Section 5

180 degrees.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
5.6.2.6

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring: phase-toearth loops.
corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E).

above.
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on
194

REL 670
Section 5
the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall
be configured to the DIRCND output on the ZDM block.
STCND
L1N
AND
STNDL1N
L2N
AND
STNDL2N
L3N
AND
STNDL3N
STNDPE
OR
OR
VTSZ
BLOCK
AND
OR
STND
BLK
en06000408.vsd
Figure 107:
STNDL1N
AND
15 ms
t
STL1
AND
15 ms
t
STL2
AND
15 ms
t
STL3
AND
15 ms
t
START
STNDL2N
STNDL3N
OR
BLK
en06000409.vsd
Figure 108:
REL 670

195
Section 5
STNDL1N
DIRL1N
AND
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N
STNDL3N
DIRL3N
STZMPE.
&
AND
AND
&
15 ms
t
STL1
&
15 ms
t
STL2
&
15 ms
t
STL3
&
15 ms
t
START
BLK
OR
en07000081.vsd
Figure 109:
in figure 110.
Timer tPE=On
STZMPE
AND
tPE
t
15ms
TRIP
BLKTR
AND
STL1
AND
TRL1
STL2
AND
TRL2
STL3
AND
TRL3
en07000082.vsd
Figure 110:
196

REL 670
Section 5
5.6.3
Function block
ZMM1ZMMPDIS_21
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHPUND
en06000454.vsd
Figure 111:
5.6.4
ZMM function block

Table 89:
Input signals for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
Table 90:
Output signals for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
5.6.5
Setting parameters
REL 670

197
Section 5
Table 91:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current, i.e.

rated current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage, i.e.

rated voltage
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Operation mode of
Forw / Rev
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
Positive seq.
resistance for zone
X0
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/p
Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
15.00
ohm/p

angle
RFPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN
5 - 30
%IB
Minimum operate
Phase-Earth loops
5.6.6
Technical data
198

REL 670
Section 5
Table 92:
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for mho
Function
5.7
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
(10-30)% of Ibase
Positive sequence reactance
(0.50-3000.00) W/phase
(0.10-1000.00) /phase
Zero sequence reactance
(0.50-9000.00) /phase
(0.50-3000.00) /phase
(1.00-9000.00) W/loop

accuracy
Conditions:
degrees
Dynamic overreach

(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
24 ms typically
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically
Faulty phase identification with load

enchroachment (PDIS, 21)
Function block name: PHMx
ANSI number: 21
FMPSPDIS
5.7.1
Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement
of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power
lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault so
that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this
matter. The phase selection function is design to accurate select the proper fault loop
in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation.
Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives
REL 670

199
Section 5
the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.
The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information
about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis as well.
5.7.2
5.7.2.1
The phase selection function

The phase selection function can be decomposed into four different parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A high speed delta based current phase selector

A high speed delta based voltage phase selector
A symmetrical components based phase selector
Fault evaluation and selection logic
A load enchroachment logic
A blinder logic
The function can be de-activated and activated by setting the parameter Operation
Off/On The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
Figure 1 (kommer senare)
Delta based current and voltages
The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on patent
US4409636. It is a well proven technique that goes back to the beginning of 1980,
used with very good experience in highly proven ABB distance relay RALZA.
The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho element and as well as is
essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power Line
Carrier (PLC) communication system across the protected line.
The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that
filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when
no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs,
currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the current and voltages
resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point
the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed
by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to
determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.
The current and voltage delta phase selector gives a real output signal if the following
criteria is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown):
Max(UL1,UL2,UL3)>DeltaUMinOp
Max(IL1,IL2,IL3)>DeltaIMinOp
200

REL 670
Section 5
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3
are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1
DeltaUMinOp and DeltaIMinOp
are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current filters
to decide that a fault has occured indeed. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a case
speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components phase
selector will operate.
The delta voltages ULn and delta current ILn (n prefix for phase order) are the
voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.
The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The
logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the
largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition
for fault type classification for the voltage and currents can be expressed as
Fa ulType =
Fa ultType =
S( DUL1, DUL2, DUL3)

Ma x( DIL1, DIL2, DUL3)
(Equation 60)
S( DIL1, DIL2, DIL3)

Ma x( DIL1, DIL2, DIL3)
(Equation 61)
The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)
Single line ground fault;
FaultType=1
Phase to phase fault
FaultType=2
3-phase fault;
FaultType=3
The output signal is 1 for single line to earth fault, 2 for phase to phase fault and 3
for three phase fault. At this point the filer does not know if ground was involved or
not.
Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.
When a single fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest quantity, and
asserts that phase. If phase to phase fault is detected, the two largest phase quantities
will be detected and asserted as outputs.
The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the waveshape. The output is forcet
to wait a certain time. If the timer expires, if no other fault detection on the other
REL 670

201
Section 5
phases is not detected, the fault is deemed as phase-to-ground. This way a premature
single phase to earth fault detection is not released for a phase-phase fault. If, however,
ground current is detected before the timer expires, the phase to ground fault is
released sooner.
If another phase picks up during the delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain
amount. Each detection of either ground or additional phases further reduce the initial
wait time and allow the delta phase selector output to be asserted sooner. There is not
wait time, if for example, all three phases are faulty.
The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time
as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input will block
the delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the
DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too
abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.
Symmetrical component based phase selector
The sequence component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence

voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents. All
the sequence quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference to phase
L1.
The function is made up of four main parts:
A
Detection of the presence of earth fault
A phase to phase logic block based on V2/V1 angle relationship
A phase to earth component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships between
V2/I0 and V2/V1 is evaluated to determine earth fault or phase to phase to earth fault
Logic for detection of three phase fault
A. Presence of earthground detection

The detection of earth fault is done in two ways, one by evaluation of the magnitude
of zero sequence current and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and negative
sequence voltage. The evaluation of the zero sequence current is done both with a
separate complementary function outside the main sequence based evaluation
function.
The complementary based zero sequence current function evaluates the presence of
earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting parameter
INtoMaxI. The output signal is used to release the earth fault loop. It is a complement
to the earth fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector. The condition
for releasing the phase to earth loop are as follows:
|3I0|>maxIph INto Im ax
202

REL 670
Section 5
where:
|3I0|
is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0
maxIph
is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents
INtoImax
is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the maximum
phase current
The earth fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current by
the main sequence function meets the following conditions:
|3I0|>IMinOp k1
|3I0|>maxIph IN RelPE
where:
IMinOp
is the settings of the minimum operate phase current
INRelPE
is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase
k1
is a design parameter
IBase
is the setting of the base current (A)
In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero
sequence current may not be secure. In those cases the sequence based phase selector
will automatically change from evaluation of zero sequence current to evaluation of
zero and negative sequence voltage. So the release of earth fault loop can also be done
if the following conditions are fulfilled:
|3U0|>U2*k2
|3U0|>U1*k3
|U1|>k
and
3I0<IMinOp*k5
OR
3I0<ILmax INRelPE
where:
REL 670
3U0
is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage
U2
is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point of phase
L1
k2, k3, k4 and k5
are design parameters
ILmax
is the maximal phase current
IMinOp
is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase

203
Section 5
B Phase to phase fault detection
The detection of phase to phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle
difference between the sequence voltages U2 and U1.
VC
60
C-A sector
180
VB
B-C sector
A-B sector
VA
300
en06000383_ansi.vsd
Figure 112:
Definition of fault sectors for phase to phase fault
The phase to phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between
the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according to figure
112 and the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U2|>U2MinOp
|U1|>U1MinOP
where:
U1MinOP and U2MinOp
are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltage
The positive sequence voltage U1L1 in figure 112 above is reference.

If there is a three phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.
C. Phase to earthground and phase to phase to earthground detection
The detection of phase to earth and phase to phase to earth fault (US patent 5390067)
is based on two conditions:
1. Angle relationship between V2 and I0
2. Angle relationship between V2 and V1
The first condition determines faulty phase at single line to earth fault by determine
the argument between V2 and I0.
204

REL 670
Section 5
80
L2-N sector
L3-N sector
U2L1
(Ref)
200
L1-N sector
320
en06000384.vsd
Figure 113:
Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between V2 and I0
The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians
as input to the V2I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is in
forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as
forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees see
figure 114.
Forward
200
20
Reverse
en06000385.vsd
Figure 114:
Directional element used to release the measured angle between

U2 and I0
The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the
angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector
will be active see figure 113. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the
same time.
The sector function for condition1 has an internal release signal which is active if the
main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:
|U2|>U2MinOp
REL 670

205
Section 5
|3I0|>IMinOp 0.5
|3I0|>ILmax INRelPE
where:
U2 and IN
are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero sequence current (3I0)
U2MinOp
is the setting parameter for minimum operate negative sequence voltage
IMinOp
is the setting parameter for minimum operate phase current
INRelPE
is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase to earth loop
The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.
The condition2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage
U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase to phase voltage
relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A
phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders
as for condition1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies within one sector,
the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition2 is released
if both the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U2|>U2MinOp
|U1|>U1MinOP
where:
|U1| and |U2|
are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltage
U1MinOP and
are the setting parameter for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltage.
140
L3-N sector
20
L1-N sector
U1L1
(Ref)
L2-N sector
260
Figure 115:
206
en06000413.vsd
Condition 2: U2 and U1 angle relationship

REL 670
Section 5
If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single
phase to ground. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be
the complement of the second condition, i.e. a phase to phase to ground fault.
E.g.
Condition 1
Condition 2
Fault type
L3-G
L3-G
L3-G
L2-G
L1-G
L2-L3-G
The sequence phase selector is blocked when earthis not involved or if a three phase
fault is detected.
D. Three phase fault detection
The function classify the fault as three phase fault if the following conditions are
fulfilled:
|U1|>U1Level
|I1|>I1Level
or
|I1|>IMaxLoad
where:
U1 and I1
are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude
U1Level and I1Level
are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
The output signal for detection of three phase fault is only released if not earth fault
and phase to phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.
The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to10.
The condition for not detecting phase to phase faults is determined by three
conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase to phase fault. Those
are:
Condition1:
earth fault is detected
or
|IN|>IMinOP*k2
and
|IN|>ILmax*INRelPE
Condition2:
Condition2 for phase to earth and phase to phase faults are not fulfilled
REL 670

207
Section 5
and
ILmax<IMinOp
and
|I2|<ILmax*I2ILmax
Condition3:
|IN|>maxIL*INBlockPP
or
|I2|<maxIL*I2maxIL
where:
ILmax
is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
INRelPE
is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase to earthfault loops
|I2|
is the magnitude of the negative sequence current
I2ILmax
is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current to the maximum
phase current in percent of IBase
INBlockP
P
is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring loops
Fault evaluation and selection logic
The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according
to figure 116. Only phase L1 is shown in the figure. If the internal signal 3Phase fault
is activated, all three outputs STL1, STL2 and STL3will be activated.
DeltaIL1
b
DeltaUL1
Sequence based
function
L1L2 fault
a
OR
a>b
then c=a
else c=a
a<b
then c=b
else c=a
FaultPriority
Adaptive release
dependent on result
from Delta logic
OR
L1N fault
3 Phase fault
STL1
&
IL1Valid
BLOCK
en06000386.vsd
Figure 116:
208
Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase L1

REL 670
Section 5
Load encroachment logic
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
activated in the PHSM function but the influence on the zone measurement can be
switched on/off in the respective Zm function.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 117. As illustrated, the resistive
reach are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector
is the same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by
the load encroachment function, see right figure 117.
X
jX
Operation area
Operation area
RLd
ArgLd
ArgLd
R
R
ArgLd
ArgLd
RLd
Operation area
No operation area
No operation area
en06000414.vsd
Figure 117:
Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic.
Outputs
The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase
selector activates the output signal(s) STL1, STL2 and STL3PU_A, PU_B and
PU_C. If the phase to earth loop have been released, then the signal STE will be
activated as well.
The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is enable (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding
phase to ground element is enabled as well. Earth is expected to be made available
for two and three phase faults for the correct output to be asserted. The fault loop is
indicated by one of the decimal numbers below:
0=
no faulted phases
1=
L1N
2=
L2N
3=
L3N
4=
-L1L2N
REL 670

209
Section 5
5=
-L2L3N
6=
-L3L1N-CAG
7=
-L1L2L3N
8=
-L1L2
9=
-L2L3
10=
-L3L1
11=
L1L2L3
An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase to earthoutputs are to
be asserted when the ground input G is not asserted.
The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating.
STCNDPLE shall be connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral
impedance measuring zones (ZM0x) to be blocked. The signal STCNDLE shall be
connected to the input LDCND for selected Mho impedans measuring zones (ZMMx)
The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to
release the blocking from the load encroachment function.
5.7.3
Function block
PHMFMPSPDIS
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
ZSTART
TR3PH
1POLEAR
STL1
STL2
STL3
STPE
STCNDPHS
STCNDPLE
STCNDLE
START
en06000429.vsd
Figure 118:
5.7.4
PHM function block

Table 93:
Input signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block
Signal
210
Description
I3P
Group signal for current
U3P
Group signal for voltage
BLOCK
Block of function
ZSTART
Start from underimpdeance function
TR3PH
Three phase tripping initiated
1POLEAR
Single pole autoreclosing in progress

REL 670
Section 5
Table 94:
Output signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block
Signal
5.7.5
Description
STL1
Fault detected in phase L1
STL2
STL3
STPE
Earth fault detected
STCNDPHS
Binary coded starts from phase selection
STCNDPLE
Binary coded starts from ph sel with load encroachment
STCNDLE
Binary coded starts from load encroachment only
START
Indicates that something has started
Setting parameters
Table 95:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function

Default
Unit
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
IMaxLoad
10 - 5000
200
%IB
Maximum load for

identification of three
phase fault in % of
IBase
RLd
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
Load encroachment
resistive reach in
ohm/phase
ArgLd
5 - 70
20
Deg
Load encroachment
inclination of load
angular sector
Table 96:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Advanced parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DeltaIMinOp
5 - 100
10
%IB
Delta current level in

% of IBase
DeltaUMinOp
5 - 100
20
%UB
Delta voltage level in

% of UBase
U1Level
5 - 100
80
%UB
Pos seq voltage limit

for identification of 3ph fault
I1LowLevel
5 - 200
10
%IB
Pos seq current level

for identification of 3ph fault in % of IBase
U1MinOp
5 - 100
20
%UB
Minimum operate
positive sequence
voltage for ph sel
REL 670

211
Section 5
Parameter
5.7.6
Range
Default
Unit
Description
1 - 100
%UB
Minimum operate
negative sequence
voltage for ph sel
INRelPE
10 - 100
20
%IB
3I0 limit for release

ph-e measuring loops
in % of max phase
current
INBlockPP
10 - 100
40
%IB

phase-to-phase
measuring loops in %
of max phase current
Technical data
Table 97:
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)
Function
5.8
Step
U2MinOp
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-30)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir
Load encroachment criteria: Load

resistance, forward and reverse
(0.53000) W/phase
(570) degrees

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.530) x In
degrees
Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Function block name: ZDM-
ANSI number:
ZDMRDIR
Function block name: ZDA-
ANSI number:
ZDARDIR
212

REL 670
Section 5
5.8.1
Introduction
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase
unselective directional function (phase unselective, because it is based on
symmetrical components).
5.8.2
5.8.2.1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic, ZDM

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM. Equation
62 and equation 63 are used to classify that the fault is in the forward direction for
phase-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault respectively.
- ArgDir < arg
- ArgDir < arg
0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
0.85 U1L1L 2 + 0.15 U1L1L 2 M

I L1L 2
(Equation 62)
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 63)
Where:
ArgDir
Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)
ArgNegRes
Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 119
U1L1
Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U1L1M
Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
IL1
Phase current in phase L1
U1L1L2
Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U1L1L2M
Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
IL1L2
Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 119) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.
The directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type calculation,
meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite radius).
REL 670

213
Section 5
X
Zset reach point
ArgNegRes
-ArgDir
-Zs
en06000416.vsd
Figure 119:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

180 degrees.
The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional

indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its
rated value.
The directional function block ZDM has the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and
is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
214

REL 670
Section 5
bit 11
(2048)
bit 10
(1024)
bit 9
(512)
bit 8
(256)
bit 7
(128)
bit 6
(64)
STRVL3L1=1
STRVL2L3=1
STRVL1L2=1
STRVL3N=1
STRVL2N=1
STRVL1N=1
bit 5
(32)
bit 4
(16)
bit 3
(8)
bit 2
(4)
bit 1
(2)
bit 0
(1)
STFWL3L1=
1
STFWL2L3=
1
STFWL1L2=
1
STFWL3N=1
STFWL2N=1
STFWL1N=1
The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function

of all the forward starting conditions, i.e. STFWL1N, STFWL2N, STFWL3N,
STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is similar to the
STFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all
the reverse starting conditions, i.e. STRVL1N, STRVL2N, STRVL3N, STRVL1L2,
STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1.
Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service
values:
5.8.2.2
resistance phase L1
reactance phase L1
resistance phase L2
reactance phase L2
resistance phase L3
reactance phase L3
direction phase L1
direction phase L2
direction phase L3
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults, ZDA

A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence
memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:
The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These

elements always expand back to the source.
Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in 3-phase
faults.
A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.
There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase
to phase faults and double phase to earth faults during high load periods. To solve
these, additional directional element is used.
For phase to earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one
of following types of polarization:
REL 670

215
Section 5
Zero-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Zero-sequence current
These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the function block ZDA.
Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The
measurement principle is illustrated in figure 120.
- 3U 0
AngleOp
AngleRCA
3I 0
en06000417.vsd
Figure 120:
Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional

element
Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the

negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the
protection.
Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-sequence
current, for example the current in the neutral of a power transformer.
The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current
compensation is described in figure 121. The same also applies for the negativesequence function.
216

REL 670
Section 5
I0
Z0 SA
I0
Z0 SB
Z0 Line
Charac te ris tic

ang le
U0
U0
K*I0
U0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418.vsd
Figure 121:
Principle for zero sequence compensation
Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal
directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are per phase
and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the additional
directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate
correct direction.
Normal
directional
element
L1N, L2N, L3N
AND
Additional
directional
element
Release of distance
measuring element
L1N, L2N, L3N
AND per
phase
en06000419.vsd
Figure 122:
5.8.3
Earth distance element directional supervision
Function block
ZDM1ZDMRDIR
I3P
U3P
DIR_CURR
DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND
en06000422.vsd
Figure 123:
REL 670
ZDM function block

217
Section 5
ZDA1ZDARDIR
I3P
U3P
I3PPOL
DIRCND
STFWPE
STRVPE
DIREFCND
en06000425.vsd
Figure 124:
5.8.4
ZDA function block

Table 98:
Input signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
group connection for current abs 1
U3P
group connection for voltage abs 1
Table 99:
Output signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block
Signal
Description
DIR_CURR
Group connection
DIR_VOLT
Group connection
DIR_POL
Group connection
STFW
Start in forward direction
STRV
Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND
Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
Table 100:
Input signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Current signals
U3P
Voltage signals
I3PPOL
Polarisation current signals
DIRCND
Binary coded directional signal
Table 101:
Output signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block
Signal
218
Description
STFWPE
Forward start signal from phase-to-ground directional

element
STRVPE
Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground directional

element
DIREFCND
Start direction Binary coded

REL 670
Section 5
5.8.5
Setting parameters
Table 102:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current level
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
Base setting for

voltage level
DirEvalType
Impedance
Comparator
Imp/Comp
Comparator
Directional evaluation
mode Impedance /
Comparator
ArgNegRes
90 - 175
115
Deg
Angle of blinder in
second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir
5 - 45
15
Deg
Angle of blinder in
fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB
Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
10
%IB
Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
Table 103:
Parameter
REL 670
Basic parameter group settings for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function
Basic parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function

Default
Unit
IBase
Range
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current values
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

voltage level in kV
PolMode
-3U0
-U2
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp
-3U0
Polarization quantity
for opt dir function for
P-E faults
AngleRCA
-90 - 90
75
Deg
Characteristic relay
angle (= MTA or base
angle)
I>
1 - 200
%IB
Minimum operation
UPol>
1 - 100
%UB
Minimum polarizing
voltage in % of UBase
IPol>
5 - 100
10
%IB
Minimum polarizing

Step
Description
219
Section 5
Table 104:
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function
Parameter
5.9
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AngleOp
90 - 180
160
Deg
Operation sector
angle
Kmag
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm
Boost-factor in U0comp and U2comp polarization
Phase preference logic

Function block name: PPL
ANSI number:
PPLPHIZ
5.9.1
Introduction
Phase Preference Logic (PPL) is intended to be used in isolated or high impedance
earthed networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the faulty lines at
cross-country fault.
The phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single-phase-to-earth faults in isolated
and high impedance-earthed networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by
distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or
the lagging phase-earth loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred
fault based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference
combinations are available for selection.
5.9.2
The phase preference logic can be activated or deactivated by setting the parameter
Operation to On or Off.
The function has 10 operation modes which can be set by the parameter Mode. The
different modes and their explanation are shown in table 105 below.
Table 105:
Operation Mode
Operation modes for phase preference logic

Description
No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-toground faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at crosscountry faults
No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-ground faults, trip is allowed

without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault
Cyclic 1231c; L1 before L2 before L3 before L1
220

REL 670
Section 5
Operation Mode
Description
Cyclic 1321c; L1 before L3 before L2 before L1
Acyclic 123a; L1 before L2before L3
Acyclic 132a; L1 before L3 before L2
The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled Voltage and Current
Discrimination and the second one labeled Phase Preference Evaluation, see
figure 125.
The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross country fault. If cross country fault is
detected, an internal signal Detected cross country fault is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the
condition for trip.
The voltage discrimination part gives phase segregated start signals STUL1,
STUL2 or STUL3 if the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting
parameter UPN< at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting
parameter 3U0>, see figure 125.
The internal signal for detection of cross country fault, DetectCrossContry, that come
from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved in
three different ways:
1.
2.
3.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN for a time longer
than the setting of pick-up timer tIN
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time
as the magnitude of 3U0 has been above the setting parameter 3U0> during a
time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tUN
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time
as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
the measured phase-to phase voltage in at least one of the phase

combinations has been below the setting parameter UPP< for more than
20 ms.
At least one of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter UPN<
for more than 20 ms
The second part, Phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input
signal STCND and the information from the setting parameter OperMode to
determine the condition for trip. To release the phase preference logic at least two out
of three phases must be faulty. The fault classification whether it is a single line to
REL 670

221
Section 5
earth or cross country fault and which phase to be tripped at cross country fault is
converted into a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring
zone to release the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode.
This is done by activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input
STCND on the distance zone measuring element.
The input signal STCNDC consist of binary information of fault type and is connected
to the Phase selector output STCND. The fault must be activated in at least two phases
to be classified as a cross country fault in the phase preference part of the logic.
The input signals RELLx are additional fault release signals that can be connected to
external protection functions through binary input.
The trip output can be blocked by setting the parameter Blk1PhTr to On.
The output start and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK
UL1
UL2
STUL1
AND
UL3
UL1UL2
STUL2
AND
UL2UL3
UL3UL1
IN
UN
UPN<
Voltage and
Current
Discrimination
STUL3
AND
OR
START
AND
UPP<
IN>
Detect CrossCountry fault
UN>
AND
AND
OperatingMode
RELL1N
RELL2N
Phase Preference
Evaluation
AND
AND
RELL3N
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
STCND
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
Blk1PhTr
BLOCK
en06000323.vsd
Figure 125:
222
Simplified block diagram for phase preference logic

REL 670
Section 5
5.9.3
Function block
PPL1PPLPHIZ
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
RELL1N
RELL2N
RELL3N
STCND
START
ZREL
en07000029.vsd
Figure 126:
5.9.4
PPL function block

Table 106:
Input signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
RELL1N
Release condition for the L1 to earth loop
RELL2N
RELL3N
STCND
Integer coded external release signals
Table 107:
Output signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block
Signal
Description
START
Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of direction
ZREL
Integer coded output release signal
5.9.5
Setting parameters
REL 670

223
Section 5
Table 108:
Parameter
5.9.6
Basic parameter group settings for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function

Range
Default
Unit
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.01
400.00
kV
Base voltage
OperMode
No Filter
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
No Filter
Operating mode
(c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
UPN<
10.0 - 100.0
1.0
70.0
%UB
Operate value of
phase undervoltage
(% of UBase)
UPP<
10.0 - 100.0
1.0
50.0
%UB
Operate value of line

to line undervoltage
(% of UBase)
3U0>
5.0 - 70.0
1.0
20.0
%UB
Operate value of
residual voltage (% of
UBase)
IN>
10 - 200
20
%IB
Operate value of
residual current (% of
IBase)
tUN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Pickup-delay for
residual voltage
tOffUN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Dropoff-delay for
residual voltage
tIN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Pickup-delay for
residual current
Technical data
Table 109:
Phase preference logic (PHIZ)
Function
224
Step
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value, phase to phase

and phase to neutral undervoltage
(10.0 - 100.0)% of Ubase
0,5% of Ur
Reset ratio, undervoltage
< 105%
Operate value, residual voltage
(5.0 - 70.0)% of Ubase
0,5% of Ur
Reset ratio, residual voltage
> 95%
Operate value, residual current
(10 - 200)% of Ibase
1,0% of Ir for I < Ir

1,0% of I for I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual current
> 95%
Timers
(0.000 - 60.000) s
0,5% 10ms
Operating mode
No Filter, NoPref
Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a,
312a, 321a

REL 670
Section 5
5.10
Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Function block name: PSD--
ANSI number: 78
ZMRPSB
5.10.1
Zpsb
Introduction
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation
plants.
Power swing detection function is used to detect power swings and initiate block of
selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth fault currents during a power
swing can block the power swing detection function to allow fault clearance.
5.10.2
The PSD function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement
characteristic with load encroachment, see figure 127
Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power
swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and
the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than
a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is
the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the
characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately. One-out-ofthree or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the specific
system operating conditions.
REL 670

225
Section 5
jX
X1OutFw
X1InFw
DRv
R1LIn
ZL
DFw
j
R1FInRv
R1FInFw
DFw
ARGLd
ARGLd
DRv
DFw
DFw
R
DFw
DRv
DFw
RLdInRv RLdInFw
DRv
j
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw
DRv
X1InRv
X1OutRv
en05000175.vsd
Figure 127:
Operating characteristic for the PSD function
The impedance measurement within the PSD function is performed by solving

equation 64 and equation 65 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2 and
L3).
U L1
Rset
Re
IL1
U L1
Xset
Im
I
L
1
(Equation 64)
(Equation 65)
The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries which are more explained in the following
sections.
5.10.2.1
Resistive reach in forward direction

To avoid load encroachment the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by
setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value
while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 66.
226

REL 670
Section 5
RLdInFw = kLdRFw RLdOutFw
(Equation 66)
where:
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1
The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting
the parameter ARGLd.
The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same ARGLd and RLdOutFw and calculated RLdInFw).
The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation
to the distance zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the
setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the
inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by
the parameter R1FInFw.
From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.
5.10.2.2
Resistive reach in reverse direction

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction the resistive reach is limited by
setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment
cone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by
using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 67.
RLdInRv = kLdRRv RLdOutRv
(Equation 67)
From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant.
The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load
encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner
boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.
The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment
zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The
argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted
lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the
same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction i.e. DRv.
REL 670

227
Section 5
5.10.2.3
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,
where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw RLdOutFw
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined
as X1InRv + DRv.
where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv
5.10.2.4
Basic detection logic

The operation of the function is only released if the magnitude of the current is above
the setting of the min operating current, IMinOpPE.
The PSD function can operate in two operating modes:
The "1-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the
three phases. Figure 128 presents a composition of a detection signal PSD-DETL1 in this particular phase.
The "2-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two
out of three phases. Figure 129 presents a composition of the detection signals
DET1of3 and DET2of3.
Signals ZOUTL1ZOUT_A (external boundary) and ZINL1 (internal boundary) in

figure 128 are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each
phase separately (Ln represents the corresponding phase L1, L2, and L3). They are
internal signals, calculated by the PSD-function.
The tP1 timer in figure 128 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area
and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of
figure 128 (input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers etc.) are
duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same
settings.
228

REL 670
Section 5
REL 670
Figure 128:
Detection of power-swing in phase L1
Figure 129:
Detection of power-swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

229
Section 5
ZOUTL1
ZOUT
OR
ZOUTL2
ZINL1
ZOUTL3
TRSP
ZIN
OR
ZINL2
AND
ZINL3
tEF
AND
I0CHECK
10 ms
t
AND
BLKI02
OR
tR1
AND
INHIBIT
OR
-loop
tR2
AND
BLKI01
BLOCK
-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
BLK1PH
DET2of3 - int.
REL2PH
BLK2PH
AND
tH
OR
AND
OR
START
AND
EXTERNAL
en05000114.vsd
Figure 130:
5.10.2.5
PSD function-simplified block diagram
Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 130 presents a simplified logic diagram for the PSD function. The internal
signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 128 and
figure 129 respectively.
Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the
functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.
The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated. The
characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.
There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:
230

REL 670
Section 5
Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal

instantaneously.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected
and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the
time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable
this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01 functional input.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer,
if an earth fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and
the power swing has been detected before the earth fault (activation of the signal
I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1
signal to the BLKI02 functional input.
The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK
appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance has been seen
within the outer characteristic of the PSD operate characteristic in all three
phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function in cases, when
the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-phase fault after single-pole autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole opening of
the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.
5.10.3
Function block
PSD1ZMRPSB_78
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BLKI01
BLKI02
BLK1PH
REL1PH
BLK2PH
REL2PH
I0CHECK
TRSP
EXTERNAL
START
ZOUT
ZIN
en06000264.vsd
Figure 131:
5.10.4
PSD function block

Table 110:
Input signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKI01
Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition
BLKI02
Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual current

detection
REL 670

231
Section 5
Signal
Description
BLK1PH
Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL1PH
Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
BLK2PH
Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL2PH
Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
I0CHECK
Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit start output
TRSP
Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping function
EXTERNAL
Input for external detection of power swing
Table 111:
Output signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block
Signal
5.10.5
Description
START
Power swing detected
ZOUT
Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary
ZIN
Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary
Setting parameters
Table 112:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
X1InFw
0.10 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
Inner reactive
boundary, forward
R1LIn
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
Line resistance for

inner characteristic
angle
R1FInFw
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
Fault resistance
coverage to inner
resistive line, forward
X1InRv
0.10 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
Inner reactive
boundary, reverse
R1FInRv
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
Fault resistance line

to inner resistive
boundary, reverse
OperationLdCh
Off
On
On
Operation of load
discrimination
characteristic
RLdOutFw
0.10 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
Outer resistive load

boundary, forward
ArgLd
5 - 70
25
Deg
Load angle
determining load
impedance area
RLdOutRv
0.10 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
Outer resistive load

boundary, reverse
232

REL 670
Section 5
Parameter
Step
Default
kLdRFw
0.50 - 0.90
0.01
0.75
Mult
Multiplication factor
for inner resistive load
boundary, forward
kLdRRv
0.50 - 0.90
0.01
0.75
Mult
Multiplication factor
for inner resistive load
boundary, reverse
tEF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Timer for overcoming

single-pole reclosing
dead time
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
10
%IB
Minimum operate
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current level settings
Table 113:
Parameter
5.10.6
Unit
Description
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function

Default
Unit
tP1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.045
Timer for detection of

initial power swing
tP2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.015
Timer for detection of

subsequent power
swings
tW
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.250
Waiting timer for

activation of tP2 timer
tH
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Timer for holding

power swing START
output
tR1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Timer giving delay to

inhibit by the residual
current
tR2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Timer giving delay to

inhibit at very slow
swing
Range
Step
Description
Technical data
Table 114:
Function
REL 670
Range
Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Range or value
Reactive reach
(0.10-3000.00) W/phase
Resistive reach
(0.101000.00)W /loop
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s

Accuracy
Conditions:
degrees
0.5% 10 ms
233
Section 5
5.11
Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Function block name: PSL--
ANSI number:
ZMRPSL
5.11.1
Introduction
Power Swing Logic (RPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing Detection
(PSD) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults on power lines
during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the distance protection
function should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists of two different
parts:
Communication and tripping part. It provides selective tripping on the basis of

special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which are
not blocked during the system oscillations.
Blocking part. It blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection
zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements.
5.11.2
5.11.2.1
Communication and tripping logic

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 132.
234

REL 670
Section 5
STDEF
AR1P1
&
STPSD
BLOCK
&
tCS
t
&
tTrip
tBlkTr
t
CS
CSUR
&
BLKZMPS
t
CACC
CR
&
>1
TRIP
en06000236.vsd
Figure 132:
Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping

logic
The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the BLOCK
functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF functional input
signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by the logical one on
the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal BLKZMPS remains
logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (BLOCK is logical zero)
and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF is logical one), which is
connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the
duration of this blocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the
operate area of the PSD function (STPSD input active). The BLKZMPS can be used
to block the operation of the power-swing zones.
Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates the
TRIP functional output.
Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.
Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local trip
condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not blocked by
one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present longer then the
time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.
5.11.2.2
Blocking logic
Figure 133 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance
on the remote power lines.
REL 670

235
Section 5
&
BLKZMH
&
STZML
BLOCK
STMZH
STZMPSD
STPSD
tZL
t
&
&
tDZ
t
&
>1
STZMLL
>1
&
-loop
en06000237.vsd
Figure 133:
Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power

swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines
and other system elements
The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional inputBLOCK. It can start only if
the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that the PSD
function must not detect power swinging over the protected power line.
STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance
must be detected within the external boundary of the PSD function.
STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must
be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example zone 2.
The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:
If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it appears
with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ.
If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay longer
than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay
set on the tZL timer.
The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the
higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area
after tDZ time delay.
236

REL 670
Section 5
5.11.3
Function block
PSL1ZMRPSL
BLOCK
STZMUR
STZMOR
STPSD
STDEF
STZMPSD
CACC
AR1P1
CSUR
CR
TRIP
STZMURPS
BLKZMUR
BLKZMOR
CS
en07000026.vsd
Figure 134:
5.11.4
PSL function block

Table 115:
Input signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
STZMUR
Start of the underreaching zone
STZMOR
Start of the overreaching zone
STPSD
Power swing detected
STDEF
Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or reverse

direction
STZMPSD
Operation of Power Swing Detection external characteristic
CACC
Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated
AR1P1
Single pole auto-reclosing in progress
CSUR
Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing zone
CR
Carrier receive signal during power swing detection operation
Table 116:
Output signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
TRIP
Trip through Power Swing Logic
STZMURPS
Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to be used in

configuration
BLKZMUR
Block trip of underreaching impedance zone
BLKZMOR
Block trip of overreaching distance protection zones
CS
Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing

237
Section 5
5.11.5
Setting parameters
Table 117:
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
tDZ
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.050
Permitted max oper

time diff between
higher and lower zone
tDZMUR
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Delay for oper of

underreach zone with
detected diff in oper
time
tCS
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Conditional timer for

sending the CS at
power swings
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Conditional timer for

tripping at power
swings
tBlkTr
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Timer for blocking the

overreaching zones
trip
5.11.6
Technical data
5.12
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Function block name:
ANSI number: 78
5.12.1
<
Introduction
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power
swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the
pole slip protection is to detect, evaluate, and take the required action for pole slipping
occurrences in the power system. The electrical system parts swinging to each other
can be separated with the line/s closest to the centre of the power swing allowing the
two systems to be stable as separated islands.
238

REL 670
Section 5
5.12.2
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance
and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If the generator
is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring
is signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor).
The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 135. The transient
behaviour is described by the transient e.m.f's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.
Zone 1
EB
Zone 2
Xd
XT
XS
REG 670
EA
jX
A
XS
Pole slip
impedance
movement
XT
Apparent generator
impedance
Xd
B
en06000437.vsd
Figure 135:
Movements in the impedance plain
where:
REL 670
X'd
= transient reactance of the generator
XT
= short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer
ZS
= impedance of the power system A

239
Section 5
The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:
the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.
en07000004.vsd
Figure 136:
Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the

equivalent generators
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds
the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.
Slipping is detected when:
a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in
zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone
1 when 'EnableZone1' is enabled (external device detects the direction of the centre
of slipping).
After the first slip, the signals 'Zone1' or 'Zone2' and depending on the direction of
slip - either 'Generator' or 'Motor' are issued.
240

REL 670
Section 5
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line
is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor
movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in
the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within
ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
The 'Trip1' tripping command and signal are generated after n1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. The 'Trip2' signal is generated after
n2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'.
All signals are reset if:
the direction of movement reverses

the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
no rotor relative movement was detected during the time 't-Reset'.
Imin > 0.10 IBase
Ucosj < 0.92 UBase
AND
START
AND
0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz
d startAngle
ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC
ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB
Counter
N1Limit
a
b
ab
TRIP1
AND
d tripAngle
OR
Counter
N2Limit
a
b ab
AND
TRIP
TRIP2
en07000005.vsd
Figure 137:
REL 670
Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection

241
Section 5
5.12.3
Function block
PSP1PSPPPAM_78
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BLKGEN
BLKMOTOR
EXTZONE1
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
ZONE1
ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
UCOSKV
UCOSPER
en07000030.vsd
Figure 138:
5.12.4
PSP function block

Table 118:
Input signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Current group connection
U3P
Voltage group connection
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKGEN
Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR
Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1
Extension of zone1 with zone2 region
Table 119:
Output signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Common trip signal
TRIP1
Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2
Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
START
Common start signal
ZONE1
First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2
First slip in zone2 region
GEN
Generator is faster then the system
MOTOR
Generator is slower then the system
SFREQ
Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM
Slip impedance in ohms
242

REL 670
Section 5
Signal
5.12.5
Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
UCOSKV
UCosPhi voltage in kV
UCOSPER
UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase
Setting parameters
Table 120:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IBase
0.1 - 99999.9
0.1
3000.0
Base Current
(primary phase
current in Amperes)
UBase
0.1 - 9999.9
0.1
20.0
kV
Base Voltage
(primary phase-tophase voltage in kV)
MeasureMode
PosSeq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
Measuring mode
(PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,
L3L1)
InvertCTcurr
No
Yes
No
Invert current
direction
Table 121:
Parameter
REL 670
Description
SLIPZPER
Basic parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation On / Off
OperationZ1
Off
On
On
Operation Zone1 On /
Off
OperationZ2
Off
On
On
Operation Zone2 On /
Off
ImpedanceZA
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Forward impedance
in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Reverse impedance
in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Impedance of zone1
limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi
72.00 - 90.00
0.01
85.00
Deg
Angle of the slip

impedance line
StartAngle
0.0 - 180.0
0.1
110.0
Deg
Rotor angle for the

start signal
TripAngle
0.0 - 180.0
0.1
90.0
Deg
Rotor angle for the

trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit
1 - 20
Count limit for the

trip1 signal
N2Limit
1 - 20
Count limit for the

trip2 signal

243
Section 5
Table 122:
Advanced parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter
Range
ResetTime
5.12.6
0.000 - 60.000
Default
Unit
5.000
0.001
Description
Time without slip to
reset all signals
Technical data
Table 123:
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)
Function
5.13
Step
Range or value
Accuracy
Impedance reach
(0.001000.00)% of Zbase
2.0% of Ur/Ir
Characteristic angle
(72.0090.00) degrees
5.0 degrees
Start and trip angles
(0.0180.0) degrees
5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters
(1-20)
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and

current based (SFCV)
Function block name: SFV--
ANSI number:
ZCVPSOF
5.13.1
Introduction
Automatic switch onto fault logic is a function that gives an instantaneous trip at
closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is provided to activate the
function when the line is dead.
Mho distance protections can not operate for switch on to fault condition when the
phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for
this purpose.
5.13.2
The switch-onto-fault function (SFV) can be activated externally by Breaker Closed
Input or internally (automatically) by using UI Level Based Logic see figure 139.
The activation from the DLD function is released if the internal signal DeadLine from
the UILevel function is activated at the same time as the input ZACC is not activated
during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is set to On.
244

REL 670
Section 5
When the setting AutoInit is Off the function is activated by an external binary input
BC. To get a trip also one of the following operation modes must be selected by the
parameter Mode:
Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal connected
to non directional distance protection zone)
Mode = UILevel; trip is released if UILevel detector is activated
Mode = Both; trip is initiated based on impedance measured criteria or UILevel
detection
The internal signal DeadLine from the UILevel detector is activated if all three phase
currents and voltages are below the setting IPh< and UPh<.
UI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though the
voltage is very low. The logic is based on current change for activation, current level
and voltage level. The internal signal SOTFLevel is activated if the phase voltage and
corresponding phase current is below the setting IPh< and UPh< in any phase.
First of all AutoInit= On is not needed (or in some cases not even wanted) for external
activation and secondly the information is already present in the first sentence of
"Principle of operation"
The function is released during a settable time tSOTF.
The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
REL 670

245
Section 5
BLOCK
15
AND
TRIP
BC
AutiInit=On
1000
200
ZACC
AND
IL1
OR
deadLine
IL2
IL3
UL1
UILevel detector
UL2
UL3
Iph<
SOTFU ILevel
Uph<
AND
Mode = Impedance
AND
Mode = UILevel
OR
OR
Mode = UILvl&Imp
AND
en07000084.vsd
Figure 139:
246
Simplified logic diagram for current and voltage based switch onto fault logic.

REL 670
Section 5
5.13.3
Function block
SFV1ZCVPSOF
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BC
ZACC
TRIP
en06000459.vsd
Figure 140:
5.13.4
SFV1 function block

Table 124:
Input signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block
Signal
Current DFT
U3P
Voltage DFT
BLOCK
Block of function
BC
External enabling of SOTF
ZACC
Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF
Table 125:
5.13.5
Description
I3P
Output signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip output
Setting parameters
Table 126:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current (A)
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage L-L (kV)
Mode
Impedance
UILevel
UILvl&Imp
UILevel
Mode of operation of
SOTF Function
AutoInit
Off
On
Off
Automatic switchonto
fault initialization
IPh<
1 - 100
20
%IB
Current level for

detection of dead line
in % of IBase
REL 670

247
Section 5
Parameter
5.13.6
Range
Step
Default
Description
1 - 100
70
%UB
Voltage level for

detection of dead line
in % of UBase
tDuration
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Time delay for UI

detection (s)
tSOTF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Drop off delay time of

switch onto fault
function
tDLD
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Delay time for

activation of dead line
detection
Technical data
Table 127:
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (PSOF)
Parameter
248
Unit
UPh<
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line
(1100)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Operate current, detection of dead line
(1100)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir
Delay following dead line detection input before SOTF

function is automatically enabled
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Time period after circuit breaker closure in which

SOTF function is active
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Section 6
Current protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection,
Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.
6.1
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection

(PIOC, 50)
Function block name: IOCx-
ANSI number: 50
PHPIOC
6.1.1
3I>>
Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function, with
the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the fault current line at minimum
source impedance.
6.1.2
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the
RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to
the IOC function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation
current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation
current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will,
without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP
signal that is common for all three phases.
REL 670

249
Section 6
Current protection
There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the

parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter
is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
6.1.3
Function block
IOC1PHPIOC_50
I3P
BLOCK
ENMULT
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
en04000391.vsd
Figure 141:
6.1.4
IOC function block

Table 128:
Input signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Three phase current
BLOCK
Block of function
ENMULT
Enable current start value multiplier
Table 129:
Output signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip signal from any phase
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
6.1.5
Setting parameters
250

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 130:
Basic parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function
Parameter
Range
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
OpMode
2 out of 3
1 out of 3
1 out of 3
Select operation
mode 2-out of 3 / 1out of 3
IP>>
1 - 2500
200
%IB
Operate phase
current level in % of
IBase
Table 131:
Advanced parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function
Parameter
Range
StValMult
6.1.6
Step
Step
0.5 - 5.0
Default
0.1
1.0
Unit
Description
Multiplier for operate

current level
Technical data
Table 132:
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate time
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Reset time
Operate time
Reset time
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
6.2
Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC,

51_67)
REL 670

251
Section 6
Current protection
Function block name: TOCx-
ANSI number: 51/67

OC4PTOC
6.2.1
3I>
4
4
alt
Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay
independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined time characteristic.
The function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.
6.2.2
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each
step x an operation mode is set (DirModex): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.
The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:
The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction

The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
The 4 step over current function
The Mode Selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameter
DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
252

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
faultState
Direction
Element
I3P
dirPh1Flt
dirPh2Flt
dirPh3Flt
4 step over current

element
One element for each
step
faultState
START
U3P
TRIP
I3P
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en05000740.vsd
Figure 142:
Functional overview of TOC.
A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3.
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a pre-processing function
blocks. By a parameter setting within the general settings for the TOC function it is
then possible to select type of measurement which shall be used by TOC function for
all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or
true RMS filer (RMS). If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the
fundamental frequency components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC
current component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely
suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true
RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the
contribution from the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic.
The selected current values are fed to the TOC function. In a comparator, for each
phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value
of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation
current a signal from the comparator for this phase and step is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this phase/step, the Start signal
REL 670

253
Section 6
Current protection
common for all three phases for this step and a common Start signal. It shall be noted
that the selection of measured value (i.e. DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation
of directional part of TOC function. Service value for individually measured phase
currents are available from the TOC function. This feature simplifies testing,
commissioning and in service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from
the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.
The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is given
as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage
for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional
measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%).
The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2
I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3
I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1
I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
Phase-earth short circuit:
U refL1 = U L1
I dirL1 = I L1
U refL 2 = U L 2
I dirL 2 = I L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3
I dirL 3 = I L 3
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window AngleROA.
254

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 143:
Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection
The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of
inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics
is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The
possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inverse
characteristics".
Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inverse
characteristics".
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the
set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching
state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from
the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
REL 670

255
Section 6
Current protection
6.2.3
Function block
TOC1OC4PTOC_51_67
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4
TRIP
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
2NDHARM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
en06000187.vsd
Figure 144:
6.2.4
TOC function block

Table 133:
Input signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Block of trip
BLKST1
Block of Step1
256

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Signal
Description
BLKST2
Block of Step2
BLKST3
Block of Step3
BLKST4
Block of Step4
ENMULT1
When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4
Table 134:
Output signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip
TR1
Common trip signal from step1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TR1L1
Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
General start signal
ST1
Common start signal from step1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
REL 670

257
Section 6
Current protection
Signal
6.2.5
Description
ST1L1
Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
2NDHARM
Block from second harmonic detection
DIRL1
Direction for phase1
DIRL2
DIRL3
Setting parameters
Table 135:
Parameter
MeasType
Table 136:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range
DFT
RMS
Step
-
Default
DFT
Unit
-
Description
Selection between
DFT and RMS
measurement
Basic parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
AngleRCA
40 - 65
55
Deg
Relay characteristic
angle (RCA)
AngleROA
40 - 89
80
Deg
Relay operation angle

(ROA)
StartPhSel
Not Used
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases
required for op (1 of 3,
2 of 3, 3 of 3)
258

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DirMode1
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 1 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 1
I1>
1 - 2500
1000
%IB
Phase current
operate level for step1
in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Definitive time delay

of step 1
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
Time multiplier for the

inverse time delay for
step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for current

operate level for step
1
DirMode2
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 2 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
REL 670

259
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 2
I2>
1 - 2500
500
%IB
Phase current
in % of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

of step 2
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

step 2
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

2
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
DirMode3
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 3 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 3
I3>
1 - 2500
250
%IB
Phase current
in % of IBase
260

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
REL 670
Default
Unit
t3
Range
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800

of step 3
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

step 3
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 3
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

3
DirMode4
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 4 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 4
I4>
1 - 2500
175
%IB
Phase current
in % of IBase
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000

of step 4
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

step 4
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 4
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

4

Step
Description
261
Section 6
Current protection
Table 137:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IMinOpPhSel
1 - 100
%IB
Minimum current for

phase selection in %
of IBase
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
%IB
Operate level of 2nd

harm restrain op in %
of Fundamental
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 1
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Reset time delay used

in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
HarmRestrain1
Off
On
Off
Enable block of step 1

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 2
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
262

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
HarmRestrain2
Off
On
Off

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 3
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
REL 670

263
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
HarmRestrain3
Off
On
Off
Enable block of step3

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 4
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
HarmRestrain4
Off
On
Off

from harmonic
restrain
6.2.6
Technical data
264

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 138:
Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51/67)
Function
6.3
Setting range
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Min. operating current
(1-100)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
(-70.0 -50.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Maximum forward angle
(40.070.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Minimum forward angle
(75.090.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see

table 588 and table 589
19 curve types
See table 588 and table 589
Operate time, start function
Reset time, start function
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

(PIOC, 50N)
Function block name: IEFx-
ANSI number: 50N

EFPIOC
6.3.1
IN>>
Introduction
The single input overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping
times to allow use for instantaneous earth fault protection, with the reach limited to
less than typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. The
function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase
current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
REL 670

265
Section 6
Current protection
6.3.2
The sampled analogue residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current
the RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the IEF function. In a comparator
the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function
(IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from
the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal
TRIP.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via
a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during
single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
6.3.3
Function block
IEF1EFPIOC_50N
I3P
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN
TRIP
en06000269.vsd
Figure 145:
6.3.4
IEF function block

Table 139:
Input signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block
Signal
Three phase currents
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKAR
Block input for auto reclose
MULTEN
Enable current multiplier
Table 140:
266
Description
I3P
Output signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip signal

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
6.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 141:
Basic parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function
Parameter
Range
Default
Unit
Description
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
IN>>
1 - 2500
200
%IB
Operate residual
IBase
Table 142:
Advanced parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function
Parameter
Range
StValMult
6.3.6
Step
Operation
Step
0.5 - 5.0
Default
0.1
1.0
Unit
Description
Multiplier for operate

current level
Technical data
Table 143:
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate time
Reset time
Operate time
Reset time
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
6.4
Four step residual overcurrent protection

(PTOC, 51N/67N)
REL 670

267
Section 6
Current protection
Function block name: TEFx-
ANSI number:51N/ 67N

EF4PTOC
6.4.1
IN
4
4
alt
Introduction
The four step residual single input overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time
delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.
A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
The function can be used as main protection for phase to earth faults.
The function can be used to provide a system back-up e.g. in the case of the primary
protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit
failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication
blocks into permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weakend infeed functionality are available as well.
The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase
current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
6.4.2
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
I3P, input for the function Operating Quantity.

U3P, input for the function Voltage Polarizing Quantity.
IP3P, input for the function Current Polarizing Quantity.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM.
6.4.2.1
Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:
268

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
1.
directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT

tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF
function input I3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input can be for example
connected to:
2.
parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases

(well known Holm-Green connection).
one single core balance, current instrument transformer (i.e. cable CT).
one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the star point of
a star connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (i.e. current transformer located between two star points
of double star shunt capacitor bank).
calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analog Input I3P
is not connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case
the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the
pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I op = 3 Io = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the TEF function to compare it with the set operation current
value of the four stages (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the residual
current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional
mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without
delay, activate the output signal START for this step and a common START signal.
6.4.2.2
Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the function in order to determine the direction
of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
When Voltage Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Voltage (i.e.
3Uo) as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage can be:
1.
REL 670
directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT


269
Section 6
Current protection
2.
function input U3P). This dedicated IED 670 VT input shall be then connected
to open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
calculated from three phase voltage input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analogue Input
U3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such
case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Uo from the first three inputs into
the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
U VPol = 3 Uo = UL1 + UL 2 + UL3

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
Note! In order to use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED 670 VT
inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This phasor
is used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the
direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage
polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level
defined by setting parameter UpolMin.
It shall be noted that 3Uo is used to determine the location of the earth fault.Thus
the setting parameter ROT3U0, located under General Settings for Earth Fault
function, has default value of ROT3U0=180 deg. This insures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the earth fault function.
When Current Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Current (i.e.
3Io) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1.
directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT

function input IP3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input is then typically
connected to one single current instrument transformer located between power
system star point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the star point of
a star connected transformer winding).
2.
270
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED 670 CT
input can be connected to parallel connection of current instrument
transformers in all three phases (well known Holm-Green connection)
calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analog Input IP3P
is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the
pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I Pol = 3 Io = IL1 + IL 2 + IL 3
(Equation 76)
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents. However this
option can be as well only used for some special line protection applications as
explained in the Application Manual.
The residual polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the
phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived.
This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent Zero Sequence Source
Impedance in order to calculate equivalent Polarizing Voltage UIPol in accordance
with the following formula:
U IPol = ZoS I Pol = (RNPol+j XNPol) I Pol
(Equation 77)
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum
level defined by setting parameter IPollMin.
When Dual Polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
U TotPol = U UPol + U IPol = 3Uo + ZoS I Pol = 3Uo + (RNPol+j XNPol) I Pol
(Equation 78)
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e.
Forward/Reverse).
6.4.2.3
External polarizing facility for EFGround Fault function

The individual stages within the function can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the function) to provide external directional control
(i.e. torque control) by for example using one of the following functions available in
IED 670:
REL 670

271
Section 6
Current protection
1.
2.
6.4.2.4
Distance protection directional unit.

Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.
Base quantities within the function

The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for every EF function. Base
current shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes. Base voltage shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the
protected object in primary kV.
6.4.2.5
Internal EFGround Fault function structure

The function is internally divided into the following parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Four residual overcurrent stages.

Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent stages with integrated
Directional Comparison stage for communication based earth fault protection
schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking).
Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.
Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.
Each part is described separately in the following paragraphs.
6.4.2.6
Four residual overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity IOp (i.e. Residual Current) as
measuring quantity. Every of the four residual overcurrent stage has the following
built-in facilities:
272
Operating mode (i.e. Off / Non-directional / Forward / Reverse). By this

parameter setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. It shall be noted
that the directional decision (i.e. Forward/Reverse) is not made within residual
overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
Directional Supervision Element described in the next paragraph.
Residual current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for earth fault function.
Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the
complete list of available inverse curves please refer to Chapter "Time inverse
characteristics"
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI Rest). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
the complete list of available reset curves please refer to Chapter "Time inverse
characteristics"

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay
and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (i.e. On/Off). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the stage if the second
harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup
value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent stage is shown in the following
figure:
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP|
tx
AND
TRINx
OR
a>b
ENMULTx
INxMult
STINx
AND
T
F
INx>
Inverse
BLKSTx
BLOCK
Characteristx=Inverse
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrain1=Disabled
OR
DirModex=Off
STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
en07000064.vsd
Figure 146:
Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2 ,3 or 4
The function can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from the function for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.
6.4.2.7
Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparision

stage
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent stages
shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
REL 670

273
Section 6
Current protection
directional supervision element and the integrated directional

comparison stage.
The function has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
IOp is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:
1.
2.
3.
When polMethod=Voltage, UVPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

When polMethod=Current, UIPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
When polMethod=Dual, UTotPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in the following figure, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.
Reverse
Area
0.4*IN>Dir
Upol=-3Uo
AngleRCA
0.4*IN>Dir
Forward
Area
Iop=3Io
en07000066.vsd
Figure 147:
Operating characteristic for earth fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
274

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Operating Current Pickup IN>Dir. However it shall be noted that the directional
element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as IOp cos( - AngleRCA)
is bigger then 40% of IN>Dir.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of Forward &
Reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional Comparison stage, built-in within directional supervision element, will

set EF function output binary signal:
1.
2.
STFW=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than setting parameter

IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction.
STRV=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse
direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based earth fault teleprotection
schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison stage is shown in the following figure:
REL 670

275
Section 6
Current protection
|IOP|
a>b
0.6
X
a
IN>Dir
a>b
0.4
STRV
AND
REVERSE_Int
STFW
AND
FORWARD_Int
FWD
PolMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin
PolMethod=Current
PolMethod=Dual
IPolMin
UPol
OR
T
0.0
IOP
UTotPol
IPol
RNPol
XNPol
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
Directional
Characteristic
AngleRCA
RVS
COMPLEX
NUMBER
UIPol
0.0
T
F
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
BLOCK
en07000067.vsd
Figure 148:
6.4.2.8
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
stage
Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic
component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current
exceeds the pre-set level (defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab) any of the four
residual overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by a parameter setting
HarmRestrainx. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the EF function output
signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can
be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be
required to stabilize the EF function during switching of parallel transformers in the
station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current.
If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in,
the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial
276

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation.

The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase
opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic
current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush
current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will
be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high
2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current will
however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset. If the
BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will be latched as
long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current
level.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic sealin feature will be activated when all of the following three conditions are
simultaneously fulfilled:
1.
2.
3.
Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf=On.

Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70 ms.
Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible
to select which one of the four start values that will be used (i.e. IN1> or IN2>
or IN3> or IN4>).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal will be sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined
by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in the following
figure:
REL 670

277
Section 6
Current protection
BLOCK
2ndHarmStab
Extract second
harmonic current
component
IOP
2NDHARMD
OR
a>b
Extract
fundamental
current component
q-1
t=70ms
t
OR
AN
D
OR
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
UseStartValue
a>b
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
en07000068.vsd
Figure 149:
6.4.2.9
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature
Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either
SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk
to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The
SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during
which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the
setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The
setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open
change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current
start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set
delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 100 ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function.
The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This
enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker
closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately
278

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command
pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start
from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is
normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time
logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in
solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
REL 670

279
Figure 150:
280

Exec
Exec
Exec
closeCB
cbPosition
posOpnPls
posClsPls
OR
NOT
onOrOffPos
activationUnderTime
block
closeCBPls
AND
AND
activationSOTF
opnOrClsCBPls
OR
Setting
Exec
cbClosed
tpulse
NOT
tpulse
Setting
Exec
Exec
Setting
step4in
tpulse
cbSwitchingFaultDelayTime
NOT
AND
UTimeActive
Under Time
switchOntoFaultDelayTime
AND
SOTFActive
step2Or3in
tpulse
SOTF
harmonic2ndRestraint
PwrMode
Setting
Exec
PwrMode
AND
AND
TON
IN Q
PT ET
TON
IN Q
PT ET
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
False
OR
PwrMode
PwrMode
operationMode
Setting
operate
start
Exec
Exec
Section 6
Current protection
en06000643.vsd
Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features
EF Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF function is shown
in the following Figure 1:
REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Directional Check
Element
INPol
Direction
Element
3U0
4 step over current

element
One element for each
step
operatingCurrent
earthFaultDirection
3I0
signal to
communication
scheme
TRIP
angleValid
DirMode
enableDir
3I0
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
start step 2, 3 and

4
Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
Mode
Selection
DirMode
enableDir
TRIP
CB
pos
or cmd
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en06000376.vsd
Figure 151:
6.4.3
Functional overview of TEF
Function block
TEF1EF4PTOC_51N67N
I3P
U3P
I3PPOL
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4
CBPOS
CLOSECB
OPENCB
TRIP
TRIN1
TRIN2
TRIN3
TRIN4
TRSOTF
START
STIN1
STIN2
STIN3
STIN4
STSOTF
STFW
STRV
2NDHARMD
en06000424.vsd
Figure 152:
TEF1 function block
6.4.4
REL 670

281
Section 6
Current protection
Table 144:
Input signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Current connection
U3P
Polarizing voltage connection
I3PPOL
Polarizing current connection
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Block of trip
BLKST1
Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4
CBPOS
Breaker position
CLOSECB
Breaker close command
OPENCB
Breaker open command
Table 145:
Output signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip
TRIN1
Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2
TRIN3
TRIN4
TRSOTF
Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
START
STIN1
Start signal step 1
STIN2
Start signal step 2
STIN3
Start signal step 3
STIN4
Start signal step 4
STSOTF
Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STFW
Forward directional start signal
STRV
Reverse directional start signal
2NDHARMD
2nd harmonic block signal
6.4.5
Setting parameters
282

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 146:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000

settings
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV

settings
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
65
Deg
angle (RCA)
polMethod
Voltage
Current
Dual
Voltage
Type of polarization
UPolMin
1 - 100
%UB
Minimum voltage
level for polarization
in % of UBase
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
Minimum current level

for polarization in % of
IBase
RNPol
0.50 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm
Real part of source Z

to be used for current
polarisation
XNPol
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm
Imaginary part of
source Z to be used
for current
polarisation
IN>Dir
1 - 100
10
%IB
Residual current level

for Direction release
in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
Second harmonic
restrain operation in
% of IN amplitude
BlkParTransf
Off
On
Off
Enable blocking at
parallel transformers
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
IN4>
Current level blk at

parallel transf (step1,
2, 3 or 4)
SOTF
Off
SOTF
UnderTime
SOTF
+UnderTime
Off
SOTF operation
mode (Off/SOTF/
Undertime/SOTF
+undertime)
ActivationSOTF
Open
Closed
CloseCommand
Open
Select signal that

shall activate SOTF
StepForSOTF
Step 2
Step 3
Step 2
Selection of step used

for SOTF
HarmResSOTF
Off
On
Off
Enable harmonic
restrain function in
SOTF
tSOTF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay for SOTF
REL 670

283
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Default
Unit
t4U
Range
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
1.000
Description
Switch-onto-fault
active time
DirMode1
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 1 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Time delay curve type

for step 1
IN1>
1 - 2500
100
%IB
Operate residual
current level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Independent
(defenite) time delay
of step 1
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

dependent time delay
for step 1
IN1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for scaling

the current setting
value for step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
HarmRestrain1
Off
On
On

from harmonic
restrain
DirMode2
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 2 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
284

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time

for step 2
IN2>
1 - 2500
50
%IB
Operate residual
in % of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Independent
(definitive) time delay
of step 2
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 2
IN2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

the current setting
value for step 2
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves step 2
HarmRestrain2
Off
On
On

from harmonic
restrain
DirMode3
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 3 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time

for step 3
REL 670

285
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
286
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IN3>
1 - 2500
33
%IB
Operate residual
in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
Independent time
delay of step 3
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 3
IN3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

the current setting
value for step 3
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 3
HarmRestrain3
Off
On
On

from harmonic
restrain
DirMode4
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 4 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time

for step 4
IN4>
1 - 2500
17
%IB
Operate residual
in % of IBase
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
Independent
of step 4
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 4
IN4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

the current setting
value for step 4
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time in inverse curves
step 4
HarmRestrain4
Off
On
On

from harmonic
restrain

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 147:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ActUnderTime
CB position
CB command
CB position
Select signal to
activate under time
(CB Pos/
CBCommand)
tUnderTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Time delay for under

time
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Reset curve type for

step 1
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

step 1
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

step 2
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

step 2
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
REL 670

287
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Step
Default
tBCrv2
Range
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Unit
-
Description
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

step 3
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

step 3
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
step 3
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
288

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
6.4.6
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

step 4
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

step 4
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
Technical data
Table 148:
Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate current for directional

comparison
(1100)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see table

588 and table 589
19 curve types
Second harmonic restrain

operation
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of Ir
Relay characteristic angle
(-180 to 180) degrees
2.0 degrees
REL 670

289
Section 6
Current protection
Function
6.5
Range or value
Accuracy
Minimum polarizing voltage
(1100)% of Ubase
0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current
(130)% of Ibase
0.25% of Ir
RNS, XNS
(0.503000.00) W/phase
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and

power protection (PSDE, 67N)
Function block name: SDEx-
ANSI number: 67N

SDEPSDE
6.5.1
Introduction
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase to earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and
the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively the
function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0 and cos .
Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I03U0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current
and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.
A normal undirectional residual current function can also be used and be with definite
or inverse time delay.
A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for undirectional sensitive
back-up protection.
290

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90 phase
shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen
to -90 in such a network.
In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil, with a parallel resistor, the active
residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for
the earth fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have
the following facts to consider:
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse

time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks,
with large capacitive earth fault current
In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a
resistor will give a resistive earth fault current component of about 200 - 400 A
at a zero resistive phase to earth fault. In such a system the directional residual
power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time
power characteristics.
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
Introduction
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from preprocessor blocks.
The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 cos
is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) ).
Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir. RCAdir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance
earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is
appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCAdir is set equal to -90 in an isolated
REL 670

291
Section 6
Current protection
network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0 cos
gets larger than the set value.
Uref
RCA = 0, ROA = 90
3I0
= ang(3I0) - ang(3Uref)
-3U0=Uref
3I0 cos
en06000648.vsd
Figure 153:
RCADir set to 0
Uref
RCA = -90, ROA = 90
3I0
3I0 cos
= ang(3I0) ang(Uref)
-3U0
en06000649.vsd
Figure 154:
RCADir set to -90
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 cos and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger
than the set levels: INCosPhi> and UNRel>.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
292

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time
delay.
There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is
larger than a set value as shown in the figure below. This is equivalent to blocking of
the function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument
transformers.
3I0
3I0 cos
Operate area
-3U0=Uref
RCA = 0
ROA
en06000650.vsd
Figure 155:
Characteristic with ROADir restriction
The function will indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 cos ( + 180) the set value.
It shall also be possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer
angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure below:
REL 670

293
Section 6
Current protection
Operate area
-3U0=Uref
Instrument
transformer
angle error
RCA = 0
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim)
3I0 (to prot)
en06000651.vsd
Figure 156:
Explanation of RCAcomp.
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos
is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)ang(Uref) ).
Uref = -3U0 ejRCA. The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger than the set
value.
For trip, both the residual power 3I03U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the release
voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time
delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 3U0 cos ( + 180) the set value.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
294

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
t inv =
kSN (3I 0 3U 0 cos f (reference))

3I 0 3U 0 cos f (measured)
(Equation 79)
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and
The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the
angle = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCA = 0
ROA = 80
Operate area
3I0
80
-3U0
en06000652.vsd
Figure 157:
Example of characteristic
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than
the set levels (INDir> and UNREL>) and the angle shall be in the set sector (ROADir
and RCADir).
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir
This variant shall have definite time delay.
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the
forward direction, and STRV: start in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
REL 670

295
Section 6
Current protection
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse
direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the
start signal STFW.
Non-directional earthground fault current protection
This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The
function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.
If available the non-directional function is using the calculated residual current,
derived as sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect crosscountry faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for
the sensitive earth fault protection will saturate.
This variant shall have the possibility of choice between definite time delay and
inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set levels (INNonDir>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function is activated binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
activation is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the
binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.
Residual overvoltage release and protection
The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than
a set level.
There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this set
voltage level.
For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set levels (UN>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.
When the function is activated binary output signal STUN is activated. If the
activation is active after the set delay tUNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 158.
296

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
STNDIN
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
STUN
UN>
t
TRUN
OpMODE=INcosPhi
IN>
&
INcosPhi>
OpMODE=INUNcosPhi
&
STARTDIRIN
&
INUNcosPhi>
SN
Phi in RCA +- ROA
&
TRDIRIN
TimeChar = InvTime
&
OpMODE=IN and Phi
TimeChar = DefTime
DirMode = Forw
&
&
1
STFW
Forw
DirMode = Rev
&
STRV
Rev
en06000653.vsd
Figure 158:
6.5.3
Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection
Function block
SDE1SDEPSDE_67N
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKTRDIR
BLKNDN
BLKUN
TRIP
TRDIRIN
TRNDIN
TRUN
START
STDIRIN
STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL
en07000032.vsd
Figure 159:
REL 670
SDE function block

297
Section 6
Current protection
6.5.4

Table 149:
Input signals for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Group signal for current
U3P
Group signal for voltage
BLOCK
Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR
Blocks the operate outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR
Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function
BLKNDN
Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN
Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
Table 150:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
100
Base Current, in A
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
63.50
kV
Base Voltage, in kV
Phase to Neutral
SBase
0.05 200000000.00
0.05
6350.00
kVA
Base Power, in kVA.

IBase*UBase
Table 151:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
OpMode
3I0Cosfi
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
3I0Cosfi
Selection of operation
mode for protection
DirMode
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of operation
forward or reverse
RCADir
-179 - 180
-90
Deg
angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp
-10.0 - 10.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
angle compensation
ROADir
0 - 90
90
Deg
Relay open angle

ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
Set level for 3I0cosFi,

directional res over
current, in %Ib
SN>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
Set level for

3I03U0cosFi, starting
inv time count, in %Sb
298

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Step
Default
INDir>
Range
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
5.00
Unit
%IB
Description
Set level for
directional residual
over current prot, in
%Ib
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Definite time delay

overcurrent, in sec
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
Reference value of
res power for inverse
time count, in %Sb
kSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
Time multiplier setting

for directional residual
power mode
OpINNonDir>
Off
On
Off
Operation of nondirectional residual

overcurrent
protection
INNonDir>
1.00 - 400.00
0.01
10.00
%IB
Set level for non

over current, in %Ib
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay for nondirectional residual

over current, in sec
TimeChar
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IEC Norm. inv.
Operation curve
selection for IDMT
operation
tMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
IDMT time mult for

non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN>
Off
On
Off

overvoltage
protection
UN>
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
20.00
%UB
Set level for nondirectional residual

over voltage, in %Ub
REL 670

299
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Default
Unit
tUNNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100

over voltage, in sec
INRel>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
Residual release
current for all
directional modes, in
%Ib
UNRel>
0.01 - 200.00
0.01
3.00
%UB
Residual release
voltage for all
direction modes, in
%Ub
Table 152:
Parameter
RotResU
Table 153:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range
0 deg
180 deg
Step
-
Default
180 deg
Unit
-
Description
Setting for rotating
polarizing quantity if
necessary
Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Default
Unit
tReset
Range
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
Time delay used for

reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Setting P for customer

programmable curve
tACrv
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Setting A for customer

programmable curve
tBCrv
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Setting B for customer

programmable curve
tCCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Setting C for
customer
programmable curve
ResetTypeCrv
Immediate
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
IEC Reset
Reset mode when

current drops off.
tPRCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Setting PR for
customer
programmable curve
tTRCrv
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Setting TR for
customer
programmable curve
tCRCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Setting CR for
customer
programmable curve
6.5.5
Setting parameters
300

Step
Description
REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 154:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
100
Base Current, in A
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
63.50
kV
Base Voltage, in kV
Phase to Neutral
SBase
0.05 200000000.00
0.05
6350.00
kVA
Base Power, in kVA.

IBase*Ubase
Table 155:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
OpMode
3I0Cosfi
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
3I0Cosfi
Selection of operation
mode for protection
DirMode
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of operation
forward or reverse
RCADir
-179 - 180
-90
Deg
angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp
-10.0 - 10.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
angle compensation
ROADir
0 - 90
90
Deg
Relay open angle

ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
Set level for 3I0cosFi,

directional res over
current, in %Ib
SN>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
Set level for

3I03U0cosFi, starting
inv time count, in %Sb
INDir>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
5.00
%IB
Set level for

over current prot, in
%Ib
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Definite time delay

overcurrent, in sec
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
Reference value of
res power for inverse
time count, in %Sb
kSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
Time multiplier setting

for directional residual
power mode
OpINNonDir>
Off
On
Off

overcurrent
protection
INNonDir>
1.00 - 400.00
0.01
10.00
%IB
Set level for non

over current, in %Ib
REL 670

301
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Default
Unit
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000

over current, in sec
TimeChar
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IEC Norm. inv.
Operation curve
selection for IDMT
operation
tMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
IDMT time mult for

non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN>
Off
On
Off

overvoltage
protection
UN>
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
20.00
%UB
Set level for nondirectional residual

over voltage, in %Ub
tUNNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100

over voltage, in sec
INRel>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
Residual release
current for all
directional modes, in
%Ib
UNRel>
0.01 - 200.00
0.01
3.00
%UB
Residual release
voltage for all
direction modes, in
%Ub
Table 156:
Parameter
RotResU
302
Range
Step
Description
Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range
0 deg
180 deg

Step
-
Default
180 deg
Unit
-
Description
Setting for rotating
polarizing quantity if
necessary
REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 157:
Parameter
6.5.6
Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
Time delay used for

reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Setting P for customer

programmable curve
tACrv
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Setting A for customer

programmable curve
tBCrv
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Setting B for customer

programmable curve
tCCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Setting C for
customer
programmable curve
ResetTypeCrv
Immediate
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
IEC Reset
Reset mode when

current drops off.
tPRCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Setting PR for
customer
programmable curve
tTRCrv
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Setting TR for
customer
programmable curve
tCRCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Setting CR for
customer
programmable curve
Technical data
Table 158:
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)
Function
Operate level for 3I0 cosj
directional residual overcurrent
Range or value
(0.25-200.00)% of lbase
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
Operate level for 3I03U0 cosj

directional residual power
(0.25-200.00)% of Sbase
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of Sbase
Operate level for 3I0 and j

residual overcurrent
(0.25-200.00)% of Ibase
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
Operate level for non directional

overcurrent
(1.00-400.00)% of Ibase
At low setting:
(10-50) mA
Accuracy
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
1.0 mA
0.5 mA
1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
10% of set value
1.0% of Ir at Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
1.0 mA
0.5 mA
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
1.0 mA
REL 670

303
Section 6
Current protection
Function
Range or value
(1.00-200.00)% of Ubase
0.5% of Ur at UUr
0.5% of U at U > Ur
Residual release current for all

directional modes
(0.25-200.00)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
6.6
Accuracy
Operate level for non directional

residual overvoltage
1.0 mA
0.5 mA
Residual release voltage for all

directional modes
(0.01-200.00)% of Ubase
0.5% of Ur at UUr
0.5% of U at > Ur
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see table

588 and table 589
19 curve types
Relay characteristic angle RCA
2.0 degrees
Relay open angle ROA
(0-90) degrees
2.0 degrees
Operate time, non directional

residual over current
Reset time, non directinal residual

over current
Thermal overload protection, one time constant

(PTTR, 26)
Function block name: THLx-
ANSI number: 49
LPTTR
6.6.1
Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits have
generated a need of a thermal overload function also for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload function can allow the protected circuit to operate
closer to the thermal limits.
304

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
The three phase current measuring function has an I2t characteristic with settable time
constant and a thermal memory.
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line will be tripped.
6.6.2
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed
to the THL function.
From the largest of the three phase currents a final temperature is calculated according
to the expression:
Q final
I
=
I ref
Tref
(Equation 80)
where:
I
is the largest phase current,
Iref
is a given reference current and
Tref
is steady state temperature corresponding to Iref
The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level a start output signal
START is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
Dt
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
(Equation 81)
where:
REL 670
Qn
is the calculated present temperature,
Qn-1
is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,
Qfinal
is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,
Dt
is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and
is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

305
Section 6
Current protection
The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant
value.The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from
the function as a real figure.
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level
TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:
Q
- Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
(Equation 82)
The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a
real figure TTRIP.
After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout
to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated, i.e. a calculation of the cooling time to a set
value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q
Q
final
n
(Equation 83)
Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The
calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the
function as a real figure.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By
setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current
on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input
ENMULT must be activated.
The function has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.
306

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
start signal
Final Temp
> TripTemp
actual temperature
Calculation
of actual
temperature
IL1, IL2, IL3
Calculation
of final
temperature
Actual Temp >
AlarmTemp
alarm signal
trip signal
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
initiate lockout
Actual Temp Reset of lockout after trip

< Recl Temp
Calculation
of time to
trip
Calculation
of time to
reset of
lockout
time to trip
time to reset of lockout
en05000736.vsd
Figure 160:
REL 670
Functional overview of THL

307
Section 6
Current protection
6.6.3
Function block
THL1LPTTR_26
I3P
BLOCK
BLKTR
ENMULT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET
TRIP
START
ALARM
LOCKOUT
en04000396.vsd
Figure 161:
6.6.4
THL function block

Table 159:
Input signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Group connection
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Block of trip
ENMULT
Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines
AMBTEMP
Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT
Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET
Reset of internal thermal load counter
Table 160:
Output signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip
START
Start Signal
ALARM
Alarm signal
LOCKOUT
Lockout signal
6.6.5
Setting parameters
308

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 161:
Parameter
6.6.6
Basic parameter group settings for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
0 - 99999
3000
Base current in A
TRef
0 - 600
90
Deg
End temperature rise

above ambient of the
line when loaded with
IRef
IRef
0 - 400
100
%IB
The load current (in

%of IBase) leading to
TRef temperature
IMult
1-5
Current multiplier
when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau
0 - 1000
45
Min
Time constant of the

line in minutes.
AlarmTemp
0 - 200
80
Deg
Temperature level for

start (alarm)
TripTemp
0 - 600
90
Deg
Temperature level for

trip
ReclTemp
0 - 600
75
Deg
Temperature for reset

of lockout after trip
tPulse
0.05 - 0.30
0.01
0.1
Operate pulse length.

Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens
Off
On
Off
External temperature
sensor availiable
DefaultAmbTemp
-50 - 250
20
Deg
Ambient temperature
used when AmbiSens
is set to Off.
DefaultTemp
-50 - 600
50
Deg
Temperature raise
above ambient
temperature at
startup
Technical data
Table 162:
Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reference current
(0-400)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir
Start temperature reference
(0-400)C
1.0C
Operate time:
Ip = load current before overload

occurs
Time constant t = (01000)
minutes
IEC 60255-8, class 5 + 200 ms
I 2 - I p2
t = t ln 2
I - Ib 2
I = Imeasured
REL 670

309
Section 6
Current protection
Function
6.7
Range or value
Accuracy
Alarm temperature
(0-200)C
2.0% of heat content trip
Trip temperature
(0-400)C
Reset level temperature
(0-400)C
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFPx-
ANSI number: 50BF

CCRBRF
6.7.1
3I>BF
Introduction
The circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding
breakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact based
or adaptive combination between these two principles.
A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achieve
a high security against unnecessary operation.
The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with
single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failure
protection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. two
phases or one phase plus the residual current starts. This gives a higher security to
the back-up trip command.
The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the own
breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.
6.7.2
The breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from external
protection devices.
The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective
start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to
open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For
transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function
310

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The retrip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the
re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the
operate current level.
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signal
gets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the backup trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by
the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted
algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker
opening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has
not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip
is initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated
after an added settable time after the first back-up trip.
Further the following possibilities are available:
REL 670
The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the backup trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed
breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of
4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the setting
of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

311
Section 6
Current protection
Current
AND
BLOCK
STIL1
AND
tp
t1
Current &
Contact
AND
TRRETL1
START
OR
STL1
OR
OR
CBCLDL1
AND
TRRET
AND
Contact
L2
L3
en05000832.vsd
Figure 162:
312
Simplified logic scheme of the retrip function

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Figure 163:
Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function
Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current in
respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>.
Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude
larger than setting parameter IN>.
REL 670

313
Section 6
Current protection
More than 1 current high

AND
1 of 3
t2MPh
t
tp
TRBU
OR
1 of 4
t2
t
OR
t3
t
tp
TRBU2
2 of 3
AND
CBFLT
CBALARM
CBALARM
en06000223.vsd
Figure 164:
6.7.3
Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function
Function block
BFP1CCRBRF_50BF
I3P
BLOCK
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
CBCLDL1
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT
TRBU
TRBU2
TRRET
TRRETL1
TRRETL2
TRRETL3
CBALARM
en06000188.vsd
Figure 165:
6.7.4
BFP function block

Table 163:
Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Current connection
BLOCK
Block of function
START
Three phase start of breaker failure protection function
STL1
Start signal of phase L1
314

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Signal
Description
STL2
STL3
CBCLDL1
Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT
CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.
Table 164:
Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal
6.7.5
Description
TRBU
Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2
Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET
Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1
Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1
TRRETL2
TRRETL3
CBALARM
Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
Setting parameters
Table 165:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
Detection principle for

back-up trip
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Back-up trip mode
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
Operation mode of retrip logic
IP>
5 - 200
10
%IB
Operate phase
IBase
IN>
2 - 200
10
%IB
Operate residual
IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of re-trip
REL 670

315
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
Default
Unit
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Time delay of back-up

trip
t2MPh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Time delay of back-up

trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Trip pulse duration
Table 166:
Parameter
6.7.6
Range
Step
Description
Advanced parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
I>BlkCont
5 - 200
20
%IB
Current for blocking of

CB contact operation
in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
Additional time delay

to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay for CB

faulty signal
Technical data
Table 167:
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate phase current
(5-200)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, phase current
> 95%
Operate residual current
(2-200)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual current
> 95%
Phase current level for blocking of

contact function
(5-200)% of lbase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time for current detection
10 ms typically
Reset time for current detection
15 ms maximum
6.8
Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)
316

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Function block name: STB--
ANSI number: 50STB

STBPTOC
6.8.1
3I>STUB
Introduction
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector
is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be
outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not
be able to operate and must be blocked.
The stub protection covers the zone between the current transformers and the open
disconnector. The three phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a
NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
6.8.2
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS
value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the STB
function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current
value of the function I>. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current the
signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, in combination
with the release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer
of this function. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input. If
the fault current remains during the set timer delayt the function gives a trip signal.
REL 670

317
Section 6
Current protection
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION
BLOCK
AND
STIL1
TRIP
OR
STIL2
STIL3
RELEASE
en05000731.vsd
Figure 166:
6.8.3
Simplified logic diagram for the stub protection
Function block
STB1STBPTOC_50STB
I3P
BLOCK
BLKTR
RELEASE
TRIP
START
en05000678.vsd
Figure 167:
6.8.4
STB function block

Table 168:
Input signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Block of trip
RELEASE
Release of stub protection
Table 169:
Output signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block
Signal
318
Description
TRIP
Trip
START
General start

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
6.8.5
Setting parameters
Table 170:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function

Range
Unit
Description
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
ReleaseMode
Release
Continuous
Release
Release of stub
protection
I>
1 - 2500
200
%IB
Operate current level

in % of IBase
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function

Range
Step
0.000 - 60.000
Default
Unit
Description
0.000
Time delay
0.001
Technical data
Table 172:
Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)
Function
6.9
Default
Off
On
Table 171:
6.8.6
Step
Operation
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Definite time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Function block name: PDx--
ANSI number: 50PD

CCRPLD
REL 670

PD
319
Section 6
Current protection
6.9.1
Introduction
Single pole operated circuit breakers can due to electrical or mechanical failures end
up with the different poles in different positions (close-open). This can cause negative
and zero sequence currents which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can
cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct the positions. If the situation
consists the remote end can be intertripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.
The pole discordance function operates based on information from auxiliary contacts
of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical
phase current when required.
6.9.2
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated. This is shown
in figure 168
C.B.
poleDiscordance Signal from C.B.

en05000287.vsd
Figure 168:
Pole discordance external detection logic
This single binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance
of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED. This is shown in
figure 169
320

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
C.B.
poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.
poleThreeClosed from C.B.
+
poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.
poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
Figure 169:
Pole discordance signals for internal logic
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.
Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current
measurement. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current
values are fed to the PD (RPLD) function. The difference between the smallest and
the largest phase current is derived. If this difference is larger than a set ratio the trip
timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. The current based
pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly
in connection to breaker open or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with
a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based pole discordance
function is shown in figure 170.
REL 670

321
Section 6
Current protection
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL
Discordance
detection
AND
t
t
150 ms
TRIP
OR
PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD
t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en05000747.vsd
Figure 170:
Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function - contact and

current based
The pole discordance function is blocked if:
The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes)
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1
if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the autoreclosing function
is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input of the
terminal and this binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing
in progress from the external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discordance function is enabled, then two different criteria will generate
a trip signal TRIP:
322

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
6.9.2.1
Pole discordance signalling from the circuit breaker.

Unsymmetrical current detection.
Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole
discordance status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact
for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase
connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse
command TRIP is generated by the pole discordance function.
6.9.2.2
Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current detection is based on checking that:
any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
remaining two phases
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevelof the rated current
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time
delay t (0-60 s) if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has
received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms
limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discordance function is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can
be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field
(i.e. from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software
connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a
control function or a general trip from integrated protections).
REL 670

323
Section 6
Current protection
6.9.3
Function block
PD01CCRPLD_52PD
I3P
BLOCK
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL
TRIP
START
en06000275.vsd
Figure 171:
6.9.4
PD function block

Table 173:
Input signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKDBYAR
Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle
CLOSECMD
Close order to CB
OPENCMD
Open order to CB
EXTPDIND
Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN
Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL
Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN
Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL
Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN
Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL
Pole three closed indication from CB
Table 174:
Output signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip signal to CB
START
Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay
6.9.5
Setting parameters
324

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 175:
Basic parameter group settings for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function
Parameter
6.9.6
Range
Unit
Description
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Time delay between

trip condition and trip
signal
ContSel
Off
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
Off
Contact function
selection
CurrSel
Off
CB oper monitor
Continuous
monitor
Off
Current function
selection
CurrUnsymLevel
0 - 100
80
Unsym magn of
lowest phase current
compared to the
highest.
CurrRelLevel
0 - 100
10
%IB
Current magnitude for

release of the function
in % of IBase
Technical data
Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(0100)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir
Time delay
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Function block name:
ANSI number: 32
6.10.1
Default
Operation
Table 176:
6.10
Step
P><
Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
REL 670

325
Section 6
Current protection
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect
the generator itself.
Figure 172 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with
overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately
after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if
the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the
overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher
than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
Underpower Relay
Operate
Line
Overpower Relay
Operate
Line
Margin
Margin
Operating point
without
turbine torque
Operating point
without
turbine torque
en06000315.vsd
Figure 172:
6.10.2
Protection with underpower relay and overpower relay
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 173. The function has two stages with individual settings.
326

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle
S(angle)
S(angle) <
Power1
Trip1
Start1
S(angle) <
Power2
Trip2
Start2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
en06000438.vsd
Figure 173:
Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 177.
Table 177:
Complex power calculation
Set value: measureMode

L1, L2, L3
Arone
PosSeq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
Formula used for complex power calculation
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
REL 670

327
Section 6
Current protection
L2
L3
NegSeq
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U NegSeq I NegSeq *
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting
Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component
is smaller than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2)
signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two
stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages
also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)).
For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally
down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to
a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 *
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.
6.10.2.1
Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
328

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 95)
Where
S
is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.
6.10.2.2
Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 174.
% of Ir
Amplitude
compensation
-10
IAmpComp5
Measured
current
IAmpComp30
IAmpComp100
30
-10
Degrees
100
% of Ir
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
Angle
compensation
-10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of Ir
-10
en05000652.vsd
Figure 174:
REL 670
Calibration curves

329
Section 6
Current protection
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.
6.10.3
Function block
GUP1GUPPDUP_37
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
en07000027.vsd
Figure 175:
6.10.4
GUP function block

Table 178:
Input signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLOCK1
Block of stage 1
BLOCK2
Block of stage 2
Table 179:
Output signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Common trip signal
TRIP1
Trip of stage 1
TRIP2
Trip of stage 2
START
Common start
START1
Start of stage 1
START2
Start of stage 2
Active Power in MW
330

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Signal
6.10.5
Active power in % of SBASE
Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT
Reactive power in % of SBASE
Setting parameters
Table 180:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Current-Reference
(primary current A)
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Voltage-Reference
(primary voltage kV)
Mode
L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
Pos Seq
Selection of
measured current and
voltage
Table 181:
Parameter
REL 670
Description
PPERCENT
Basic parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
OpMode1
Off
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode 1
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
%SB
Power setting for

stage 1 in % of Sbase
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
0.060
Drop delay for stage 1
OpMode2
Off
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode 2
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
%SB
Power setting for

Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
DropDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
0.060

331
Section 6
Current protection
Table 182:
Advanced parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter
6.10.6
Range
Step
Default
Description
0.00 - 0.99
0.01
0.00
Low pass filter

coefficient for power
measurement, P and
Q
Hysteresis1
0.2 - 5.0
0.1
0.5
pu
Absolute hysteresis of
stage 1
Hysteresis2
0.2 - 5.0
0.1
0.5
pu
stage 2
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ir
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ur
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg
Angle calibration for

current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

Technical data
Table 183:
Directional underpower protection (PDUP)
Function
Power level
Range or value
(0.0500.0)% of Sbase
At low setting:
(0.5-2.0)% of Sbase
(2.0-10)% of Sbase
332
Unit
Accuracy
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
< 50% of set value
< 20% of set value
(-180.0180.0) degrees
2 degrees
Timers
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
6.11
Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Function block name: GOPx
ANSI number: 32
GOPPDOP
6.11.1
P><
Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect
the generator itself.
Figure 176 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with
overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately
after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if
the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the
overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher
than 1%.
REL 670

333
Section 6
Current protection
Underpower Relay
Operate
Line
Overpower Relay
Operate
Line
Margin
Margin
Operating point
without
turbine torque
Operating point
without
turbine torque
en06000315.vsd
Figure 176:
6.11.2
Reverse power protection with underpower relay and overpower

relay
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 177. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle
S(angle)
S(angle) >
Power1
Trip1
Start1
S(angle) >
Power2
Trip2
Start2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
en06000567.vsd
Figure 177:
Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 184.
334

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 184:
Complex power calculation

L1, L2, L3
Arone
PosSeq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting
Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component
is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2)
signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two
stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages
also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller
value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2)
REL 670

335
Section 6
Current protection
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 *
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.
6.11.2.1
Low pass filtering

to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 105)
Where
S
is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.
6.11.2.2

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
336

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
% of Ir
Amplitude
compensation
-10
IAmpComp5
Measured
current
IAmpComp30
IAmpComp100
30
% of Ir
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
-10
Degrees
100
Angle
compensation
-10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of Ir
-10
en05000652.vsd
Figure 178:
Calibration curves
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.
6.11.3
Function block
GOP1GOPPDOP_32
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
en07000028.vsd
Figure 179:
REL 670
GOP function block

337
Section 6
Current protection
6.11.4

Table 185:
Input signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLOCK1
Block of stage 1
BLOCK2
Block of stage 2
Table 186:
Output signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block
Signal
6.11.5
Common trip signal
TRIP1
Trip of stage 1
TRIP2
Trip of stage 2
START
Common start
START1
Start of stage 1
START2
Start of stage 2
Active Power in MW
PPERCENT
Active power in % of SBASE
Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT
Reactive power in % of SBASE
Setting parameters
Table 187:
Parameter
338
Description
TRIP
Basic general settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Default
Unit
IBase
Range
1 - 99999
3000
Current-Reference
(primary current A)
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Voltage-Reference
(primary voltage kV)
Mode
L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
Pos Seq
Selection of
voltage

Step
Description
REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 188:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
OpMode1
Off
OverPower
OverPower
Operation mode 1
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
120.0
%SB
Power setting for

Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
DropDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
0.060
OpMode2
Off
OverPower
OverPower
Operation mode 2
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
120.0
%SB
Power setting for

Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
DropDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
0.060
Table 189:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Step
Default
Range
0.00 - 0.99
0.01
0.00
Unit
-
Description
Low pass filter
measurement, P and
Q
Hysteresis1
0.2 - 5.0
0.1
0.5
pu
Hysteresis2
0.2 - 5.0
0.1
0.5
pu
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ir
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ur
REL 670

339
Section 6
Current protection
Parameter
6.11.6
Range
Step
Default
Description
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

Technical data
Table 190:
Directional overpower protection (PDOP)
Function
Range or value
Power level
(0.0500.0)% of Sbase
At low setting:
(0.5-2.0)% of Sbase
(2.0-10)% of Sbase
6.12
Unit
IAngComp5
Accuracy
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
< 50% of set value
< 20% of set value
(-180.0180.0) degrees
2 degrees
Timers
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Function block name: BRC
ANSI number: 46
BRCPTOC
6.12.1
Introduction
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. The
broken conductor monitoring function (BRC), consisting of continuous current
unsymmetry check on the line where the terminal is connected will give alarm or trip
at detecting broken conductors.
6.12.2
The BRCPTOC function detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the
unsymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements
continuously measure the three-phase currents.
The current unsymmetry signal output START is set on if :
340

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest
phase current
The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>
The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines.
If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line the parallel line will experience an
increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions
being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set
time tOper the TRIP output is activated.
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 180
The function is disabled (blocked) if:
The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test
menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions.
The output trip signal TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to
the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
REL 670

341
Section 6
Current protection
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockBRC = Yes
BRC--START
>1
BRC--BLOCK
Function Enable
&
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
t
t
BRC--TRIP
STI
IL1<50%IP>
1
IL2<50%IP>
IL3<50%IP>
en07000122.vsd
Figure 180:
6.12.3
Simplified logic diagram for broken conductor check function.
Function block
BRC1BRCPTOC_46
I3P
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
START
en07000034.vsd
Figure 181:
6.12.4
BRC function block

Table 191:
Input signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block
Signal
342
Description
I3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Blocks the operate output

REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
Table 192:
Output signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block
Signal
6.12.5
TRIP
Operate signal of the protection logic
START
Start signal of the protection logic
Setting parameters
Table 193:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function

Range
Default
Unit
Description
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
0 - 99999
3000
IBase
Iub>
50 - 90
50
%IM
Unbalance current
operation value in
percent of max
current
IP>
5 - 100
20
%IB
Minimum phase
current for operation
of Iub> in % of Ibase
tOper
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Operate time delay
Parameter
tReset
Advanced parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function

Range
Step
0.010 - 60.000
Default
Unit
0.100
0.001
Description
Time delay in reset
Technical data
Table 195:
Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)
Function
REL 670
Step
Operation
Table 194:
6.12.6
Description
Range or value
Accuracy
Minimum phase current for

operation
(5100)% of Ibase
0.1% of Ir
Unbalance current operation
(0100)% of maximum current
0.1% of Ir
Timers
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms

343
344
Section 7
Voltage protection
Section 7
Voltage protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions
work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical
data are included for each function.
7.1
Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: TUVx-
ANSI number: 27
UV2PTUV
7.1.1
3U<
Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
The function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at
power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection.
The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
7.1.2
The two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) is used to detect low power
system voltage. The function has two voltage measuring steps with separate time
delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a
corresponding start signal is issued. TUV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of
three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being
below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment,
a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower
than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either
definite time delay or inverse time delay.
REL 670

345
Section 7
Voltage protection
The undervoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth

fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or
phase to phase RMS value. The choise of the measuring is done by the parameter
ConnType in PST or LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The voltage
related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set i kV phase-phase
voltage This means operation for phase to earth voltage under:
U < (%) UBase( kV )

3
(Equation 106)
and operation for phase to phase voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV)
7.1.2.1
(Equation 107)
Measurement principle
All the three phase to earth voltages are measured continuously, and compared with
the set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out
of 3" phases have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding start signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
7.1.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, and a programmable inverse curve.
The type A curve is described as:
t=
k
U < -U
U<
(Equation 108)
The type B curve is described as:
t=
k 480
U < -U
- 0.5
32
U<
2.0
+ 0.055
(Equation 109)
The programmable curve can be created as:
346

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
kA
+D
t=
p
U < -U

-C
B
U<

(Equation 110)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
(Equation 111)
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details
of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the
inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the
undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 182 and figure 183.
REL 670

347
Section 7
Voltage protection
Voltage
START
Hysteresis
tReset
1
tReset
1
Measured
Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Froozen Timer
t1
Instantaneous
Reset
Figure 182:
348
Time
Linear Decrease
en05000010.vsd
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
tReset1
Voltage
tReset1
START
START
Hysteresis
Measured Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time Integrator
Froozen Timer
t1
Time
Instantaneous
Reset
Figure 183:
7.1.2.3
Linear Decrease
en05000011.vsd
Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
Blocking
The undervoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
or by parameter settings, where:
REL 670

349
Section 7
Voltage protection
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1:
blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2:
BLKST2:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the start outputs of step 1, are blocked. The
characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking
can also be set to "off" resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings
and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get
very low. The event will start both the under voltage function and the blocking
function, as seen in figure 184. The delay of the blocking function must be set less
than the time delay of under voltage function.
Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
Figure 184:
350
Blocking function.

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.1.2.4
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral
voltages or the three phase to phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or RMS filters
based on one fundamental cycle filter the input voltage signals. The voltages are
individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse
time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3",
"2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the
TimeUnderVoltage function is schematically described in figure 185.
UL1
Comparator
UL1 < U1<
UL2
Comparator
UL2 < U1<
UL3
Comparator
UL3 < U1<
ST1L1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
Phase 1
ST1L2
Phase 2
Phase 3
START
MinVoltSelect
or
Time integrator
t1
tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
ST1L3
ST1
OR
TR1L1
Step 1
TR1L2
TRIP
TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator
UL1 < U2<
Comparator
UL2 < U2<
Comparator
UL3 < U2<
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
Time integrator
t2
tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
ST2L2
Phase 2
Phase 3
START
MinVoltSelect
or
ST2L1
Phase 1
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
ST2L3
ST2
OR
TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
TRIP
TR2L3
TR2
OR
OR START
OR
TRIP
en05000012.vsd
Figure 185:
REL 670
Schematic design of the TUV function

351
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.1.3
Function block
TUV1UV2PTUV_27
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
TRIP
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
en06000276.vsd
Figure 186:
7.1.4
TUV function block

Table 196:
Input signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
Three phase voltages
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR1
Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
Block of step 2
Table 197:
Output signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
352

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Signal
7.1.5
Description
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Setting parameters
Table 198:
Parameter
ConnType
Table 199:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range
PhN DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
Step
-
Default
PhN DFT
Unit
-
Description
Group selector for
connection type
Basic parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
OperationStep1
Off
On
On
Enable execution of
step 1
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases
2 of 3, 3 of 3) from
step 1
U1<
1 - 100
70
%UB
Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00

of step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1
0.05
0.01
0.05 - 1.10

step 1
REL 670

353
Section 7
Voltage protection
Parameter
354
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IntBlkSel1
Off
Block of trip
Block all
Off
Internal (low level)

blocking mode, step 1
IntBlkStVal1
1 - 100
20
%UB
Voltage setting for

internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of internal

(low level) blocking for
step 1
HystAbs1
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2
Off
On
On
Enable execution of
step 2
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
step 2
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases
step 2
U2<
1 - 100
50
%UB
of UBase, step 2
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

of step 2
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2
0.05
0.01
0.05 - 1.10

step 2
IntBlkSel2
Off
Block of trip
Block all
Off
Internal (low level)

blocking mode, step 2
IntBlkStVal2
1 - 100
20
%UB
Voltage setting for

internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of internal

(low level) blocking for
step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
% of UBase, step 2

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Table 200:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in IDMT

reset (s), step 1
ACrv1
1.000
0.001
0.005 - 200.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1
1.00
0.01
0.50 - 100.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1
0.0
0.1
0.0 - 1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
DCrv1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 60.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
PCrv1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 3.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CrvSat1
0 - 100
Tuning param for

prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in IDMT

reset (s), step 2
ACrv2
1.000
0.001
0.005 - 200.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
BCrv2
1.00
0.01
0.50 - 100.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CCrv2
0.0
0.1
0.0 - 1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
REL 670

355
Section 7
Voltage protection
Parameter
7.1.6
7.2
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DCrv2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 60.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
PCrv2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 3.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100
Tuning param for

prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2
Technical data
Table 201:
Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and high

step
(1100)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis
(0100)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Internal blocking level, low and

high step
(1100)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Inverse time characteristics for

low and high step, see table 590
See table 590
Definite time delays
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate time, inverse

characteristics
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Function block name: TOVx-
ANSI number: 59
OV2PTOV
356

3U>
REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.2.1
Introduction
Overvoltages will occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines.
The function can be used as open line end detector, normally then combined with
directional reactive over-power function or as system voltage supervision, normally
then giving alarm only or switching in reactors or switch out capacitor banks to control
the voltage.
The function has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
The overvoltage function has an extremely high reset ratio to allow setting close to
system service voltage.
7.2.2
The two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) is used to detect high power
system voltage. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If one, two or
three phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding start signal is
issued. TOV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three",
or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the
voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is
individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse
time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.
The overvoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth fundamental
value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase
RMS value. The choise of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or
LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The setting of the analog inputs
are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage.
The function will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set
base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage over:
U > (%) UBase( kV )

3
(Equation 112)
and operation for phase for phase voltage over:

U > (%) UBase(kV)
Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV)
REL 670

(Equation 113)
357
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.2.2.1
All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out
of 3" phases have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding start signal.
7.2.2.2
Time delay
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve.
t=
TD
V - Vpickup
Vpickup
(Equation 114)
t=
k 480
U -U >
- 0.5
32
U>
2.0
- 0.035
(Equation 115)
The type C curve is described as:
t=
t=
k 480
U -U >
- 0.5
32
U>
3.0
- 0.035
TD 480
3.0
V - Vpickup
32 Vpickup - 0.5 - 0.035
(Equation 116)
t=
358
kA
U -U >
-C
B
U>
+D

(Equation 117)
REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
(Equation 118)
The highest phase (or phase to phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 187. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
Time
en05000016.vsd
Figure 187:
Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time
mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse
time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2)
to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It is also remarkable that for the
overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
REL 670

359
Section 7
Voltage protection
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..
7.2.2.3
Blocking
The overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
where:
7.2.2.4
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
BLKST1:
BLKTR2:
BLKST2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth
voltages or the three phase to phasel voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input
voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and
the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special
logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to
fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeOverVoltage function is
schematically described in figure 188.
360

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
UL1
Comparator
UL1 > U1>
UL2
Comparator
UL2 > U1>
UL3
Comparator
UL3 > U1>
ST1L1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
Phase 1
ST1L2
Phase 2
Phase 3
START
MaxVoltSelect
or
Time integrator
t1
tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
ST1L3
ST1
OR
TR1L1
Step 1
TR1L2
TRIP
TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator
UL1 > U2>
Comparator
UL2 > U2>
Comparator
UL3 > U2>
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
Time integrator
t2
tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
ST2L2
Phase 2
Phase 3
START
MaxVoltSelect
or
ST2L1
Phase 1
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
ST2L3
ST2
OR
TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
TRIP
TR2L3
TR2
OR
OR
OR
START
TRIP
en05000013.vsd
Figure 188:
REL 670
Schematic design of the TimeOverVoltage function

361
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.2.3
Function block
TOV1OV2PTOV_59
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
TRIP
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
en06000277.vsd
Figure 189:
7.2.4
TOV function block

Table 202:
Input signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
Group signal for three phase voltage input
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR1
BLKST1
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
Block of step 2
Table 203:
Output signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
362

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Signal
7.2.5
Description
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Setting parameters
Table 204:
Parameter
ConnType
Table 205:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range
PhG
PhPh
PhG RMS
PhPh RMS
Step
-
Default
PhG
Unit
-
Description
TBD
Basic parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
OperationStep1
Off
On
On
Enable execution of
step 1
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases
step 1
U1>
1 - 200
120
%UB
of UBase, step 1
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00

of step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

step 1
REL 670

363
Section 7
Voltage protection
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
HystAbs1
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
% of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2
Off
On
On
Enable execution of
step 2
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
step 2
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases
step 2
U2>
1 - 200
150
%UB
of UBase, step 2
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

of step 2
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
% of UBase, step 2
Table 206:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Default
Unit
tReset1
Range
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
0.025
Description
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in IDMT

reset (s), step 1
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
364

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CrvSat1
0 - 100
Tuning param for

prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in IDMT

reset (s), step 2
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100
Tuning param for

prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2
7.2.6
Technical data
REL 670

365
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.3
Table 207:
Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Function
Range or value

step
(1-200)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur at U < Ur
1.0% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis
(0100)% of Ubase
1.0% of U at U > Ur

See table 591
Definite time delays
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate time, Inverse

characteristics
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Two step residual overvoltage protection

(PTOV, 59N)
Function block name: TRVxANSI number: 59N
ROV2PTOV
7.3.1
Accuracy
3U0
Introduction
Residual voltages will occur in the power system during earth faults.
The function can be configured to calculate the residual voltage from the three phase
voltage input transformers or from a single phase voltage input transformer fed from
an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer.
The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delayed.
7.3.2
The two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) is used to detect high
single-phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual
voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power
transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings
are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase
366

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
voltages and internally in the protection terminal calculate the corresponding residual
voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to the TRV function block. The
function has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay,
the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually
chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.
7.3.2.1
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.
7.3.2.2
Time delay
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve.
t=
TD
V - Vpickup
Vpickup
(Equation 119)
t=
k 480
U -U >
- 0.5
32
U>
2.0
- 0.035
(Equation 120)
The type C curve is described as:
t=
k 480
U -U >
- 0.5
32
U>
3.0
- 0.035
(Equation 121)
REL 670

367
Section 7
Voltage protection
t=
t=
kA
U -U >
-C
B
U>
TD A
V - Vpickup
-C
B
Vpickup
+D
+D
(Equation 122)
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> *(1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
(Equation 123)
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in chapter "Inverse
characteristics".
Trip signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the
inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time
has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the
IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during
the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer
is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 190 and figure 191.
368

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
tReset
1
tReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
Hysteresis
Measured
Voltage
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Linear Decrease
Froozen Timer
t1
Instantaneous
Reset
Figure 190:
REL 670
Time
en05000019.vsd
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

369
Section 7
Voltage protection
tReset1
Voltage
START
START
tReset1
Hysteresis
TRIP
U1>
Measured Voltage
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time Integrator
Froozen Timer
t1
Time
Instantaneous
Reset
Figure 191:
7.3.2.3
Linear Decrease
en05000020.vsd
Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
Blocking
The residual overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input
signals where:
370

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.3.2.4
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
BLKST1:
blocks all startrip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2:
BLKST2:
blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.
Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of the TRV function is schematically described in
figure 192.
UN
Comparator
UN > U1>
TR1
START
Time integrator
t1
tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Comparator
UN > U2>
TRIP
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 1
ST2
Phase 1
TR2
START
Time integrator
t2
tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
ST1
Phase 1
TRIP
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
OR
Step 2
OR
START
TRIP
en05000748.vsd
Figure 192:
REL 670
Schematic design of the TRV function

371
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.3.3
Function block
TRV1ROV2PTOV_59N
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
TRIP
TR1
TR2
START
ST1
ST2
en06000278.vsd
Figure 193:
7.3.4
TRV function block

Table 208:
Input signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
Three phase voltages
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR1
BLKST1
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
Block of step 2
Table 209:
Output signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip
TR1
TR2
START
ST1
ST2
7.3.5
Setting parameters
372

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Table 210:
Parameter
REL 670
Basic parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
OperationStep1
Off
On
On
Enable execution of
step 1
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
step 1
U1>
1 - 200
30
%UB
val (DT & IDMT), step
1 in % of UBase
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00

of step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

step 1
HystAbs1
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
% of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2
Off
On
On
Enable execution of
step 2
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
step 2
U2>
1 - 100
45
%UB
val (DT & IDMT), step
2 in % of UBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

of step 2
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
% of UBase, step 2

373
Section 7
Voltage protection
Table 211:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in IDMT

reset (s), step 1
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CrvSat1
0 - 100
Tuning param for

prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in DT
reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in IDMT

reset (s), step 2
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
374

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Parameter
7.3.6
Range
Default
Unit
Description
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100
Tuning param for

prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2
Technical data
Table 212:
Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)
Function
7.4
Step
DCrv2
Range or value
Accuracy

step
(1-200)% of Ubase
1.0% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis
(0100)% of Ubase
1.0% of U at U > Ur

See table 592
Definite time setting
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Function block name: OEXx-
ANSI number: 24
OEXPVPH
REL 670

U/f >
375
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.4.1
Introduction
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated
components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent
parts in a relatively short time. Function has settable inverse operating curve and
independent alarm stage.
7.4.2
The importance of overexcitation protection is growing as the power transformers as
well as other power system elements today operate most of the time near their
designated limits.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if
emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend
an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with
below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a unit is on load, but are
more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence.
Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience
overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see
equation 124, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage
E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n B max A
(Equation 124)
The relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is therefore according to equation 125.

V
Ef
M = relative ------- = -----------------------Hz
( Ur ) ( fr )
(Equation 125)
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If

the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9
Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core only but will extend into
other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to Eddy current
circulations. Overexcitation will result in:
376
overheating of the non-laminated metal parts,

a large increase in magnetizing currents,
an increase in core and winding temperature,
an increase in transformer vibration and noise.

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative Volts per

Hertz (V / Hz) ratio. The action of the protection is usually to initiate a reduction of
excitation and, if this should fail, or is not possible, to trip the transformer after a
delay which can be from seconds to minutes, typically 5 - 10 seconds.
Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected
generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected
to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine.
In such cases, the overexcitation protection may trip the field breaker during a startup of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal from the transformer
terminal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the
source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal.
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers shall be capable of operating
continuously at 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load,
the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not
exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a
sustained basis, see equation 126.
E
--------- 1.1 Ur
fr
f
(Equation 126)
or equivalently, with 1.1 Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 127.

V/Hz>
E
---- --------------------fr
f
(Equation 127)
where:
V/Hz>
is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
V/Hz> is an OEX setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 150%. If the user
does not know exactly what to set, then the standard IEC 60076 - 1, section 4.4, the
default value V/Hz> = 1.10 pu shall be used.
In OEX protection function the relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is expressed
according to equation 128.
Ef
V
M = relative ------- = -------------Ur fr
Hz
(Equation 128)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for
any E and f, where the ratio E / f is equal to Ur / fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %.
The relative overexcitation is thus defined as shown in equation 129.
overexcitation = M V/Hz>
REL 670

(Equation 129)
377
Section 7
Voltage protection
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in

general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no
load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer
the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is
measured and fed to OEX, depending on the direction of the power flow through the
power transformer, the power transformer side where OEX is applied, and the power
transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify on the OEX
function block in CAP 531 configuration tool worksheet on which side of the power
transformer OEX is placed
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load,
0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer
core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated
frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided
between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc /
2 = 0.075 pu..
OEX calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEX is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for 2-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a 2-winding power transformer the leakage
reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core
with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the
situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance,
then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2. The
OEX protection will then take the given measured terminal voltage U, as the induced
voltage E.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such
as loss of load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-earth voltage does not
mean overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single-phase-toearth fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases to earth, but no
overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially
unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each
winding.
7.4.2.1
Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where OEX protection is
applied, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure this voltage,
MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that
must be used.This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI is set to
same value!
If, for example, voltage Uab is fed to OEX, then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied,
etc. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the
378

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
OEX protection algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of
the rated value, otherwise the OEX protection algorithm is exited without calculating
the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation
V / Hz shows 0.000.
If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where OEX is connected,
then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage.
In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used
by OEX protection. A check is made within OEX protection if the positive sequence
voltage is higher than 70% rated phase-to-earth voltage; below this value, OEX is
exited immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and
the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000.
The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in
operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 and
60 Hz respectively.
OEX protection function can be connected to any power transformer side,

independent from the power flow.
The side with a possible On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC) must not be used.
7.4.2.2
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.

The operate time of the overexcitation protection is a function of the relative
overexcitation. Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose
between:
the so called IEEE law, and

a tailor-made law.
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match well a transformer core capability.
The square law is according to equation 130.
0.18 k
0.18 k
t o p = --------------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------2
2
overexcitation
( M V/Hz> )
(Equation 130)
where:
REL 670
is excitation, mean value in the interval from t = 0 to t = top
V/Hz>
is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
is time multiplier setting for inverse time functions, see figure 195.
Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

379
Section 7
Voltage protection
An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 131.
t op
( M(t) V/Hz> )
dt 0.18 k
(Equation 131)
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (i.e. j = n) where it becomes
true that:
n
Dt
( M(j)
V/Hz> ) 0.18 k
j=k
(Equation 132)
where:
is the time interval between two successive executions of overexcitation function and
Dt
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given
as Ur/fr.
As long as M > V/Hz> (i.e. overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be
larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be
tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 195, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 194.
delay in s
tMax
under excitation
inverse delay law
overexcitation
tMin
0
Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>

Mmax
M=V/Hz>
V/Hz>
Emax
Excitation M
E (only if f = fr = const)
99001067.vsd
Figure 194:
Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax, and tMin
A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees
of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the
inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEX trips after tMaxt_MaxTripDelay seconds.
380

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees
of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEX function trips
after tMint_MinTripDelay seconds. Also, the inverse delay law is no more valid
beyond excitation Mmax. Beyond Mmax (beyond overexcitation Mmax - V/Hz>),
the delay will always be tMin, no matter what overexcitation.
IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES
Time (s)
1000
100
k = 60
k = 20
k = 10
k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5
10
k=4
k=3
k=2
k=1
1
10
20
OVEREXCITATION IN %
30
40
(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd
Figure 195:
Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation.
The critical value of excitation Mmax is determined indirectly via OEX protection
function setting V/Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency
voltage, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If,
for example, V/Hz>> = 140 %, then Mmax is according to equation 133.
(V/Hz>>) f
- = 1.40
Mmax = ------------------------Ur fr
(Equation 133)
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this
case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into
REL 670

381
Section 7
Voltage protection
five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6) as shown in
the figure 196. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
delay in s
tMax
tMin
underexcitation
Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0
Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M

Mmax
Emaxcont
99001068.vsd
Figure 196:
An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear
interpolation.
Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.
7.4.2.3
Cooling
The overexcitation protection OEX is basically a thermal protection; therefore a
cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied.
Parameter Tcool is an OEX setting, with a default time constant tCooling of 20
minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal
values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached
not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an overexcitation condition
would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.
7.4.2.4
OEX protection function measurands

A service value data item called Time to trip, and designated on the display by tTRIP
is available in seconds on the local HMI, or monitoring tool. This value is an
estimation of the remaining time to trip if the overexcitation remained on the level it
had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful with small or
moderate overexcitations. If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is
tMax, then the estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against tMax.
The displayed relative excitation M, designated on the display by V/Hz is calculated
from the expression:
V
Ef
M = relative ------- = ------------- Hz
Uf fr
382

(Equation 134)
REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
If less than V / Hz = V/Hz> (in pu) is shown on the HMI display (or read via SM/
RET521), the power transformer is underexcited. If the value of V/Hz is shown which
is equal to V/Hz> (in pu), it means that the excitation is exactly equal to the power
transformer continuous capability. If a value higher than the value of V/Hz> is shown,
the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if V/Hz = 1.100 is
shown, while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum
continuous excitation limit.
The third item of the OEX protection service report is the thermal status of the
protected power transformer iron core, designated on the display by ThermalStatus.
This gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%.
Thermal Status should reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds.
If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, the
ThermalStaus shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or TMin,
then the Thermal Status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP
reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long
delay is limited by tMax, then the OEX TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the
Thermal status reaches 100%.
7.4.2.5
Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. The voltages are
normally set 2% lower and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the
operator an early abnormal voltages warning.
OVEX: FS = 1 = 2*SI + SU
BLOCK
AlarmLevel
SIDE
Prepool I
SI1
t
V/Hz>
Prepool O
SU1
2
Calculation
of internal
induced
voltage Ei
Ei
M=
(Ei / f)
(Ur / fr)
ALARM
t>tMin
&
TRIP
tMin
k
&
tAlarm
M>V/Hz>
SI2
t>tAlarm
IEEE law
M
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>>
tMax
Xleak
ERROR
V/Hz>>
M = relative V/Hz as service value
en05000162.vsd
Figure 197:
REL 670
A logic diagram over Overexcitation protection function.

383
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.4.2.6
Logic diagram
Figure 198:
A simplified diagram of the OEX protection function
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.
7.4.3
Function block
OEX1OEXPVPH_24
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
RESET
TRIP
START
ALARM
en05000329.vs
d
Figure 199:
7.4.4
OEX function block

Table 213:
Input signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block
Signal
384
Description
I3P
Current connection
U3P
Voltage connection
BLOCK
Block of function
RESET
Reset operation

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Table 214:
Output signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block
Signal
7.4.5
Description
TRIP
Trip from overexcitation function
START
Overexcitation above set operate level (instantaneous)
ALARM
Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)
Setting parameters
Table 215:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MeasuredU
PosSeq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1L2
Selection of
measured voltage
MeasuredI
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
L1L2
Selection of
measured current
Table 216:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current (rated

phase current) in A
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage (main

voltage) in kV
V/Hz>
100.0 - 180.0
0.1
110.0
%UB/f
Operate level of V/Hz

at no load and rated
freq in % of (Ubase/
frated)
V/Hz>>
100.0 - 200.0
0.1
140.0
%UB/f
High level of V/Hz

above which tMin is
used, in % of (Ubase/
frated)
XLeak
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
ohm
Winding leakage
reactance in primary
ohms
TrPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Length of the pulse for

trip signal (in sec)
tMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
Minimum trip delay for

V/Hz inverse curve, in
sec
tMax
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
Maximum trip delay

for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
REL 670

385
Section 7
Voltage protection
Parameter
Range
Default
Unit
Description
0.10 - 9000.00
0.01
1200.00
Transformer
magnetic core cooling
time constant, in sec
CurveType
IEEE
Tailor made
IEEE
Inverse time curve

selection, IEEE/Tailor
made
kForIEEE
1 - 60
Time multiplier for

IEEE inverse type
curve
AlarmLevel
50.0 - 120.0
0.1
100.0
Alarm operate level

as % of operate level
tAlarm
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
5.00
Alarm time delay, in

sec
Table 217:
Advanced parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter
7.4.6
Step
tCooling
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
t1Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
7200.00
Time delay t1
(longest) for tailor
made curve, in sec
t2Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
3600.00
Time delay t2 for tailor

made curve, in sec
t3Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00

made curve, in sec
t4Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
900.00

made curve, in sec
t5Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
450.00

made curve, in sec
t6Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
225.00
Time delay t6
(shortest) for tailor
made curve, in sec
Technical data
Table 218:
Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value, start
(100180)% of (Ubase/frated)
1.0% of U
Operate value, alarm
(50120)% of start level
1.0% of Ur at U Ur
1.0% of U at U > Ur
Operate value, high level
(100200)% of (Ubase/frated)
1.0% of U
386

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Function
Curve type
Range or value
Accuracy
IEEE or customer defined
IEEE : t =
Class 5 + 40 ms
(0.18 k )
( M - 1) 2
where M = relative (V/Hz) = (E/f)/

(Ur/fr)
7.5
Minimum time delay for inverse

function
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Maximum time delay for inverse

function
(0.009000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
Alarm time delay
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Function block name: VDC
ANSI number: 60
VDCPTOV
7.5.1
Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from
two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one
trip step. It can be used to supervise the voltage from two fuse groups or two different
voltage transformers fuses as a fuse/MCB supervision function.
7.5.2
The function is based on comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected
in each phase. Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive
voltage transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx The
voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip level
UDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after
definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies
are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The outputs for
loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage is supervised
for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three
phases.
Loss of one U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow=No.
REL 670

387
Section 7
Voltage protection
The function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input.
It can e.g. be activated from a fuse failure supervision function block.
To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service
value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance
in normal service.
The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 200.
UDTripL1>
AND
UDTripL1>
AND
UDTripL1>
O
R
tReset tTrip
t
t
AND
AND
AND
UDAlarmL1>
TRIP
START
AND
UDAlarmL1>
AND
UDAlarmL1>
O
R
tAlarm
AND
ALARM
AND
U1LOW
AND
U1<L1
OR
U1<L2
tAlarm
t
AND
U1<L3
OR
BlkDiffAtULow
U2<L1
AND
U2<L2
t1
t
AND
U2LOW
U2<L3
BLOCK
en06000382.vsd
Figure 200:
7.5.3
Principle logic for voltage differential function
Function block
VDC1VDCPTOV_60
U3P1
U3P2
BLOCK
TRIP
START
ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF
en06000528.vsd
Figure 201:
388
VDC function block

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
7.5.4

Table 219:
Input signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P1
Bus voltage
U3P2
Capacitor voltage
BLOCK
Block of function
Table 220:
Output signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block
Signal
7.5.5
Description
TRIP
Voltage differential protection operated
START
Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM
Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW
Loss of U1 voltage
U2LOW
Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF
Differential Voltage phase L1
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF
Setting parameters
Table 221:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
UBase
0.50 - 2000.00
0.01
400.00
kV
Base Voltage
BlkDiffAtULow
No
Yes
Yes
Block operation at low

voltage
UDTrip
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
5.0
%UB
Operate level, in % of
UBase
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay for voltage

differential operate, in
milliseconds
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

differential reset, in
seconds
U1Low
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
70.0
%UB
Input 1 undervoltage
level, in % of UBase
U2Low
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
70.0
%UB
Input 2 undervoltage
level, in % of UBase
REL 670

389
Section 7
Voltage protection
Parameter
Default
Unit
tBlock
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time for

undervoltage block
UDAlarm
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
2.0
%UB
Alarm level, in % of
UBase
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000

differential alarm, in
seconds
Table 222:
Range
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
RFL1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Ratio compensation
factor phase L1
UCap*RFL1=UL1Bus
RFL2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Ratio compensation
factor phase L2
UCap*RFL2=UL2Bus
RFL3
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Ratio compensation
factor phase L3
UCap*RFL3=UL3Bus
Technical data
Table 223:
Voltage differential protection (PTOV)
Function
7.6
Description
Advanced parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function
Parameter
7.5.6
Step
Range or value
Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and

trip
(0.0100.0) % of Ubase
0.5 % of Ur
Under voltage level
(0.0100.0) % of Ubase
0.5% of Ur
Timers
(0.00060.000)s
0.5% 10 ms
Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: LOV
ANSI number: 27
LOVPTUV
7.6.1
Introduction
The loss of voltage detection, (PTUV, 27), is suitable for use in networks with an
automatic System restoration function. The function issues a three-pole trip command
390

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time
longer the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.
7.6.2
The operation of LOVPTUV function is based on line voltage measurement. The
function is provided with a logic, which automatically recognises if the line was
restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are
required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. Start is available on output
START.
Additionally, the function is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages
have been detected low for more than tBlock.
The LOVPTUV function operates again only if the line has been restored to full
voltage for at least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure
and open circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs
of the function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length
set by setting tPulse.
The operation of the function is supervised by the fuse-failure function (VTSU input)
and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit
breaker.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to
internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. The function is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (BlockLOV=Yes).
REL 670

391
Section 7
Voltage protection
LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockLOV = Yes
LOV--BLOCK
LOV-START
>1
Function Enable
tTrip
&
STUL1N
tPulse
LOVTRIP
&
STUL2N
only 1 or 2 phases are low for

at least 10 s (not three)
Latched
Enable
STUL3N
&
tBlock
>1
LOV--CBOPEN
Reset Enable
>1
&
LOV--VTSU
>1
tRestore
t
Set Enable
>1
Line restored for

at least 3 s
en07000089.vsd
Figure 202:
7.6.3
Simplified diagram of loss of voltage check protection function
Function block
LOV1LOVPTUV_27
U3P
BLOCK
CBOPEN
VTSU
TRIP
START
en07000039.vsd
Figure 203:
LOV function block
7.6.4
392

REL 670
Section 7
Voltage protection
Table 224:
Input signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block
Signal
U3P
Voltage connection
BLOCK
Block the all outputs
CBOPEN
Circuit breaker open
VTSU
Block from voltage circuit supervision
Table 225:
7.6.5
Description
Output signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip signal
START
Start signal
Setting parameters
Table 226:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
UBase
0.1 - 9999.9
0.1
400.0
kV
Base voltage
UPE
1 - 100
70
%UB
Operate voltagein%
of base voltage
Ubase
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
Operate time delay
Table 227:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function

Default
Unit
tPulse
Range
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Duration of TRIP
pulse
tBlock
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay to block

when all 3ph voltages
are not low
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Time delay for enable

the function after
restoration
7.6.6
Technical data
REL 670

Step
Description
393
Section 7
Voltage protection
Table 228:
Function
394
Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage
(0100)% of Ubase
0.5% of Ur
Pulse timer
(0.05060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Timer
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

REL 670
Section 8
Frequency protection
Section 8
About this chapter
This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions
work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical
data are included for each function.
8.1
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Function block name: TUFx-
ANSI number: 81
SAPTUF
8.1.1
f<
Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network.
The function can be used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas
turbine start-up etc.
The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based
on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.
Up to two independent under frequency steps are available.
8.1.2
The underfrequency (TUF) function is used to detect low power system frequency.
The function can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent
time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied the time delay
will be longer if the voltage is higher and shorter if the voltage is lower. If the
frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to
uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled
blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking
voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.
REL 670

395
Section 8
8.1.2.1
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously,
and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also
dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting
IntBlkStVal, the underfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is
issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should
be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.
8.1.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the underfrequency function can be either a settable definite time
delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on
the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage
level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tTrip sets the
time delay
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 204
and equation 136. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time
delay to apply. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the
start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset
time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here
it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.
On the output of the underfrequency function a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time
delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency
returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
8.1.2.3
Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to
make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 136. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar
396

REL 670
Section 8
way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage
functions.
U - UMin
t=
UNom - UMin
Exponent
( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
(Equation 136)
where:
t
is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
is the measured voltage
Exponent
is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to

tMax, tMin
are time settings.
The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 204, for:

UMin
= 90%
UNom
= 100%
tMax
= 1.0 s
tMin
= 0.0 s
Exponent
= 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
TimeDlyOperate [s]
0
Exponenent
1
2
3
0.5
90
95
100
U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
Figure 204:
8.1.2.4
Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for the

underfrequency function. The time delay to operate is plotted as a
function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively.
Blocking
The underfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input
signals or by parameter settings, where:
REL 670

397
Section 8
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP:
blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST:
blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the
start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.1.2.5
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the
positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time
integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage
dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of
RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore.
The design of the underfrequency function is schematically described in figure 205.
Block
OR
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Frequency
Time integrator
Comparator
f < StartFrequency
TimerOperation Mode
Selector
START
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
START
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
100 ms
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
TimeDlyRestore
RESTORE
en05000726.vsd
Figure 205:
398
Schematic design of the underfrequency function

REL 670
Section 8
8.1.3
Function block
TUF1SAPTUF_81
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST
TRIP
START
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
Frequency
en06000279.vsd
Figure 206:
8.1.4
TUF function block

Table 229:
Input signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
Voltage connection
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTRIP
Blocking operate output.
BLKREST
Blocking restore output.
Table 230:
Output signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block
Signal
8.1.5
Description
TRIP
Operate/trip signal for frequency.
START
Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
RESTORE
Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN
Blocking indication due to low amplitude.
Frequency
Measured frequency
Setting parameters
Table 231:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
StartFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
0.01
48.80
Hz
Frequency setting/
start value.
IntBlockLevel
0 - 100
50
%UB
Internal blocking level

in % of UBase.
REL 670

399
Section 8
Parameter
8.1.6
Default
Unit
TimeDlyOperate
Range
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
0.200
Description
Operate time delay in
over/under-frequency
mode.
TimeDlyReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for reset.
TimeDlyRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Restore time delay.
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
0.01
50.10
Hz
Restore frequency if
frequency is above
frequency value.
TimerOperation
Definite timer
Volt based timer
Definite timer
Setting for choosing

timer mode.
UNom
50 - 150
100
%UB
Nominal voltage in %
of UBase for voltage
based timer.
UMin
50 - 150
90
%UB
Lower operation limit

in % of UBase for
voltage based timer.
Exponent
1.0
0.1
0.0 - 5.0
For calculation of the

curve form for voltage
based timer.
tMax
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum time
operation limit for
tMin
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Minimum time
operation limit for
Technical data
Table 232:
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value, start function
(35.00-75.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
100 ms typically
100 ms typically
Operate time, definite time function
(0.000-60.000)s
0.5% + 10
ms
Reset time, definite time function
(0.000-60.000)s
0.5% + 10
ms
Voltage dependent time delay
Settings:
UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase
Exponent=0.0-5.0
tMax=(0.000-60.000)s
tMin=(0.000-60.000)s
Class 5 +
200 ms
U - UMin
t=
UNom - UMin
Exponent
( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
U=Umeasured
8.2
Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)
400

REL 670
Section 8
Function block name: TOFx-
ANSI number: 81
SAPTOF
8.2.1
f>
Introduction
Overfrequency will occur at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network.
In some cases close to generating part governor problems can also cause
overfrequency.
The function can be used for generation shedding, remedial action schemes etc. It can
also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring.
8.2.2
The Overfrequency (TOF) function is used to detect high power system frequency.
The function has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the
set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function
is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is
blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.
8.2.2.1
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency
function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude
decreases below the setting IntBlkStVal, the overfrequency function is blocked, and
the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of
the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.2.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the overfrequency function is a settable definite time delay,
specified by the setting tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from
the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.
REL 670

401
Section 8
Trip signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset
time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here
it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.
8.2.2.3
Blocking
The overfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
or by parameter settings, where:
TOF-BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
TOF-BLKTRIP:
blocks the TOF-TRIP output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start
and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.2.2.4
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the
positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design
of the overfrequency function is schematically described in figure 207.
402

REL 670
Section 8
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLOCK
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
Frequency
BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
f > StartFrequency
START
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
START
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
en05000735.vsd
Figure 207:
8.2.3
Schematic design of the overfrequency function
Function block
TOF1SAPTOF_81
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
TRIP
START
BLKDMAGN
Frequency
en06000280.vsd
Figure 208:
8.2.4
TOF function block

Table 233:
Input signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
U3P
Voltage connection
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTRIP

403
Section 8
Table 234:
Output signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block
Signal
8.2.5
TRIP
Operate/trip signal for frequency.
START
Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
BLKDMAGN
Frequency
Measured frequency
Setting parameters
Table 235:
Parameter
8.2.6
Description
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
StartFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
0.01
51.20
Hz
Frequency setting/
start value.
IntBlockLevel
0 - 100
50
%UB

in % of UBase.
TimeDlyOperate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

over/under-frequency
mode.
TimeDlyReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Technical data
Table 236:
Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00-75.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
100 ms typically
100 ms typically
Operate time, definite time

function
(0.000-60.000)s
0.5% + 10 ms
Reset time, definite time function
(0.000-60.000)s
0.5% + 10 ms
8.3
Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC,

81)
404

REL 670
Section 8
Function block name: RCFx-
ANSI number: 81
SAPFRC
8.3.1
df/dt >
<
Introduction
Rate of change of frequency function gives an early indication of a main disturbance
in the system.
The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding, remedial action
schemes etc.
Each step can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency.
8.3.2
The rate-of-change of frequency (RCF) function is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as decrease, at an early stage. The function has
a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the
set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay,
the trip signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value,
for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip
signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement
at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available,
i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked and
no start or trip signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease,
a restore signal is issued.
8.3.2.1
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. The rate-of-change
of frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, the rate-of-change of frequency
function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if the rate-of-change of frequency function reacts on a
positive or on a negative change in frequency. If the rate-of-change of frequency
function is used for decreasing frequency, i.e. the setting StartFreqGrad has been
given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued
on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the
REL 670

405
Section 8
setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets the rate-of-change of

frequency function to start and trip for frequency increases.
8.3.2.2
Time delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function has a settable definite time delay, tTrip.
The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in
percent of the total operation time.
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues
for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the start condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the
start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of the rate-of-change of frequency function is set, after a time
delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to
the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If
tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be
given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and
the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected
during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
8.3.2.3
Blocking
The rate-of-change of frequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary
input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP:
blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST:
blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.3.2.4
Design
The rate-of-change of frequency measuring element continuously measures the
frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting StartFreqGrad. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and
faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency
has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after
the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the
406

REL 670
Section 8
setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or
lowering frequency conditions. The design of the rate-of-change of frequency
function is schematically described in figure 209.
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET
Voltage
OR
BLOCK
BLKDMAGN
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
Rate-of-Change
of Frequency
Comparator
If
[StartFreqGrad<0
START
AND
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
TimeDlyOperate
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
START
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
100 ms
Frequency
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
TimeDlyRestore
RESTORE
en05000835.vsd
Figure 209:
8.3.3
Schematic design of the rate-of-change of frequency function
Function block
RCF1SAPFRC_81
U3P
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST
TRIP
START
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
en06000281.vsd
Figure 210:
RCF function block
8.3.4
REL 670

407
Section 8
Table 237:
Input signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BLKREST
Blocking restore output.
Table 238:
Output signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block
Signal
8.3.5
Description
TRIP
Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient
START
Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient
RESTORE
Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN
Setting parameters
Table 239:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for the

phase-phase voltage
in kV
StartFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
0.01
0.50
Hz/s
Frequency gradient
start value. Sign
defines direction.
IntBlockLevel
0 - 100
50
%UB

in % of UBase.
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200

pos./neg. frequency
gradient mode.
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
0.01
49.90
Hz
Restore frequency if
frequency is above
frequency value (Hz)
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Restore time delay.
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
8.3.6
Technical data
408

REL 670
Section 8
REL 670
Table 240:
Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, internal blocking

level
(0-100)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
100 ms typically

409
410
Section 9
Multipurpose protection
Section 9
About this chapter
This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and
voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function
blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
9.1
General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Function block name: GFxx-
ANSI number: 46, 51, 67, 51N, 67N, 27, 59, 21,
40
I
U
IEC 61850 logical node name: CVGAPC
9.1.1
Introduction
The function can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting
unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults.
The function can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults,
outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are
used which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This
will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in
conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault
protection function.
9.1.1.1
Inadvertent generator energization

When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the
generator circuit breaker flashes over or is closed by mistake.
REL 670

411
Section 9
To prevent damages on the generator or turbine, it is essential that high speed tripping
is provided in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. This tripping should
be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).
There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be
limited so that the normal overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect
the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long.
For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should,
therefore, be included in the protective scheme.
9.1.2
9.1.2.1
Measured quantities within the function

The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input
in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage
quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 241.
Table 241:
Current selection for the GF function
Set value for the

parameter CurrentInput Comment
1
Phase1
GF function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
Phase2
Phase3
PosSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current

phasor
NegSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current

phasor
3ZeroSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current

phasor multiplied by factor 3
MaxPh
GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum

magnitude
MinPh
GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum

magnitude
UnbalancePh
GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor
of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all
the time
10
Phase1-Phase2
GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the

vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2
current phasor (i.e. IL1-IL2)
11
Phase2-Phase3

412

REL 670
Section 9
Set value for the
parameter CurrentInput Comment
12
Phase3-Phase1

13
MaxPh-Ph
GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum

magnitude
14
MinPh-Ph
GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum

magnitude
15
UnbalancePh-Ph
GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is

ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor
with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 242:
Table 242:
Voltage selection for the GF function
Set value for the

parameter
VoltageInput
Comment
Phase1
GF function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
Phase2
Phase3
PosSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage

phasor
-NegSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage

phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order
to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
-3ZeroSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage

phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
MaxPh
GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum

magnitude
MinPh
GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum

magnitude
UnbalancePh
GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is

voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0 all the time
10
Phase1-Phase2
GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the

vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2
voltage phasor (i.e. UL1-UL2)
11
Phase2-Phase3

12
Phase3-Phase1

REL 670

413
Section 9
Set value for the
parameter
VoltageInput
Comment
13
MaxPh-Ph
GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum

magnitude
14
MinPh-Ph
GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum

magnitude
15
UnbalancePh-Ph
GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is

ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 242 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three
phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT
connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will
then take automatic care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 243 for built-in current
restraint feature:
Table 243:
Restraint current selection for the GF function
Set value for the

parameter RestrCurr
9.1.2.2
Comment
PosSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current

phasor
NegSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current

phasor
3ZeroSeq
GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current

phasor multiplied by factor 3
MaxPh
GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum

magnitude
Base quantities for GF function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (i.e. 100%)
for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for
every GF function.
Base current shall be entered as:
1.
2.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 241.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3
(i.e. 1,732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to
15, as shown in table 241.
Base voltage shall be entered as:

414

REL 670
Section 9
1.
2.
9.1.2.3
rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 242.
rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 242.
Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 241) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup
if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset
ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled
built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start
signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the
overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.
Second harmonic feature
The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component

in the measured current quantity (see table 241). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:
PosSeq (i.e. positive sequence current)

NegSeq (i.e. negative sequence current)
UnbalancePh (i.e. unbalance phase current)
UnbalancePh-Ph (i.e. unbalance ph-ph current)
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the
relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 241) and measured
voltage phasor (see table 242). In protection terminology it means that the PGPF
function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case
overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with
the set direction (i.e. Forward, which means towards the protected object, or
Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost
importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 242) and
measured current phasor (see table 241) will be used for directional decision.
Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current
and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. The PGPF function
will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors
selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.
Table 244 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
REL 670

415
Section 9
Table 244:
Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the

Set value for the
parameter CurrentInput parameter
Comment
VoltageInput
PosSeq
PosSeq
Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90
depending on the power
NegSeq
-NegSeq
Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90
depending on the power system voltage level (i.e. X/R
ratio)
3ZeroSeq
-3ZeroSeq
Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90
depending on the power system earthing (i.e. solidly
earthed, earthed via resistor, etc.)
Phase1
Phase2-Phase3
Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase2
Phase3-Phase1
Directional overcurrent function for the second phase

is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase3
Phase1-Phase2
Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and
IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool,
checks that:
the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 211).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Ipickup
ROADir
I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000252.vsd
Figure 211:
I & U directional operating principle for the GF function
where:
RCADir is -75
416

REL 670
Section 9
ROADir is 50
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:
that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 211).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Ipickup
ROADir
I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000253.vsd
Figure 212:
GF, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle
where:
RCADir
is -75
ROADir is 50
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options:
Non-directional (i.e. operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference

voltage)
Block (i.e. operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
Memory (i.e. memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms.
After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during
memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage
goes above set voltage memory limit.
REL 670

417
Section 9
Voltage restraint/control feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a

measured voltage quantity (see table 242). Practically then the pickup level of the
overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are
available:
Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Slope)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
ULowLimit_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
Figure 213:
418
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

REL 670
Section 9
Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Step has value = step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd
Figure 214:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simple change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT
curves (i.e. overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).
Current restraint feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a

restraining current quantity (see table 243). Practically then the pickup level of the
overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the
magnitude of the restraining current.
REL 670

419
Section 9
IMeasured
pe
O
te
ra
ea
ar
IsetHigh
eff
Co
r
t
es
I>R
tr
es
*I r
ain
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
Figure 215:
Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.
9.1.2.4
Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 241) with the set pickup level.
The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of
the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start
definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset
of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the
setting.
9.1.2.5
Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
420

REL 670
Section 9
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 242) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio
is settable, with default value of 0.99.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end
user setting.
9.1.2.6
Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 242 with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio
is settable, with default value of 1.01.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of
the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end
user setting.
9.1.2.7
Inadvertent generator energization

The inadvertent energization function is realized by means of the general current and
voltage protection function (CAGVPC). The function is configured as shown in
figure 216.
REL 670

421
Section 9
CVGAPC
3IP
3UP
TROC1
TROV1
1
TRUV1
BLKOC1
en06000497.vsd
Figure 216:
Configuration of the inadvertent energization function
The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as
shown in table 245.
Table 245:
The setting of the general current and voltage function

Measured Quantity
Pickup in % of generator Time delay in seconds

rating
Undervoltage U<
Maximum generator
Phase to Phase voltage
< 70%
10.0 s
Overvoltage U>
Maximum generator
Phase to Phase voltage
> 85%
1.0 s
Overcurrent I>
Maximum generator
Phase current
> 50%
0.05 s
In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip
signal is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked.
When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The
overvoltage trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be
activated after the set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent
function will be deactivated.
422

REL 670
Section 9
It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, i.e. when the voltage is zero, the
overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current is
larger than the set value.
When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activared the set time
delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment
the blocking of the overcurrent function is activated.
The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits
in the external power grid.
9.1.2.8
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for the PGPF function are shown in the following
figures.
REx670
Phasors &
samples
Current and voltage selection

settings
Selection of which current

and voltage shall be given to
the built-in protection
elements
Selected current
Selected voltage
Restraint current selection
Selection of restraint current
Selected restraint current
Phasors &
samples
Phasor calculation of
individual currents
PGPF function
Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
A/D conversion scaling

with CT ratio
A/D conversion
scaling with CT ratio
ADM
en05000169.vsd
Figure 217:
Treatment of measured currents within IED for PGPF function
Figure 217 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.
REL 670

423
Section 9
1.
2.
3.
Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
The multipurpose protection function:

1.
2.
3.
424
Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured current.
Selects one voltage from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured voltage.
Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured restraint current.

REL 670
Section 9
CURRENT
UC1
2
Selected current
TRUC1
nd
Harmonic
restraint
STUC2
UC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
TRUC2
STOC1
OC1
Selected restraint current
2nd Harmonic
restraint
TROC1
Current restraint
BLK2ND
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint
STOC2
TROC2
OC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint
Directionality
UDIRLOW
DIROC2
Voltage control /
restraint
STOV1
OV1
TROV1
OV2
TROV2
UV1
TRUV1
STOV2
STUV1
Selected voltage
STUV2
UV2
TRUV2
VOLTAGE
en05000170.vsd
Figure 218:
REL 670
PGPF function main logic diagram for built in protection elements

425
Section 9
Logic in figure 218 can be summarized as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Enable
second
harmonic
The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its
START and TRIP output signals.
More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures
Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
Second
harmonic check
DEF time
selected
BLKTROC
1
DEF
AND
TROC1
OR
Selected current
a
b
StartCurr_OC1
a>b
OC1=On
BLKOC1
STOC1
AND
Inverse
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature
Selected voltage
Selected restrain current
Directionality
check
DIR_OK
Inverse
time
selected
Current
Restraint
Feature
Imeasured > k Irestraint
en05000831.vsd
Figure 219:
426
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step i.e. OC1 (step OC2 has the same
internal logic)

REL 670
Section 9
Bin input: BLKUC1TR
Selected current
b>a
DEF
TRUC1
AND
AND
StartCurr_UC1
Operation_UC1=On
STUC1
Bin input: BLKUC1
en05000750.vsd
Figure 220:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step i.e. UC1 (step UC2 has the same
internal logic)
DEF time
selected
BLKTROV1
DEF
AND
TROV1
OR
Selected voltage
a
b
StartVolt_OV1
a>b
STOV1
AND
Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
BLKOV1
Inverse time
selected
en05000751.vsd
Figure 221:
REL 670
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step i.e.OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)

427
Section 9
DEF time
selected
BLKTRUV
1
DEF
AND
TRUV1
OR
Selected voltage
b>a
STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1
Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
selected
BLKUV1
en05000752.vsd
Figure 222:
9.1.3
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step i.e.UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)
Function block
GF01CVGAPC
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
BLKOC1
BLKOC1TR
ENMLTOC1
BLKOC2
BLKOC2TR
ENMLTOC2
BLKUC1
BLKUC1TR
BLKUC2
BLKUC2TR
BLKOV1
BLKOV1TR
BLKOV2
BLKOV2TR
BLKUV1
BLKUV1TR
BLKUV2
BLKUV2TR
TRIP
TROC1
TROC2
TRUC1
TRUC2
TROV1
TROV2
TRUV1
TRUV2
START
STOC1
STOC2
STUC1
STUC2
STOV1
STOV2
STUV1
STUV2
BLK2ND
DIROC1
DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE
en05000372.vsd
Figure 223:
GF function block
9.1.4
428

REL 670
Section 9
Table 246:
Input signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKOC1
Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR
Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1
When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1
BLKOC2
Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR
Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2
When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2
BLKUC1
Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR
Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2
Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR
Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1
Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR
Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2
Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR
Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1
Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR
Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2
Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR
Block of trip for under voltage function UV2
Table 247:
Output signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
General trip signal
TROC1
Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2
Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1
Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2
Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1
Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2
Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1
Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2
Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
START
STOC1
Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2
Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1
Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
REL 670

429
Section 9
Signal
9.1.5
Description
STUC2
Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1
Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2
Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1
Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2
Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND
Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1
Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2
Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW
Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT
Measured current value
ICOSFI
Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE
Measured voltage value
UIANGLE
Angle between voltage and current
Setting parameters
Table 248:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
CurrentInput
phase1
phase2
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
MaxPh
Select current signal

which will be
measured inside
function
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base Current
430

REL 670
Section 9
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
VoltageInput
phase1
phase2
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
MaxPh
Select voltage signal

which will be
measured inside
function
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base Voltage
OperHarmRestr
Off
On
Off
Operation of 2nd
harmonic restrain Off /
On
l_2nd/l_fund
10.0 - 50.0
1.0
20.0
Ratio of second to
fundamental current
harmonic in %
BlkLevel2nd
10 - 5000
5000
%IB
Harm analyse
disabled above this
Ibase
EnRestrainCurr
Off
On
Off
Enable current
restrain function On /
Off
RestrCurrInput
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
Max
PosSeq
Select current signal

which will be used for
curr restrain
RestrCurrCoeff
0.00
0.01
0.00 - 5.00
Restraining current
coefficient
RCADir
-180 - 180
-75
Deg
Relay Characteristic
Angle
ROADir
1 - 90
75
Deg
Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM
0.0 - 5.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
Below this level in %

of Ubase setting
ActLowVolt takes
over
Operation_OC1
Off
On
Off
Operation OC1 Off /

On
StartCurr_OC1
2.0 - 5000.0
1.0
120.0
%IB

for OC1 in % of Ibase
REL 670

431
Section 9
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CurveType_OC1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
OC1
tDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Independent
of OC1
k_OC1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00

for OC1
tMin_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1
Voltage control
Input control
Volt/Input control
Off
Off
Control mode for

voltage controlled
OC1 function
VDepMode_OC1
Step
Slope
Step
Voltage dependent
mode OC1 (step,
slope)
VDepFact_OC1
1.00
0.01
0.02 - 5.00
Multiplying factor for I

pickup when OC1 is U
dependent
ULowLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
Voltage low limit

setting OC1 in % of
Ubase
UHighLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
100.0
%UB
Voltage high limit

setting OC1 in % of
Ubase
HarmRestr_OC1
Off
On
Off
Enable block of OC1

by 2nd harmonic
restrain
DirMode_OC1
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
OC1 (nondir,
forward,reverse)
DirPrinc_OC1
I&U
IcosPhi&U
I&U
Measuring on IandU
or IcosPhiandU for
OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM
Non-directional
Block
Memory
Non-directional
Low voltage level

action for Dir_OC1
(Nodir, Blk, Mem)
432

REL 670
Section 9
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation_OC2
Off
On
Off
Operation OC2 Off /

On
StartCurr_OC2
2.0 - 5000.0
1.0
120.0
%IB

for OC2 in % of Ibase
CurveType_OC2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
OC2
tDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Independent
of OC2
k_OC2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00

for OC2
tMin_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2
Voltage control
Input control
Volt/Input control
Off
Off
Control mode for

voltage controlled
OC2 function
VDepMode_OC2
Step
Slope
Step
Voltage dependent
mode OC2 (step,
slope)
VDepFact_OC2
1.00
0.01
0.02 - 5.00
Multiplying factor for I

pickup when OC2 is U
dependent
ULowLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
Voltage low limit

setting OC2 in % of
Ubase
UHighLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
100.0
%UB
Voltage high limit

setting OC2 in % of
Ubase
HarmRestr_OC2
Off
On
Off
Enable block of OC2

by 2nd harmonic
restrain
DirMode_OC2
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
OC2 (nondir,
forward,reverse)
DirPrinc_OC2
I&U
IcosPhi&U
I&U
Measuring on IandU
or IcosPhiandU for
OC2
REL 670

433
Section 9
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ActLowVolt2_VM
Non-directional
Block
Memory
Non-directional
Low voltage level

action for Dir_OC2
(Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Operation_UC1
Off
On
Off
Operation UC1 Off /

On
EnBlkLowI_UC1
Off
On
Off
Enable internal low

current level blocking
for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1
0 - 150
20
%IB
Internal low current

blocking level for UC1
in % of Ibase
StartCurr_UC1
2.0 - 150.0
1.0
70.0
%IB
Operate undercurrent
level for UC1 in % of
Ibase
tDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Independent
of UC1
tResetDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1
Off
On
Off
Enable block of UC1

by 2nd harmonic
restrain
Operation_UC2
Off
On
Off
Operation UC2 Off /

On
EnBlkLowI_UC2
Off
On
Off
Enable internal low

current level blocking
for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2
0 - 150
20
%IB
Internal low current

blocking level for UC2
in % of Ibase
StartCurr_UC2
2.0 - 150.0
1.0
70.0
%IB
Operate undercurrent
level for UC2 in % of
Ibase
tDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Independent
of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2
Off
On
Off
Enable block of UC2

by 2nd harmonic
restrain
Operation_OV1
Off
On
Off
Operation OV1 Off /

On
StartVolt_OV1
2.0 - 200.0
0.1
150.0
%UB

for OV1 in % of Ubase
CurveType_OV1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
OV1
tDef_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

sec for definite time
use of OV1
434

REL 670
Section 9
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
tMin_OV1
Range
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Description
Minimum operate
time for IDMT curves
for OV1
k_OV1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00

for OV1
Operation_OV2
Off
On
Off
Operation OV2 Off /

On
StartVolt_OV2
2.0 - 200.0
0.1
150.0
%UB

for OV2 in % of Ubase
CurveType_OV2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
OV2
tDef_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

use of OV2
tMin_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate
for OV2
k_OV2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00

for OV2
Operation_UV1
Off
On
Off
Operation UV1 Off /

On
StartVolt_UV1
2.0 - 150.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
Operate undervoltage
level for UV1 in % of
Ubase
CurveType_UV1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
UV1
tDef_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

use of UV1
tMin_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate
for UV1
k_UV1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00

for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1
Off
On
On
Enable internal low

voltage level blocking
for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1
0.0 - 5.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
Internal low voltage

blocking level for UV1
in % of Ubase
Operation_UV2
Off
On
Off
Operation UV2 Off /

On
StartVolt_UV2
2.0 - 150.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
Operate undervoltage
level for UV2 in % of
Ubase
REL 670

435
Section 9
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CurveType_UV2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time
UV2
tDef_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

use of UV2
tMin_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate
for UV2
k_UV2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00

for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2
Off
On
On
Enable internal low

voltage level blocking
for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2
0.0 - 5.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
Internal low voltage

blocking level for UV2
in % of Ubase
Table 249:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CurrMult_OC1
2.0
0.1
1.0 - 10.0

the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for OC1
tResetDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curve OC1
P_OC1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
A_OC1
0.140
0.001
0.000 - 999.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
B_OC1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 99.000
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
C_OC1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
PR_OC1
0.500
0.001
0.005 - 3.000
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
436

REL 670
Section 9
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TR_OC1
13.500
0.001
0.005 - 600.000
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
CR_OC1
1.0
0.1
0.1 - 10.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
CurrMult_OC2
2.0
0.1
1.0 - 10.0

the current setting
value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for OC2
tResetDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curve OC2
P_OC2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
A_OC2
0.140
0.001
0.000 - 999.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
B_OC2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 99.000
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
C_OC2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
PR_OC2
0.500
0.001
0.005 - 3.000
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
TR_OC2
13.500
0.001
0.005 - 600.000
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
CR_OC2
1.0
0.1
0.1 - 10.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
tResetDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for OV1
tResetDef_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in

use of OV1
REL 670

437
Section 9
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
tResetIDMT_OV1
Range
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Description
Reset time delay in
sec for IDMT curves
for OV1
A_OV1
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
B_OV1
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
C_OV1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
D_OV1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
P_OV1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for OV2
tResetDef_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in

use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in

sec for IDMT curves
for OV2
A_OV2
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
B_OV2
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
C_OV2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
D_OV2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
P_OV2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
438

REL 670
Section 9
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ResCrvType_UV1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for UV1
tResetDef_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in

use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in

sec for IDMT curves
for UV1
A_UV1
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
B_UV1
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
C_UV1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
D_UV1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
P_UV1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for UV2
tResetDef_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in

use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in

sec for IDMT curves
for UV2
A_UV2
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
B_UV2
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
REL 670

439
Section 9
Parameter
9.1.6
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
C_UV2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
D_UV2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
P_UV2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
Technical data
Table 250:
General current and voltage protection (GAPC)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Measuring current input
phase1, phase2, phase3,

PosSeq, NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq,
MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh,
phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1,
MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
Base current
(1 - 99999) A
Measuring voltage input
phase1, phase2, phase3,

PosSeq, -NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq,
MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh,
phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1,
MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
Base voltage
(0.05 - 2000.00) kV
Start overcurrent, step 1 and 2
(2 - 5000)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir for I<Ir

1.0% of I for I>Ir
Start undercurrent, step 1 and 2
(2 - 150)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir for I<Ir

1.0% of I for I>Ir
Definite time delay
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time start overcurrent
Reset time start overcurrent
Operate time start undercurrent
Reset time start undercurrent
440

REL 670
Section 9
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Parameter ranges for customer

defined characteristic no 17:
k: 0.05 - 999.00
A: 0.0000 - 999.0000
B: 0.0000 - 99.0000
C: 0.0000 - 1.0000
P: 0.0001 - 10.0000
PR: 0.005 - 3.000
TR: 0.005 - 600.000
CR: 0.1 - 10.0
Voltage level where voltage

memory takes over
(0.0 - 5.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Start overvoltage, step 1 and 2
(2.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur for U<Ur

1.0% of U for U>Ur
Start undervoltage, step 1 and 2
(2.0 - 150.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur for U<Ur

1.0% of U for U>Ur
Operate time, start overvoltage
Reset time, start overvoltage
Operate time start undervoltage
25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Uset
Reset time start undervoltage
High and low voltage limit,

voltage dependent operation
(1.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur for U<Ur

1.0% of U for U>Ur
Directional function
Settable: NonDir, forward and

reverse
(-180 to +180) degrees
2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle
(1 to 90) degrees
2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent
> 95%
Reset ratio, undercurrent
< 105%
Reset ratio, overvoltage
> 95%
Reset ratio, undervoltage
< 105%
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Overcurrent:
Undercurrent:
Overvoltage:
Undervoltage:
REL 670

441
442
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
Section 10 Secondary system supervision

About this chapter
This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure
supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
10.1
Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Function block name: CCSx-
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: CCSRDIF
10.1.1
Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth fault current and negative
sequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring open
CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will
stress the secondary circuit.
The current circuit supervision function compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to
block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.
10.1.2
The supervision function compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three
phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from
another current transformer set, see figure 224.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
REL 670

443
Section 10
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a ALARM will
be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the ANDgate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase
current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.
Figure 224:
Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 225.
| I phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Slope = 0.8
Operation
area
I MinOp
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
Figure 225:
444
Operate characteristics

REL 670
Section 10
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
10.1.3
Function block
CCS1CCSRDIF
I3P
IREF
BLOCK
FAIL
ALARM
en05000389.vsd
Figure 226:
10.1.4
CCS function block

Table 251:
Input signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Group signal for three phase current input
IREF
TBD
BLOCK
Block of function
Table 252:
Output signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block
Signal
10.1.5
FAIL
Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM
Alarm for current circuit failure
Setting parameters
Table 253:
Parameter
REL 670
Description
Parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
IBase value for

current level
detectors
Ip>Block
5 - 500
150
%IB
Block of the function

at high phase current,
in % of IBase
IMinOp
5 - 200
20
%IB
Minimum operate
current differential
level in % of IBase

445
Section 10
10.1.6
Technical data
Table 254:
Current circuit supervision (RDIF)
Function
10.2
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(5-200)% of Ir
10.0% of Ir at I Ir
10.0% of I at I > Ir
Block current
(5-500)% of Ir
5.0% of Ir at I Ir
5.0% of I at I > Ir
Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Function block name: FSDx-
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: SDDRFUF
10.2.1
Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FSD) is to block voltage measuring
functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and
the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has two different algorithms, negative
sequence and zero sequence based algorithm and an additional delta voltage and delta
current algorithm.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated
or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence
current 3I2.
The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or
low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current
3I0.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which
in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station
operations.
For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been
introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative
sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation
446

REL 670
Section 10
modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the

negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.
10.2.2
10.2.2.1
Zero sequence
The function can be set in five different modes by setting the parameter OpMode.
The zero sequence function continuously measure the internal currents and voltages
in all three phases and calculate:
the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

the zero-sequence current 3I0.
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and
3I0>.
The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured zero
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0>, the measured zero sequence
current is below the set value 3I0< and the operation mode selector (OpMode is set
to 2 (zero sequence mode). This will activate the output signal BLKU, intended to
block voltage related protection functions in the IED. The output signal BLKZ will
be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activaded at the same
time.
If the fuseFailDetected signal is present for more than 5 seconds at the same time as
all phase voltages are below the set value UPh> and the setting parameter ISealIn is
set to On, the function will activate the output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ. The
same signals will aslo be activated if all phase voltages are below the value UPh>,
SealIn=On and any of the phase voltages below the setting value for more than 5
seconds.
It is recommended to always set SealIn to On since this will secure that no unwanted
operation of fuse failure will occur at closing command of breaker when the line is
already energized from the other end. The system voltages shall be normal before
fuse failure is allowed to be activated and initiate block of different protection
functions.
The output signal BLKU can also be activated if no phase voltages is below the setting
UPh> for more than 60 seconds at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is
above the set value 3U0> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the
setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed
(input CBCLOSED is activated). This condition covers for fuse failure at open
breaker position.
Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored.
REL 670

447
Section 10
Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. In the new
start-up procedure the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and
establishes the corresponding starting conditions.
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
OR
fufailStarted
AND
OR
All UL less
than Uph>
AND
AND
SealIn = On
Any UL less
than Uph>
Fuse fail detected
(3U0 high and 3I0 low
for t>3 ms)
AND
OR
3PH
5s
t
fuseFaildetected
AND
AND
OR
BLKU
OpMode = 2
setLatch U I
deadLineCondition
200 ms
t
AND
OR
AND
BLKZ
150 ms
t
MCBOP
60 sec
t
All UL> UPh>
AND
UN > 3U0> for
t>5 s
AND
All IL < IDLD<

CBCLOSED
DISCPOS
en06000394.vsd
Figure 227:
448
Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, zero sequence based

REL 670
Section 10
The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions:
The input BLOCK is activated

The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal
fufailStarted is not present
The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off.
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.
The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection
functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of
the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the
security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might
cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-off time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary
circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block
all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of
OpMode selector. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of
MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due
to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
maloperation of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, synchro-check etc.) except for the impedance protection.
The function output BLKZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.
REL 670

449
Section 10
The BLKZ will only be activated if not the internal dead line detection is activated
at the same time.
The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are
restored.
When the output 3PH is activated, all three voltage are low.
10.2.2.2
Negative sequence
The negative sequence operates in the same way as the zero sequence, but it calculates
the negative sequence component of current and voltage.
the negative sequence current 3I2

the negative sequence voltage 3U2
The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2>, the measured negative sequence
current is below the value 3I2< and the operation mode selector (OpMode) is set to
1 (negative sequence mode).
10.2.2.3
du/dt and di/dt

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OperationDUDI to On.
When it is selected On it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithm.
The current and voltage is continuously measured in all three phases and the following
quantities are calculated:
The change of voltage DU/Dt

The change of current DI/Dt
The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and
DU>.
The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient
negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude
is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is
closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input
CBCLOSED through a binary input of the IED.
There are two conditions for activating the internal STDU signal and set the latch:
450

REL 670
Section 10
The magnitude of U is higher than the corresponding setting DU> and I is

below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the circuit breaker is
closed (CBCLOSED = 1)
The magnitude U is higher than the setting DU> and the magnitude of I is
below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the magnitude of the phase
current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh>.
The first criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at
the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and
energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse
failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to bee an
important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only
the second criterion can activate the delta function.
The second criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high
current for the same phase will set the latch. The measured phase current is used to
reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is
low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed
by current change and a false fuse failure might occur. To prevent that the phase
current criterion is introduced.
If the signal setLatchUI is set (see figure 227) and if all measured voltages are low
(lower than the setting UPh>) the output 3PH will be activated indicating fuse failure
in all three phases. The output BLKU and BLKZ will be activated as well.
If the signal setLatchUI is activated but not all three phases are below the setting
UPh> only BLKU will be activated.
The BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activated.
10.2.2.4
Operation modes
The fuse failure supervision function can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.
Negative and zero sequence algorithm
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode

selector, OperationMode has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithm. The different
operation modes are:
REL 670
OpMode = 0, the negative and zero sequence function is switched off

OpMode = 1; Negative sequence is selected
OpMode = 2; Zero sequence is selected

451
Section 10
OMode = 3; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel
in an OR-condition
OpMode = 4; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series
(AND-condition for operation)
OpMode = 5; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be
activated).
du/dt and di/dt algorithm
The DU and DI function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter

OpDUDI to On or Off.
10.2.2.5
Dead line detection

The function input signal deadLineCondition (see figure 227) is related to the internal
dead line detection function. This signal is activated from the dead line condition
function when the voltage and the current in at least one phase is below their respective
setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. It prevents the blocking of the impedance
protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that occurs also
during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line
condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance
protection for unequal pole closing.
10.2.3
Function block
FSD1SDDRFUF
I3P
U3P
BLOCK
CBCLOSED
MCBOP
DISCPOS
BLKTRIP
BLKZ
BLKU
3PH
DLD1PH
DLD3PH
en05000700.vsd
Figure 228:
10.2.4
FSD function block

Table 255:
Input signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Current connection
U3P
Voltage connection
BLOCK
Block of function
CBCLOSED
Active when circuit breaker is closed
452

REL 670
Section 10
Signal
Description
MCBOP
Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit
DISCPOS
Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP
Blocks operation of function when active
Table 256:
Output signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block
Signal
10.2.5
Description
BLKZ
Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU
General start of function
3PH
Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH
Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH
Dead line condition in all three phases
Setting parameters
Table 257:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
OpMode
Off
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR
UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
UZsIZs
Operating mode
selection
3U0>
1 - 100
30
%UB
Operate level of
residual overvoltage
element in % of
UBase
3I0<
1 - 100
10
%IB
Operate level of
residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2>
1 - 100
30
%UB
Operate level of neg

seq overvoltage
element in % of
UBase
3I2<
1 - 100
10
%IB
Operate level of neg

seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI
Off
On
Off
Operation of change
based function Off/On
REL 670

453
Section 10
Parameter
10.2.6
Range
Default
Unit
Description
1 - 100
60
%UB
Operate level of
change in phase
voltage in % of UBase
DI<
1 - 100
15
%IB
Operate level of
change in phase
UPh>
1 - 100
70
%UB
Operate level of
phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh>
1 - 100
10
%IB
Operate level of
phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn
Off
On
On
Seal in functionality
Off/On
USealln<
1 - 100
70
%UB
Operate level of sealin phase voltage in %

of UBase
IDLD<
1 - 100
%IB
Operate level for open

phase current
detection in % of
IBase
UDLD<
1 - 100
60
%UB
Operate level for open

phase voltage
detection in % of
UBase
Technical data
Table 258:
Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)
Function
454
Step
DU>
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence
(1-100)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence
(1100)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence
(1100)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence
(1100)% of Ibase
1.0% of Ir
Operate voltage change level
(1100)% of Ubase
5.0% of Ur
Operate current change level
(1100)% of Ibase
5.0% of Ir

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Section 11 Control
About this chapter
This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting
parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included
for each function.
11.1
Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing

check (RSYN, 25)
Function block name: SYNx-
ANSI number: 25
SESRSYN
11.1.1
sc/vc
Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time. The systems can thus be reconnected
after an auto-reclose or manual closing which improves the network stability.
The synchrocheck function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker
are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done
safely.
The function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and one- and
a half or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.
For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided.
The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used
for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchrocheck and lower than a set
maximum level for the synchronizing function.
REL 670

455
Section 11
Control
11.1.2
11.1.2.1
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker
and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities
are simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is only given when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and it also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is only given when all measured
conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed
to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the
closing circuit.
For single circuit breaker and 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, the SYN function
blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit
breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts
of the bus disconnectors. For 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage
selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the
circuit breakers
The internal logic for each function block as well as the Input and Outputs and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the Application
manual.
11.1.2.2
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the Synchrocheck
function components such as Synchronism check, Energizing check and Voltage
selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the Synchrocheck function for
evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as
phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a
setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.
When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.
456

REL 670
Section 11
Control
If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiff,
PhaseDiff and UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages
on the Bus and Line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison
of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency
difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may
not exceed the set value.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the Manual closing and Auto-Reclose functions respectively as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
Synchrocheck function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively.
TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected
to a separate test output
Two outputs MANSYOK resp. AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK conditions and for AUTOSYOK.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.
UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFM/A, PHDIFFM/A
shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference
conditions are met.
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch=On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values
for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch which is a supervision that the voltages
are both live. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are
compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, rate of change of frequency,
phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiffMax, FreqDiffMin and UDiffSynch.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation
to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function
will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set
tMaxSynch time. This will then prevent that the functions is by mistake maintained
in operation a long time waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
function resp. of the Synchronizing part.
REL 670

457
Section 11
Control
SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH
OFF
ON
TEST MODE
OFF
ON
STARTSYN
AND
BLKSYNCH
OR
AND
S
R
UDiffSynch
50 ms
UHighBusSynch
AND
SYNOK
AND
UHighLineSynch
OR
FreqDiffMax
AND
FreqDiffMin
OR
FreqRateChange
fBus&fLine 5 Hz
SYNPROGR
AND
AND
PhaseDiff < 15 deg
TSTSYNOK
tClose
Pulse
tMax
Synch
SYNFAIL
PhaseDiff=closing angle
en06000636.vsd
Figure 229:
Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by
the Synchrocheck function. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the
line voltage as phase-neutral, (or the opposite) this needs to be compensated. This is
done with a setting, which scales the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are
live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and
ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighBusEnergand ULowBusEnerg for line
energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency
difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and shall
not exceed a set value.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision
conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANENOK conditions and for AUTOENOK. The Energizing direction can also be
458

REL 670
Section 11
Control
selected by an integer input AENMODE resp MENMODE, which e.g. can be

connected to a Binary to Integer function block BI 16 (BAxx or BBxx). Integers
supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with
connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals function block will mean that the
setting is done from PST tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN
resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
Synchrocheck function resp. block of the Energizing check function. TSTENOK will
allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
test output.
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.
OperationSC = On
AND
AND
TSTAUTOSY
TSTSC
BLKSC
BLOCK
AND
OR
AND
AUTOSYOK
0-60 s
t
AND
tSCA
UDiffSC
AND
50 ms
t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
FreqDiffA
PhaseDiffA
voltageDifferenceValue
frequencyDifferenceValue
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
UDIFFSC
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
UDIFFME
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
en07000114.vsd
Figure 230:
Simplified logic diagram for the Synchrocheck function
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer

fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the Synchrocheck function and
determines the parameters fed to the Synchronism check and Energizing check
functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and
fuse supervision.
REL 670

459
Section 11
Control
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. The
different alternatives are described below.
If NoVoltageSel is set the default voltages used will be ULine1 and UBus1. This is
also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for
the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are the
Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts
to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but it is of course also possible to
use an inverter for one of the positions.
Fuse failure supervision
External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected
to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of the Synchrocheck functions in the
terminal. Alternatively the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used
when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK
must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy.
Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage
circuit is faulty.
The SYN1(2)-UB1/2OK and SYN1(2)-UB1/2FF inputs are related to the busbar
voltage and the SYN1(2)-ULN1/2OK and SYN1(2)-ULN1/2FF inputs are related to
the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs or function outputs that indicate
the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of
a fuse failure, the energizing check functions are blocked. The synchronism check
requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of
fuse failures.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars
This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts
B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select
between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 2 is closed
and the disconnector connected to bus 1 is opened the bus 2 voltage is used. All other
combinations use the bus 1 voltage. The Outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively
indicate the selected Bus voltage.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1. UB2OK-UB2FF
supervises the fuse for Bus 2 and ULNOK-ULNFF supervises the fuse for the Line
voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used
dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage
source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected
bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be
blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure
231.
460

REL 670
Section 11
Control
B1QOPEN
B1QCLD
B1SEL
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD
B2SEL
AND
AND
bus1Voltage
invalidSelection
busVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF
OR
UB2OK
UB2FF
OR
ULN1OK
ULN1FF
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
USELFAIL
BLOCK
en05000779.vsd
Figure 231:
Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit

breaker with double busbars
Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement
Note that with 1 breaker schemes two Synchrocheck functions must be used in the
IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker
and the Tie breakers is described.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck
(Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side
of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either
to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement.
Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,
LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The Outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL
will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage.
The fuse supervision is connected to ULNOK-ULNFF etc. and with alternative
Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available for each of fuse (MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other
side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are
possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
REL 670

461
Section 11
Control
The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1
circuit breaker is closed.
The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2
Circuit breaker is closed.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If
a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set.
This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This
output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.The
function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in
232 and for the tie circuit breaker in 233
462

REL 670
Section 11
Control
LN1QOPEN
LN1QCLD
LN1SEL
AND
B1QOPEN
B1QCLD
LN2SEL
AND
AND
LN2QCLD
AND
invalidSelection
AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND
line1Voltage
lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF
OR
UB2OK
UB2FF
OR
OR
ULN1OK
ULN1FF
OR
ULN2OK
ULN2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
USELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
en05000780.vsd
Figure 232:
REL 670
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

463
Section 11
Control
LN1QOPEN
LN1QCLD
LN1SEL
AND
B1SEL
1
B1QOPEN
B1QCLD
AND
AND
AND
line1Voltage
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2QCLD
LN2SEL
AND
B2SEL
1
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD
AND
AND
AND
OR
line2Voltage
invalidSelection
lineVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF
UB2OK
UB2FF
OR
AND
OR
OR
ULN1OK
ULN1FF
OR
ULN2OK
ULN2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
USELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
en05000781.vsd
Figure 233:
11.1.3
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.
Function block
The Synchrocheck function block is shown in 234. Tables describing the inputs,
outputs and setting parameters of this function are presented in the following sections
of this document. Refer to the Application manual for the use of inputs and outputs
in your particular application.
464

REL 670
Section 11
Control
SYN1SESRSYN_25
U3PBB1
U3PBB2
U3PLN1
U3PLN2
BLOCK
BLKSYNCH
BLKSC
BLKENERG
B1QOPEN
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD
LN1QOPEN
LN1QCLD
LN2QOPEN
LN2QCLD
UB1OK
UB1FF
UB2OK
UB2FF
ULN1OK
ULN1FF
ULN2OK
ULN2FF
STARTSYN
TSTSYNCH
TSTSC
TSTENERG
AENMODE
MENMODE
SYNOK
AUTOSYOK
AUTOENOK
MANSYOK
MANENOK
TSTSYNOK
TSTAUTSY
TSTMANSY
TSTENOK
USELFAIL
B1SEL
B2SEL
LN1SEL
LN2SEL
SYNPROGR
SYNFAIL
UOKSYN
UDIFFSYN
FRDIFSYN
FRDIFFOK
FRDERIVA
UOKSC
UDIFFSC
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
FRDIFFM
PHDIFFM
UDIFFME
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
en06000534.vsd
Figure 234:
11.1.4
SYN function block

Table 259:
Input signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block
Signal
Description
U3PBB1
Group signal for voltage input busbar 1
U3PBB2
Group signal for voltage input busbar 2
U3PLN1
Group signal for voltage input line 1
U3PLN2
Group signal for voltage input line 2
BLOCK
General block
BLKSYNCH
Block synchronizing
BLKSC
Block synchro check
BLKENERG
Block energizing check
B1QOPEN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B1QCLD
Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B2QOPEN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
B2QCLD
Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
LN1QOPEN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
REL 670

465
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
LN1QCLD
Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN2QOPEN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LN2QCLD
Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
UB1OK
Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF
Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK
Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF
Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK
Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF
Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK
Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF
Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN
Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH
Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC
Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG
Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE
Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE
Input for setting of manual energizing mode
Table 260:
Output signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block
Signal
Description
SYNOK
Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK
Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK
Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK
Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK
Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK
Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY
Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY
Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK
Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL
Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL
Bus1 selected
B2SEL
Bus2 selected
LN1SEL
Line1 selected
LN2SEL
Line2 selected
SYNPROGR
Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL
Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN
Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
UDIFFSYN
Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
466

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Signal
11.1.5
Description
FRDIFSYN
Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK
Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA
Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC
Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC
Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA
Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA
Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM
Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM
Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
UDIFFME
Calculated difference in voltage
FRDIFFME
Calculated difference in frequency
PHDIFFME
Calculated difference of phase angle
MODEAEN
Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN
Selected mode for manual energizing
Setting parameters
Table 261:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SelPhaseBus1
phase1
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
phase2
Select phase for bus1
SelPhaseBus2
phase1
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
phase2
Select phase for bus2
SelPhaseLine1
phase1
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
phase2
Select phase for line1
SelPhaseLine2
phase1
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
phase2
Select phase for line2
REL 670

467
Section 11
Control
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CBConfig
No voltage sel.
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
No voltage sel.
Select CB
configuration
UBase
0.001 - 9999.999
0.001
400.000
kV
Base voltage in kV
PhaseShift
-180 - 180
Deg
Phase shift
URatio
1.000
0.001
0.040 - 25.000
Voltage ratio
OperationSynch
Off
On
Off
Operation for
synchronizing
function Off/On
UHighBusSynch
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
Voltage high limit bus

for synchronizing in %
of UBase
UHighLineSynch
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
Voltage high limit line

for synchronizing in %
of UBase
UDiffSynch
2.0 - 50.0
1.0
10.0
%UB
Voltage difference
limit for synchronizing
in % of UBase
FreqDiffMin
0.003 - 0.250
0.001
0.010
Hz
Minimum frequency
difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax
0.050 - 0.250
0.001
0.200
Hz
Maximum frequency
difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange
0.000 - 0.500
0.001
0.300
Hz/s
Maximum allowed
frequency rate of
change
tBreaker
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.080
Closing time of the

breaker
tClosePulse
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Breaker closing pulse

duration
tMaxSynch
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
600.00
Resets synch if no
close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Minimum time to
accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC
Off
On
On
Operation for
synchronism check
function Off/On
UHighBusSC
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB

for synchrocheck in %
of UBase
UHighLineSC
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB

for synchrocheck in %
of UBase
UDiffSC
2.0 - 50.0
1.0
15.0
%UB
Voltage difference
limit in % of UBase
468

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Parameter
Default
Unit
FreqDiffA
Range
0.003 - 1.000
0.001
0.010
Hz
Frequency difference
limit between bus and
line Auto
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
0.001
0.010
Hz
Frequency difference
limit between bus and
line Manual
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
1.0
25.0
Deg
Phase angle
difference limit
between bus and line
Auto
PhaseDiffM
5.0 - 90.0
1.0
25.0
Deg
Phase angle
difference limit
Manual
tSCA
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay output for

synchrocheck Auto
tSCM
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100

synchrocheck Manual
AutoEnerg
Off
DLLB
DBLL
Both
DBLL
Automatic energizing
check mode
ManEnerg
Off
DLLB
DBLL
Both
Both
Manual energizing
check mode
ManEnergDBDL
Off
On
Off
Manual dead bus,

dead line energizing
UHighBusEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB

for energizing check
in % of UBase
UHighLineEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB

in % of UBase
ULowBusEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
1.0
40.0
%UB
Voltage low limit bus

in % of UBase
ULowLineEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
1.0
40.0
%UB
Voltage low limit line

in % of UBase
UMaxEnerg
50.0 - 180.0
1.0
115.0
%UB
Maximum voltage for

energizing in % of
UBase
tAutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay for

automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay for manual

energizing check
11.1.6
Technical data
REL 670

Step
Description
469
Section 11
Control
Table 262:
Synchronizing, synchrocheck check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)
Function
11.2
Range or value
Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus
Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline
(0.20-5.00)% of Ubase
Voltage high limit for

synchrocheck
(50.0-120.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur at U Ur
1.0% of U at U >Ur
Reset ratio, synchrocheck
> 95%
Frequency difference limit

(0.003-1.000) Hz
2.0 mHz
Phase angle difference limit

(5.0-90.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Voltage difference limit between

bus and line
(2.0-50.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur

synchrocheck
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Voltage high limit for energizing

check
(50.0-120.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur at U Ur
1.0% of U at U >Ur
Reset ratio, voltage high limit
> 95%
Voltage low limit for energizing

check
(10.0-80.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Reset ratio, voltage low limit
< 105%
Maximum voltage for energizing
(80.0-140.0)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur at U Ur
1.0% of U at U >Ur
Time delay for energizing check
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time for synchrocheck

function
160 ms typically
Operate time for energizing

function
80 ms typically
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Function block name: ARx--
ANSI number: 79
SMBRREC
11.2.1
O->I
Introduction
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for
single or multi-breaker applications.
470

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-,
two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively.
Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A
priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close
if the fault proved to be transient.
Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheck
function.
11.2.2
11.2.2.1
Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of
the functionality.
11.2.2.2
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters
and through external control. With the setting Operation=ON, the function is
activated while with the setting Operation=OFF the function is deactivated. With the
setting Operation=External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signal
pulses, for example from a control system.
When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).
Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At this
point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output
signal READY on the AR function block is activated (high).
11.2.2.3
Auto-reclosing mode selection

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode=3phase(0),1/2/3ph(1),
1/2ph(2),1ph+1*2ph(3),1/2ph+1*3ph(4)1ph+1*2+3ph(5) The selected mode can be
read as integer as per above list on output MODE.
As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, e.g.
from function block B16I (BAxx respBBxx) to input MODEINT
Following integers shall be used. 1=3phase,2=1/2/3ph,3=1/2ph,4=1ph+1*2ph,
5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 5=1ph+1*2/3ph.
When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input
MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.
REL 670

471
Section 11
Control
11.2.2.4
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle

The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a
line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Should
it be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for
different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection
stages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used.
For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met.
They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are: a) CBREADY, CB ready for a
reclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b) CBPOS to ensure that the CB was
closed when the line fault occurred and start was applied, c) No blocking or inhibit
signal shall be present. After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal
signal Started is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.
To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,
one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START and
set a parameter StartByCBOpen = ON and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally
closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip
commands to input INHIBIT.
The logic for switching the auto-recloser ON/OFF and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 235. The following should be considered.
472
Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers the
possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,
communication commands to the same inputs etc.
Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and
Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both
alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.
START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first
attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time
before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to
perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and
CBREADY.

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Operation:On
Operation:Off
Operation:External Ctrl
ON
AND
OFF
AND
START
STARTHS
OR
SETON
AND S
OR
OR
initiate
OR
autoInitiate
Additional conditions
TRSOTF
AND
start
120 ms
t
CBREADY
CBPOS
CB Closed
AND
AND S
AND
tCBClosedMin
R
t
AND
Blocking conditions
OR
AND
READY
Inhibit condistions
count 0
en05000782.vsd
Figure 235:
11.2.2.5
Auto-reclosing Off/On and start
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one
extension time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase autoreclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied,
and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the autoreclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated
in connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase
reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase highspeed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by
input STARTHS.
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal
shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time
difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time
can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended
t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.
REL 670

473
Section 11
Control
11.2.2.6
Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the
auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off. A long
trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input
INHIBIT.
Extended t1
PLCLOST
initiate
AND
OR
AND
AND
Extend t1
tTrip
t
start
AND
AND
long duration
(block AR)
en05000783.vsd
Figure 236:
Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
Reclosing checks and the reclaimreset timer
When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions
must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals
are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In
three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is
possible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an
external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing
function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can
be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchrocheck function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchrocheck, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on.
At single-phase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started
by STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is
disregarded.
By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the
readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing
command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready
for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the
474

REL 670
Section 11
Control
tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was

however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is
prepared for a Close-Open sequence.
The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time
interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted
and blocked.
The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which
the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as
a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing
command is given.
A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in
the reclosing sequence.
REL 670

475
Section 11
Control
t1 1Ph
t
From logic for

reclosing
programs
1P2PTO
3PHSTO
3PT1TO
3PT2TO
3PT3TO
3PT4TO
3PT5TO
SYNC
initiate
CBREADY
OR
t1 2Ph
t
t1 3Ph HS
t
3PHSTO
t1 3Ph
t
3PT1TO
AND
OR
LOGIC
reclosing
programs
start
initiate
OR
tSync
t
AND
Pulse AR (above)
Pulse AR
AND
AND
tReclaim
t
AND
1P2PTO
OR
AND
OR
TR2P
TR3P
"AR Open time" timers
Reclaim Timer On
Blocking
AR State
Control
COUNTER
0
CL
1
2
3
4
R
5
2PT1
3PT1
INPROGR
OR
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Y
INHIBIT
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
1PT1
3PHS
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
Blocking
OR
tInhibit
t
Inhibit
en05000784.vsd
Figure 237:
Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers
Pulsing of the CB closing command
The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter

tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting
described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter
476

REL 670
Section 11
Control
CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut
(interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 238
When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is
incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number
of reclosing commands issued.
pulse
tPulse
**)
AND
initiate
CLOSECB
OR
50 ms
1PT1
AND
2PT1
AND
3PT1
AND
3PT2
AND
3PT3
AND
3PT4
AND
3PT5
AND
RSTCOUNT
counter
COUNT1P
counter
COUNT2P
counter
COUNT3P1
counter
COUNT3P2
counter
COUNT3P3
counter
COUNT3P4
counter
COUNT3P5
counter
COUNTAR
**) Only if "CutPulse" = On

en05000785.vsd
Figure 238:
Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters
Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set
time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal
If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal START
or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The
timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the
number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will
REL 670

477
Section 11
Control
be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but
the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing.
Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.
Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after
the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The
signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also
be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should
then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not
respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output
UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
initiate
block start
AND
OR
AND
shot 0
UNSUCCL
UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
Pulse AR (Closing)
CBPOS
OR
CBclosed
tUnsucCl
AND
AND
eno5000786.vsd
Figure 239:
Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing
Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence
The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing

shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection
functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter
AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed
without a new start.
478

REL 670
Section 11
Control
tAutoContWait
t
AND
CLOSECB
AND
S Q
R
AND
CBPOS
CBClosed
OR
START
OR
initiate
en05000787.vsd
Figure 240:
Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5
StartInitiation of reclosing from CB open information
If a user wants to apply starting auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from
protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is
selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block
reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically one also set CBAuxContType =
NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b)
to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open
an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function,
subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs
to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent
reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.
REL 670

479
Section 11
Control
StartByCBOpen = On
1
START
AND
STARTHS
AND
100 ms
start
AND
100 ms
AND
en05000788.vsd
Figure 241:
11.2.2.7
Pulsing of the start inputs at "StartByCBOpen=On"
Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and
permanent faults are shown below in figures 242 to 245.
Fault
CB POS
Closed
Open
Closed
CB READY
START
SYNC
(Trip)
tReclaim
READY
INPROG
1PT1
ACTIVE
t1 1Ph
CLOSE CB
tPulse
PREP3P
SUCCL
Time
en04000196.vsd
Figure 242:
480
Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Fault
CB POS
Closed
Open
START
Open
CB READY
(Trip)
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
3PT1
t1 3Ph
3PT2
t2 3Ph
tReclaim
ACTIVE
CLOSE CB
tPulse
tPulse
PREP3P
UNSUCCL
Time
en04000197.vsd
Figure 243:
REL 670
Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing

481
Section 11
Control
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
AR01-START
AR01-TR3P
AR01-SYNC
AR01-READY
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-1PT1
AR01-T1
AR01-T2
t1s
AR01-CLOSECB
AR01-P3P
AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim
en04000198.vsd
Figure 244:
Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase

single-shot reclosing
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
AR01-START
AR01-TR3P
AR01-SYNC
AR01-READY
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-1PT1
AR01-T1
AR01-T2
t1s
AR01-CLOSECB
t2
AR01-P3P
AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim
en04000199.vsd
Figure 245:
482
Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,

two-shot reclosing

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.2.3
Function block
AR01SMBRREC_79
ON
BLOCKED
OFF
SETON
BLKON
READY
BLKOFF
ACTIVE
RESET
SUCCL
INHIBIT
UNSUCCL
START
INPROGR
STARTHS
1PT1
TRSOTF
2PT1
SKIPHS
3PT1
ZONESTEP
3PT2
TR2P
3PT3
TR3P
3PT4
THOLHOLD
3PT5
CBREADY
PERMIT1P
CBPOS
PREP3P
PLCLOST
CLOSECB
SYNC
WFMASTER
WAIT
COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT
COUNT2P
MODEINT
COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE
en06000189.vsd
Figure 246:
11.2.4
AR function block

Table 263:
Input signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal
Description
ON
Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
OFF
Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
BLKON
Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF
Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET
Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT
Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START
Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal
STARTHS
Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF
Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF
SKIPHS
Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots
ZONESTEP
Coordination between local AR and down stream devices
TR2P
Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P
Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred
THOLHOLD
Hold the AR in wait state
CBREADY
CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close
REL 670

483
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
CBPOS
Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST
Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal lost
SYNC
Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT
Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT
Resets all counters
MODEINT
Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative to

setting
Table 264:
Output signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal
484
Description
BLOCKED
The AR is in blocked state
SETON
The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY
Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE
Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL
Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL
Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time
INPROGR
Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time
1PT1
Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1
Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1
Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
PERMIT1P
Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P
Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation
CLOSECB
Closing command for CB
WFMASTER
Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing
COUNT1P
Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P
Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1
Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE
Integer output for reclosing mode

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 265:
Parameter
REL 670
Basic parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
External ctrl
On
External ctrl
Off, ExternalCtrl, On
ARMode
3 phase
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
1/2/3ph
The AR mode
selection e.g. 3ph,
1/3ph
t1 1Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Open time for shot 1,

single-phase
t1 3Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000

delayed reclosing 3ph
t1 3PhHS
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

high speed reclosing
3ph
tReclaim
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Duration of the
reclaim time
tSync
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Maximum wait time

for synchrocheck OK
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Maximum trip pulse

duration
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Duration of the circuit

breaker closing pulse
tCBClosedMin
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
Min time that CB must

be closed before new
sequence allows
tUnsucCl
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Wait time for CB

before indicating
Unsuccessful/
Successful
Priority
None
Low
High
None
Priority selection
between adjacent
terminals None/Low/
High
tWaitForMaster
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Maximum wait time

for release from
Master

485
Section 11
Control
Table 266:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
NoOfShots
1
2
3
4
5
Max number of
reclosing shots 1-5
StartByCBOpen
Off
On
Off
To be set ON if AR is
to be started by CB
open position
CBAuxContType
NormClosed
NormOpen
NormOpen
Select the CB aux

contact type NC/NO
for CBPOS input
CBReadyType
CO
OCO
CO
Select type of circuit

breaker ready signal
CO/OCO
t1 2Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000

two-phase
t2 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00

three-phase
t3 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00

three-phase
t4 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00

three-phase
t5 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00

three-phase
Extended t1
Off
On
Off
Extended open time

at loss of permissive
channel Off/On
tExtended t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
3Ph Dead time is

extended with this
value at loss of perm
ch
tInhibit
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Inhibit reclosing reset

time
CutPulse
Off
On
Off
Shorten closing pulse

at a new trip Off/On
Follow CB
Off
On
Off
Advance to next shot

if CB has been closed
during dead time
AutoCont
Off
On
Off
Continue with next

reclosing-shot if
breaker did not close
tAutoContWait
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Wait time after close

command before
proceeding to next
shot
486

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Parameter
11.2.6
Range
Default
Unit
Description
NoCBCheck
CB check
NoCBCheck
Unsuccessful closing
signal obtained by
checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl
Off
On
Off
Block AR at
unsuccessful
reclosing
ZoneSeqCoord
Off
On
Off
Coordination of down
stream devices to
local prot unit's AR
Technical data
Table 267:
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots
1-5
Number of autoreclosing programs
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Autoreclosing open time:

shot 1 - t1 1Ph
shot 1 - t1 2Ph
shot 1 - t1 3PhHS
shot 1 - t1 3PhDld
REL 670
Step
UnsucClByCBChk
shot 2 - t2
shot 3 - t3
shot 4 - t4
shot 5 - t5
(0.00-6000.00) s
Extended autorecloser open time
(0.000-60.000) s
Autorecloser maximum wait time for

sync
(0.00-6000.00) s
Maximum trip pulse duration
(0.000-60.000) s
Inhibit reset time
(0.000-60.000) s
Reclaim time
(0.00-6000.00) s
Minimum time CB must be closed

before AR becomes ready for
autoreclosing cycle
(0.00-6000.00) s
Circuit breaker closing pulse length
(0.000-60.000) s
CB check time before unsuccessful
(0.00-6000.00) s
Wait for master release
(0.00-6000.00) s
Wait time after close command before

proceeding to next shot
(0.000-60.000) s

487
Section 11
Control
11.3
Apparatus control (APC)
11.3.1
Introduction
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck,
operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
11.3.2
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor
bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the
apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic
sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation
Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles
the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process
information used by higher-level control functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised
by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals
connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is
used to handle these two types of apparatuses.
The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an
interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of
interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is
intended for a disconnector or earthing switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks
are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These
function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard
configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These
four types are:
Bay control QCBAY

Switch controller SCSWI
Circuit breaker SXCBR
Circuit switch SXSWI
The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The function
blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl, to handle the local/remote switch, and the
function blocks QCRSV and RESIN, for the reservation function, also belong to the
apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and
output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
488

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.3.3
Bay control (QCBAY)
11.3.3.1
Introduction
This function is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The bay
control function also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.
11.3.3.2
The functionality of the bay control function is not defined in the IEC 6185081
standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay e.g. switch control functions,
voltage control functions and measurement functions.
Local panel switch
The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions
are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote
level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is normally situated on
the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its
validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch
is mounted separately on the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O
boards.
When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local
level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO
output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl are needed and connected to
QCBAY. For more information, see section "Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote,
LocRemControl)".
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)
The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to table 268. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that
affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LRswitch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), i.e. it is
permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the
external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of
switch, i.e. 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
REL 670

489
Section 11
Control
Table 268:
PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel switch

positions
PSTO value
AllPSTOValid
(configuration
parameter)
Possible locations that shall be able to

operate
0 = Off
--
Not possible to operate
1 = Local
FALSE
Local Panel
1 = Local
TRUE
Local or Remote level without any priority
2 = Remote
FALSE
Remote level
2 = Remote
TRUE
Local or Remote level without any priority
3 = Faulty
--
Not possible to operate
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
6185081). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.
11.3.3.3
Function block
CB01QCBAY
LR_OFF
LR_LOC
LR_REM
LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
PSTO
UPD_BLKD
CMD_BLKD
en05000796.vsd
Figure 247:
490
CB function block

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.3.3.4

Table 269:
Input signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block
Signal
Description
LR_OFF
External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC
External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM
External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID
Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD
Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD
Steady signal to block the command
Table 270:
Output signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block
Signal
11.3.3.5
Description
PSTO
The value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD
The update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD
The function is blocked for commands
Setting parameters
Table 271:
Parameter
AllPSTOValid
General settings for the QCBAY (CB01-) function

Range
Priority
No priority
Step
-
Default
Priority
Unit
-
Description
The priority of
originators
11.3.4
Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)
11.3.4.1
Introduction
The signals from the local LCD HMI or from an external local/remote switch are
applied via function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl to the Bay control
QCBAY function block. A parameter in function block LocalRemote is set to choose
if the switch signals are coming from the local LCD HMI or from an external hardware
switch connected via binary inputs.
11.3.4.2
The function block LocalRemote handles the signals coming from the local/remote
switch. The connections are seen in figure 248, where the inputs on function block
LocalRemote are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When a
local LCD HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the
REL 670

491
Section 11
Control
configuration. The outputs from the LocalRemote function block control the output
PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on QCBAY.
LR01LocalRemote
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
CB01QCBAY
LR_OFF
PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
LR02LocalRemote
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
CB02QCBAY
LR_OFF
PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
LRC1LocRemControl
PSTO1
HMICTR1
PSTO2
HMICTR2
PSTO3
HMICTR3
PSTO4
HMICTR4
PSTO5
HMICTR5
PSTO6
HMICTR6
PSTO7
HMICTR7
PSTO8
HMICTR8
PSTO9
HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12
en05000250.vsd
Figure 248:
Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local LCD HMI with
two bays and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local LCD HMI is used the position of
the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram
screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block LocRemControl
controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay
and screen page.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.
11.3.4.3
Function block
492

REL 670
Section 11
Control
LR01LocalRemote
CT RLOFF
OFF
LOCCT RL
LOCAL
REMCT RL
REMOT E
LHMICT RL
VALID
en05000360.vsd
Figure 249:
LR function block
LRC1LocRemControl
PST O1
HMICT R1
PST O2
HMICT R2
PST O3
HMICT R3
PST O4
HMICT R4
PST O5
HMICT R5
PST O6
HMICT R6
PST O7
HMICT R7
PST O8
HMICT R8
PST O9
HMICT R9
PST O10
HMICT R10
PST O11
HMICT R11
PST O12
HMICT R12
en05000361.vsd
Figure 250:
11.3.4.4
LRC function block

Table 272:
Input signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block
Signal
Description
CTRLOFF
Disable control
LOCCTRL
Local in control
REMCTRL
Remote in control
LHMICTRL
LHMI control
Table 273:
Output signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
OFF
Control is disabled
LOCAL
Local control is activated
REMOTE
Remote control is activated
VALID
Outputs are valid

493
Section 11
Control
Table 274:
Input signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block
Signal
Description
PSTO1
PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2
PSTO3
PSTO4
PSTO5
PSTO6
PSTO7
PSTO8
PSTO9
PSTO10
PSTO11
PSTO12
Table 275:
Output signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block
Signal
11.3.4.5
Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2
HMICTR3
HMICTR4
HMICTR5
HMICTR6
HMICTR7
HMICTR8
HMICTR9
HMICTR10
HMICTR11
HMICTR12
Setting parameters
Table 276:
Parameter
ControlMode
494
Description
HMICTR1
Basic general settings for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function

Range
Internal LR-switch
External LRswitch

Step
-
Default
Internal LR-switch
Unit
-
Description
Control mode for
internal/external LRswitch
REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.3.5
Switch controller (SCSWI)
11.3.5.1
Introduction
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices.
11.3.5.2
The function is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence,
i.e. checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for
these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and
synchrocheck.
Command handling
Two types of command models can be used. The two command models are "direct
with enhanced security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security".
Which one of these two command models that are used is defined by the parameter
CtlModel. The meaning with "direct with enhanced security" model is that no select
is required. The meaning with "SBO with enhanced security" model is that a select
is required before execute.
In this function only commands with enhanced security is supported regarding
changing of the position. With enhanced security means that the command sequence
is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision
of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step
in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the
command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the
enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the
IEC61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function
block and used for example at commissioning. The meaning of the cause signals can
be found in table 2.
There is not any relation between the command direction and the
actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is
possible to execute a close command.
Before an executing command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter
PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no
executing command is send. If the parameter is false the execution command is send
independent of the position value.
Evaluation of position
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
REL 670

495
Section 11
Control
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position:
switch control position = open
All switches in close position:
switch control position = close
One switch =open, two switches= close (or

inversely):
switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in intermediate position:
switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and
is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, i.e. the position
of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting
tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values
from the switch modules XCBR/XSWI. At error the "cause" value with highest
priority is shown.
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:
Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior
(IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, i.e. no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.
Interaction with synchrochecksynchronism-check and synchronizing

functions
The switch controller works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the
synchronizing function SECRSYN. It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is
496

REL 670
Section 11
Control
continuously in operation and gives the result to the SCSWI. The result from the
synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state
is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function,
the switch controller SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function
SXCBR.
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the SCSWI
will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send
the closing command to the SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled,
see figure 251. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of
the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. The SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-bysynchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 255.
SCSWI
EXE_CL
SXCBR
OR
CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
SY_INPRO
SECRSYN
CLOSE. CB
Synchro
Check
Synchronizing
function
en05000091.vsd
Figure 251:
Example of interaction between SCSWI, SECRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams
The SCSWI function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions.
These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution
after the selection of the object to operate.
REL 670

497
Section 11
Control
select
execute command
tSelect
timer
t1
t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause'

is set
en05000092.vsd
Figure 252:
tSelect
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, i.e. the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT
command termination
tResResponse
timer
t1
t1>tResResponse, then
1-of-n-control in 'cause'
is set
en05000093.vsd
Figure 253:
tResResponse
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see figure 254.
498

REL 670
Section 11
Control
execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination
position
open
close
tExecutionFB
timer
t1>tExecutionFB, then
long-operation-time in
'cause' is set
t1
* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094.vsd
Figure 254:
tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing
t2
t2>tSynchronizing, then
blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
Figure 255:
REL 670
tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

499
Section 11
Control
Error handling
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 277 describes vendor specific cause values in addition
to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 277:
Values for "cause" signal in priority order
Apparatus control
function
11.3.5.3
Description
22
wrongCTLModel
23
blockedForCommand
24
blocked-for-open-command
25
blocked-for-close-command
30
longOperationTime
31
switch-not-start-moving
32
persistent-intermediate-state
33
switch-returned-to-initial-position
34
switch-in-bad-state
35
not-expected-final-position
Function block
CS01SCSWI
BLOCK
PSTO
L_SEL
L_OPEN
L_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
BL_CMD
RES_GRT
RES_EXT
SY_INPRO
SYNC_OK
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS1
XPOS2
XPOS3
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SELECTED
RES_RQ
START_SY
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
POLEDISC
CMD_BLK
L_CAUSE
XOUT
en05000337.vsd
Figure 256:
CS function block
11.3.5.4
500

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 278:
Input signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
PSTO
Operator place selection
L_SEL
Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN
Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE
Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN
Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE
Used for local automation function
BL_CMD
Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT
Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT
Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO
Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK
Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck
EN_OPEN
Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE
Enables close operation
XPOS1
Group signal for XCBR input
XPOS2
XPOS3
Table 279:
Output signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block
Signal
Description
EXE_OP
Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL
Execute command for close direction
SELECTED
The select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ
Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY
Starts the synchronizing function
POSITION
Position indication
OPENPOS
Open position indication
CLOSEPOS
Closed position indication
POLEDISC
The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time
CMD_BLK
Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE
Latest value of the error indication during command
XOUT
Execution information to XCBR/XSWI
11.3.5.5
Setting parameters
REL 670

501
Section 11
Control
Table 280:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the SCSWI (CS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh (ABB)
Dir Norm (ABB)
SBO Enh
SBO Enh
Specifies the type for

control model
according to IEC
61850
PosDependent
Always permitted
Not perm at 00/11
Always permitted
Permission to operate
depending on the
position
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
Max time between

select and execute
signals
tResResponse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Allowed time from

reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
Allowed time for

synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Supervision time to
get the signal
synchronizing in
progress
tExecutionFB
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
Max time from

command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Allowed time to have

discrepancy between
the poles
11.3.6
Circuit breaker (SXCBR)
11.3.6.1
Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form
of circuit breakers via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and
position.
11.3.6.2
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller,
protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another
IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block
conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate
"cause" value.
502

REL 670
Section 11
Control
The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The
counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from
a binary input or remotely from the operator place.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level.
If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions
are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 257.
TR
From I/O
UE
Local= Operation at
switch yard level
switchLR
FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
Figure 257:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place,
protection functions, autoreclosure etc.
The blocking possibilities are:
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate
command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
REL 670

503
Section 11
Control
Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will
then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by
the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the
position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating
and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted
values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 258 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
EXE_CL
Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove
tIntermediate timer
t2
if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
Figure 258:
The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 259 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute
output pulses.
504

REL 670
Section 11
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
Figure 259:
Execute output pulse
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and
CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has
elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that
the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is
shown in figure 260 .
REL 670

505
Section 11
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Figure 260:
Open command with open position indication
Error handling
Table 281:
Apparatus control
function
506
Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order

Description
22
wrongCTLModel
23
blockedForCommand
24
25
30
longOperationTime
31
32
33
34
switch-in-bad-state
35

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.3.6.3
Function block
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
TR_OPEN
TR_CLOSE
RS_CNT
XIN
TERVALUE
OSEVALUE
PENVALUE
XC01SXCBR
GRPConABS1
EXE_OP
GRPConABS2
EXE_CL
SUBSTED
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
TR_POS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
en05000338.vsd
Figure 261:
11.3.6.4
XC function block

Table 282:
Input signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
LR_SWI
Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN
Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE
Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN
Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE
Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD
Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN
Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE
Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN
Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE
Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT
Resets the operation counter
XIN
Execution information from CSWI
Table 283:
Output signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block
Signal
Description
XPOS
Group signal for XCBR output
EXE_OP
Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL
Executes the command for close direction
REL 670

507
Section 11
Control
Signal
11.3.6.5
Description
SUBSTED
Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD
Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD
Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD
The update of position indication is blocked
POSITION
Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS
Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS
Apparatus closed position
TR_POS
Truck position indication
CNT_VAL
The value of the operation counter
L_CAUSE
Setting parameters
Table 284:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the SXCBR (XC01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Supervision time for

the apparatus to
move after a
command
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Allowed time for

intermediate position
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
The output resets

when a new correct
end position is
reached
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length

for open command
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length

for close command
11.3.7
Circuit switch (SXSWI)
11.3.7.1
Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form
of disconnectors or earthing switches via output boards and to supervise the switching
operation and position.
11.3.7.2
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller,
protection functions, autorecloser function or a 61850 client residing in another IED
508

REL 670
Section 11
Control
or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block
conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate
"cause" value.
The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The
counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from
a binary input or remotely from the operator place.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level.
If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions
are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 262.
TR
From I/O
UE
Local= Operation at
switch yard level
switchLR
FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
Figure 262:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place,
protection functions, autoreclosure etc.
The blocking possibilities are:
REL 670
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate
command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.

509
Section 11
Control
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will
then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by
the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the
position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating
and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted
values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 263 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
EXE_CL
Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove
tIntermediate timer
t2
if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
Figure 263:
The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 264 shows the principle of
510

REL 670
Section 11
Control
the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute
output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
Figure 264:
Execute output pulse
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and
CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has
elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that
the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is
shown in figure 265.
REL 670

511
Section 11
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Figure 265:
Open command with open position indication
Error handling
Table 285:
Apparatus control
function
512
Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Description
22
wrongCTLModel
23
blockedForCommand
24
25
30
longOperationTime
31
32
33
34
switch-in-bad-state
35

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.3.7.3
Function block
XS01SXSWI
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
RS_CNT
XIN
XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SUBSTED
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
en05000339.vsd
Figure 266:
11.3.7.4
XS function block

Table 286:
Input signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
LR_SWI
Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN
Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE
Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN
Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE
Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD
Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN
Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE
Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
RS_CNT
Resets the operation counter
XIN
Execution information from CSWI
Table 287:
Output signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block
Signal
Description
XPOS
Group signal for XSWI output
EXE_OP
Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL
Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED
Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD
Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD
Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD
The update of position indication is blocked
REL 670

513
Section 11
Control
Signal
11.3.7.5
Description
POSITION
Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS
Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS
Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL
The value of the operation counter
L_CAUSE
Setting parameters
Table 288:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the SXSWI (XS01-) function

Default
Unit
tStartMove
Range
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000

the apparatus to
move after a
command
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
15.000
Allowed time for

intermediate position
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
The output resets

when a new correct
end position is
reached
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length

for open command
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length

for close command
SwitchType
Load Break
Disconnector
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing
Switch
Disconnector
Switch Type
11.3.8
Bay reserve (QCRSV)
11.3.8.1
Introduction
Step
Description
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.
11.3.8.2
The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. The function starts to operate in
two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there
is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function
if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input
signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller SCWI. The signals for
514

REL 670
Section 11
Control
request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function
block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are
connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.
Reservation request of own bay
If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know
which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input
signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the
requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay
can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by
itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED.
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch
controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset
and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation of other bays
When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that
requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it
will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for
their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by
activating the output RES_BAYS.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation request from another bay
When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into
the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA
in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the
acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay
already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.
Blocking and overriding of reservation
If the function QCRSV is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is
blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This
can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE
input signal, i.e. reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.
REL 670

515
Section 11
Control
Bay with more than eight apparatuses
If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay i.e. use of up to eight apparatuses,
the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The both functions QCRSV have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 10. If more then one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
CR01QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
CR02QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
en05000088.vsd
Figure 267:
516
Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.3.8.3
Function block
CR01QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_RQ1
RES_RQ2
RES_RQ3
RES_RQ4
RES_RQ5
RES_RQ6
RES_RQ7
RES_RQ8
BLK_RES
OVERRIDE
RES_DAT A
RES_GRT 1
RES_GRT 2
RES_GRT 3
RES_GRT 4
RES_GRT 5
RES_GRT 6
RES_GRT 7
RES_GRT 8
RES_BAYS
ACK_T O_B
RESERVED
EXCH_OUT
en05000340.vsd
Figure 268:
11.3.8.4
CR function block

Table 289:
Input signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block
Signal
Description
EXCH_IN
Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1
Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2
RES_RQ3
RES_RQ4
RES_RQ5
RES_RQ6
RES_RQ7
RES_RQ8
BLK_RES
Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset
OVERRIDE
Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA
Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
Table 290:
Output signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block
Signal
Description
RES_GRT1
Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT2
RES_GRT3
RES_GRT4
RES_GRT5
RES_GRT6
RES_GRT7
REL 670

517
Section 11
Control
Signal
11.3.8.5
RES_BAYS
Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B
Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED
Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT
Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
Setting parameters
Table 291:
Parameter
518
Description
RES_GRT8
General settings for the QCRSV (CR01-) function

Default
Unit
tCancelRes
Range
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000

canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the
own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
1
ParamRequest2
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the
own bay only, at
2
ParamRequest3
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the
own bay only, at
3
ParamRequest4
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the
own bay only, at
4
ParamRequest5
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the
own bay only, at
5
ParamRequest6
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the
own bay only, at
6
ParamRequest7
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the
own bay only, at
7
ParamRequest8
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the
own bay only, at
8

Step
Description
REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.3.9
Reservation input (RESIN)
11.3.9.1
Introduction
The function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The
number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances
are available).
11.3.9.2
The reservation input function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic
diagram in figure 269 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the
function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals
transferred over the station bus from another bay.
EXCH_IN
INT
BIN
ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
1
ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK
VALID_TX
&
1
BAY_VAL
RE_RQ_B
&
BAY_RES
V _RE_RQ
BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT
en05000089.vsd
Figure 269:
Logic diagram for RESIN
Figure 270 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules
in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the
reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions
block are connected to the module QCRSV that handles the reservation function in
the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain
REL 670

519
Section 11
Control
has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the
function block RESIN (RE01-), where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden
for the user.
RE01RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay 1
RE02RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay 2
REnnRESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay n
CR01QCRSV
RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
Figure 270:
11.3.9.3
Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN
Function block
RE01RESIN
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES
ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
en05000341.vsd
Figure 271:
11.3.9.4
RE function block

Table 292:
Input signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block
Signal
520
Description
BAY_ACK
Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay
BAY_VAL
The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid
BAY_RES
Request from other bay to reserve this bay

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 293:
Output signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block
Signal
11.3.9.5
Description
ACK_F_B
All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
ANY_ACK
Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
VALID_TX
The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid
RE_RQ_B
Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ
Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT
Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks
Setting parameters
Table 294:
Basic general settings for the RESIN (RE01-) function
Parameter
FutureUse
Range
Bay in use
Bay future use
11.4
Interlocking
11.4.1
Introduction
Step
-
Default
Bay in use
Unit
-
Description
The bay for this ResIn
block is for future use
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching

devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The function is distributed to each control
IED and not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
installation at any given time.
11.4.2
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED.
The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section "Apparatus control (APC)") is used to ensure
that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap,
which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the
communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the
REL 670

521
Section 11
Control
interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until

the operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching
devices that may affect it.
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay.
The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and
the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:
Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
External release (to add special conditions for release)
Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
Output signals to release the HV apparatus
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 272.
Interlocking
modules in
other bays
Interlocking
module
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXCBR
Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd
Figure 272:
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
Interlocking module on bay level.
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:
522
Unearthed busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Figure 273 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Station bus
Bay 1
Bay n
WA1 not earthed

WA2 not earthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn
Bus coupler
Disc QB1 and QB2 closed
Disc QB1 and QB2 closed
...
..
WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 not earthed

WA2 not earthed

in other bay
WA1
WA2
QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
QA1
QA1
QB9
QB9
QB2
QB1
QC1
QC2
QA1
en05000494.vsd
Figure 273:
Data exchange between interlocking modules.
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.
On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:
REL 670
The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and

earthing switches are always identical.
Earthing switches on the line feeder end, e.g. rapid earthing switches, are
normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they
are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line
voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no
line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set
to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections e.g. without load/
voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, i.e. the status
of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is
concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit
breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed
connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely
isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections,
or if they are earthed on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

523
Section 11
Control
switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between

CB and transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.
To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:
Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customers specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM 600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these
specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending
in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
11.4.3
Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)
11.4.3.1
Introduction
The function SCILO is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking
conditions permit. The function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality.
The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the
interlocking logic.
11.4.3.2
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined
end position e.g. open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is
false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time
only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the
interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit
breaker/switch SXCBR/SXSWI and the enable signals come from the interlocking
logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI. One
instance per switching device is needed.
524

REL 670
Section 11
Control
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
SCILO
=1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
&
&
Figure 274:
11.4.3.3
>1
EN_CLOSE
en04000525.vsd
SCILO function logic diagram
Function block
CI01SCILO
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
en05000359.vsd
Figure 275:
11.4.3.4
CI function block

Table 295:
Input signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block
Signal
Description
POSOPEN
Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE
Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN
Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN
Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
Table 296:
Output signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
EN_OPEN
Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
EN_CLOSE
Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled

525
Section 11
Control
11.4.4
Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE)
11.4.4.1
Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_LINE is used for a line connected to a double busbar
arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 276. The module can also be
used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar
arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1
QB2
QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
QB9
QC9
en04000478.vsd
Figure 276:
526
Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.4.4.2
Function block
IF01ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLIT L
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9IT L
QB1_OP
QB1REL
QB1_CL
QB1IT L
QB2_OP
QB2REL
QB2_CL
QB2IT L
QB7_OP
QB7REL
QB7_CL
QB7IT L
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1IT L
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2IT L
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9IT L
QC11_OP
QB1OPT R
QC11_CL
QB1CLT R
QC21_OP
QB2OPT R
QC21_CL
QB2CLT R
QC71_OP
QB7OPT R
QC71_CL
QB7CLT R
BB7_D_OP
QB12OPT R
BC_12_CL
QB12CLT R
BC_17_OP
VPQB1T R
BC_17_CL
VPQB2T R
BC_27_OP
VPQB7T R
BC_27_CL
VPQB12T R
VOLT _OFF
VOLT _ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4
en05000357.vsd
Figure 277:
REL 670
IF function block

527
Section 11
Control
11.4.4.3
Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2
ABC_LINE
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB9
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQB7
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC9
=1
VPQC11
=1
VPQC21
=1
VPQC71
=1
VPVOLT
&
&
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB9REL
QB9ITL
>1
1
&
en04000527.vsd
528

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
&
VPQB2
&
QB1REL
1
1
QB1ITL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
&
QB1EX3
en04000528.vsd
REL 670

529
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
&
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
&
VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
&
QB2REL
1
1
QB2ITL
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
en04000529.vsd
530

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
VP_BB7_D
QB7REL
>1
1
QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
&
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX2
REL 670

531
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
&
>1
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB9
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB7_OP
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
&
&
1
1
&
1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
en04000531.vsd
532

REL 670
Section 11
Control
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
VPQB7
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
VPQB7TR
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
>1
&
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR
en04000532.vsd
11.4.4.4

Table 297:
Input signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1_OP
QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL
QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP
QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL
QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QC1_OP
QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL
QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QC11_OP
Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL
Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
REL 670

533
Section 11
Control
Signal
534
Description
QC71_CL
BB7_D_OP
Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are

open
BC_12_CL
A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and

WA2
BC_17_OP
No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and

WA7
BC_17_CL

WA7
BC_27_OP
No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and

WA7
BC_27_CL

WA7
VOLT_OFF
There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
VP_BB7_D
Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12
Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
VP_BC_17
valid
VP_BC_27
valid
EXDU_ES
No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_BPB
No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7
EXDU_BC
No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1
External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 298:
Output signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1CLREL
Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL
Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL
Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL
Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QB7REL
QB7ITL
QC1REL
Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL
Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
QB12OPTR
QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR
QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR
Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR
VPQB7TR
VPQB12TR
Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
11.4.5
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)
11.4.5.1
Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_BC is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double
busbar arrangement according to figure 278. The module can also be used for a single
busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without
transfer busbar.
REL 670

535
Section 11
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1
QB2
QB20
QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
en04000514.vsd
Figure 278:
11.4.5.2
Switchyard layout ABC_BC
Function block
IG01ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QB20_OP
QB20_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
BBT R_OP
BC_12_CL
VP_BBT R
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_12
EXDU_BC
QA1O_EX1
QA1O_EX2
QA1O_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB20_EX1
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QA1OPREL
QA1OPIT L
QA1CLREL
QA1CLIT L
QB1REL
QB1IT L
QB2REL
QB2IT L
QB7REL
QB7IT L
QB20REL
QB20IT L
QC1REL
QC1IT L
QC2REL
QC2IT L
QB1OPT R
QB1CLT R
QB220OT R
QB220CT R
QB7OPT R
QB7CLT R
QB12OPT R
QB12CLT R
BC12OPT R
BC12CLT R
BC17OPT R
BC17CLT R
BC27OPT R
BC27CLT R
VPQB1T R
VQB220T R
VPQB7T R
VPQB12T R
VPBC12T R
VPBC17T R
VPBC27T R
en05000350.vsd
Figure 279:
536
IG function block

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.4.5.3
Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB20_OP
QB20_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
VPQB1
QB1_OP
QA1O_EX1
VPQB20
QB20_OP
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
ABC_BC
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB20
=1
VPQB7
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC11
=1
VPQC21
=1
VPQC71
&
>1
1
QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL
&
&
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB7
VPQB20
&
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
en04000533.vsd
REL 670

537
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL
QB1ITL
&
&
en04000534.vsd
538

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL
QB2ITL
&
&
en04000535.vsd
REL 670

539
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQB20
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2
&
>1
1
QB7REL
QB7ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB20REL
QB20ITL
&
en04000536.vsd
540

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQB1
VPQB20
VPQB7
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB20
VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
VPQB7
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QB20_OP
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQB20
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QB7_OP
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQB7
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QB7_OP
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQB7
&
1
1
&
&
>1
&
>1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB220OTR
QB220CTR
VQB220TR
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
VPQB7TR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
VPBC12TR
&
>1
BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
VPBC17TR
&
>1
BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPBC27TR
&
en04000537.vsd
11.4.5.4

Table 299:
Input signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
REL 670

541
Section 11
Control
Signal
542
Description
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QB20_OP
QB20_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
BBTR_OP
No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL

WA2
VP_BBTR
Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
VP_BC_12
valid
EXDU_ES
EXDU_12
No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2

busbars
EXDU_BC
No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
QA1O_EX1
External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2
QA1O_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB20_EX1
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 300:
Output signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1OPREL
Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL
Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QB7REL
QB7ITL
QB20REL
QB20ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
QB220OTR
QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR
QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
BC12OPTR
No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and

WA2
BC12CLTR
Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR

WA7
BC17CLTR
BC27OPTR

WA7
BC27CLTR
VPQB1TR
VQB220TR
VPQB7TR
VPQB12TR
REL 670

543
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
VPBC12TR
valid
VPBC17TR
valid
VPBC27TR
valid
11.4.6
Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)
11.4.6.1
Introduction
The interlocking module AB_TRAFO is used for a transformer bay connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 280. The module is used when there
is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the module
ABC_LINE can be used. This module can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1
QB2
QC1
QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2
T
QC3
QA2
QC4
QB3
QA2 and QC4 are not

used in this interlocking
QB4
en04000515.vsd
Figure 280:
544
Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.4.6.2
Function block
IE01AB_TRAFO
QA1CLREL
QA1CLIT L
QB1REL
QB1IT L
QB2REL
QB2IT L
QC1REL
QC1IT L
QC2REL
QC2IT L
QB1OPT R
QB1CLT R
QB2OPT R
QB2CLT R
QB12OPT R
QB12CLT R
VPQB1T R
VPQB2T R
VPQB12T R
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB3_OP
QB3_CL
QB4_OP
QB4_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
en05000358.vsd
Figure 281:
REL 670
IE function block

545
Section 11
Control
11.4.6.3
Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB3_OP
QB3_CL
QB4_OP
QB4_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QA1_EX1
AB_TRAFO
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQB3
=1
VPQB4
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPQC11
=1
VPQC21
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
&
>1
&
en04000538.vsd
546

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL
QB1ITL
&
&
en04000539.vsd
REL 670

547
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL
QB2ITL
&
&
en04000540.vsd
548

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB3
VPQB4
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
11.4.6.4
&
1
1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR
>1
&
en04000541.vsd

Table 301:
Input signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB3_OP
QB3_CL
QB4_OP
QB4_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL
QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP
QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL
QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
REL 670

549
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
BC_12_CL

WA2
VP_BC_12
valid
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1
External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
Table 302:
Output signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block
Signal
550
Description
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB1TR
VPQB2TR
VPQB12TR

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.4.7
Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)
11.4.7.1
Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_BS is used for one bus-section circuit breaker
between section 1 and 2 according to figure 282. The module can be used for different
busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA2 (A2)
WA1 (A1)
QB1
QC1
QB2
QC2
QA1
QC3
QC4
A1A2_BS
Figure 282:
11.4.7.2
en04000516.vsd
Switchyard layout A1A2_BS
Function block
IH01A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1OPREL
QA1_CL
QA1OPIT L
QB1_OP
QA1CLREL
QB1_CL
QA1CLIT L
QB2_OP
QB1REL
QB2_CL
QB1IT L
QC3_OP
QB2REL
QC3_CL
QB2IT L
QC4_OP
QC3REL
QC4_CL
QC3IT L
S1QC1_OP
QC4REL
S1QC1_CL
QC4IT L
S2QC2_OP
S1S2OPT R
S2QC2_CL
S1S2CLT R
BBT R_OP
QB1OPT R
VP_BBT R
QB1CLT R
EXDU_12
QB2OPT R
EXDU_ES
QB2CLT R
QA1O_EX1
VPS1S2T R
QA1O_EX2
VPQB1T R
QA1O_EX3
VPQB2T R
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
en05000348.vsd
Figure 283:
REL 670
IH function block

551
Section 11
Control
11.4.7.3
Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
VPQB1
QB1_OP
QA1O_EX1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQA1
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC3
VPS1QC1
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
A1A2_BS
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPQC4
=1
VPS1QC1
=1
VPS2QC2
&
>1
1
QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL
&
&
&
&
>1
1
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
&
en04000542.vsd
552

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB1
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
&
>1
1
QB2REL
QB2ITL
&
&
1
1
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC4REL
QC4ITL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QA1_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQA1
>1
S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
VPS1S2TR
&
en04000543.vsd
11.4.7.4

Table 303:
Input signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
REL 670

553
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
S1QC1_OP
QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL
QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
BBTR_OP
No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR
Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
EXDU_12
No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES
No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1
QA1O_EX2
QA1O_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
Table 304:
Output signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1OPREL
Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL
Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC4REL
QC4ITL
S1S2OPTR
No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR
Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
554

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPS1S2TR
Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid
VPQB1TR
VPQB2TR
11.4.8
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)
11.4.8.1
Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_DC is used for one bus-section disconnector between
section 1 and 2 according to figure 284. The module can be used for different busbars,
which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB
WA1 (A1)
WA2 (A2)
QC1
QC2
A1A2_DC
Figure 284:
11.4.8.2
en04000492.vsd
Switchyard layout A1A2_DC
Function block
II01A1A2_DC
QB_OP
QB_CL
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
S1DC_OP
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3
QBOPREL
QBOPIT L
QBCLREL
QBCLIT L
DCOPT R
DCCLT R
VPDCT R
en05000349.vsd
Figure 285:
REL 670
II function block

555
Section 11
Control
11.4.8.3
Logic diagram
556

REL 670
Section 11
Control
A1A2_DC
QB_OP
QB_CL
=1
VPQB
VPDCTR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES
VPS1QC1
=1
VPS2QC2
=1
&
>1
1
QBOPREL
QBOPITL
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES
&
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3
&
en04000544.vsd
REL 670

557
Section 11
Control
11.4.8.4

Table 305:
Input signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block
Signal
558
Description
QB_OP
QB is in open position
QB_CL
QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
S1DC_OP
All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
S2DC_OP
All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC
Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC
Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_ES
No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB
No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1
External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBCL_EX2
External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX1
External open condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 306:
Output signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block
Signal
Description
QBOPREL
Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL
Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL
Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL
Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR
The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR
The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR
Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)
11.4.9
Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES)
11.4.9.1
Introduction
The interlocking module BB_ES is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar
parts according to figure 286.
QC
en04000504.vsd
Figure 286:
11.4.9.2
Switchyard layout BB_ES
Function block
IJ01BB_ES
QC_OP
QC_CL
BB_DC_OP
VP_BB_DC
EXDU_BB
QCREL
QCITL
BBESOPTR
BBESCLTR
en05000347.vsd
Figure 287:
REL 670
IJ function block

559
Section 11
Control
11.4.9.3
Logic diagram
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC
BB_DC_OP
EXDU_BB
&
QC_OP
QC_CL
QCREL
QCITL
BBESOPTR
BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd
11.4.9.4

Table 307:
Input signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block
Signal
Description
QC_OP
Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL
Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP
All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC
Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB
No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part
Table 308:
Output signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block
Signal
Description
QCREL
Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL
Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR
QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR
QC on this busbar part is in closed position
11.4.10
Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)
11.4.10.1
Introduction
The interlocking modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B are used for a
line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 288.
560

REL 670
Section 11
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1
QB2
QC1
QA1
QC4
QA2
DB_BUS_B
DB_BUS_A
QC2
QB61
QC5
QB62
QC3
QB9
DB_LINE
QC9
en04000518.vsd
Figure 288:
Switchyard layout double circuit breaker.
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected
to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the
busbars.
11.4.10.2
Function block
IB01DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB1_OP
QB61REL
QB1_CL
QB61ITL
QB61_OP
QB1REL
QB61_CL
QB1ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC3_OP
QB1OPTR
QC3_CL
QB1CLTR
QC11_OP
VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
en05000354.vsd
Figure 289:
REL 670
IB function block

561
Section 11
Control
IA01DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9REL
QB9ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
en05000356.vsd
Figure 290:
IA function block
IC01DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2CLREL
QA2_CL
QA2CLITL
QB2_OP
QB62REL
QB2_CL
QB62ITL
QB62_OP
QB2REL
QB62_CL
QB2ITL
QC4_OP
QC4REL
QC4_CL
QC4ITL
QC5_OP
QC5REL
QC5_CL
QC5ITL
QC3_OP
QB2OPTR
QC3_CL
QB2CLTR
QC21_OP
VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
en05000355.vsd
Figure 291:
IC function block
11.4.10.3
Logic diagrams
562

REL 670
Section 11
Control
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VPQB61
VPQB1
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
DB_BUS_A
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB61
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC3
=1
&
&
>1
1
VPQC11
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB61REL
QB61ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB1REL
QB1ITL
&
en04000547.vsd
REL 670

563
Section 11
Control
VPQB61
VPQB1
QB61_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
&
1
1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd
564

REL 670
Section 11
Control
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQA1
VPQA2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
DB_LINE
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQA2
=1
VPQB61
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQB62
=1
VPQC4
=1
VPQC5
=1
VPQB9
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPQC9
=1
&
VPVOLT
>1
1
&
REL 670

QB9REL
QB9ITL
en04000549.vsd
565
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
&
>1
&
&
&
en04000550.vsd
566

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQB61
VPQB62
VPQB9
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
&
1
&
1
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
en04000551.vsd
REL 670

567
Section 11
Control
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VPQB62
VPQB2
VPQA2
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPQC21
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
DB_BUS_B
=1
VPQA2
=1
VPQB62
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQC4
=1
VPQC5
=1
VPQC3
=1
&
&
>1
1
VPQC21
QA2CLREL
QA2CLITL
QB62REL
QB62ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB2REL
QB2ITL
&
en04000552.vsd
568

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQB62
VPQB2
QB62_OP
QB2_OP
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
&
1
1
QC4REL
QC4ITL
QC5REL
QC5ITL
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd
11.4.10.4

Table 309:
Input signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
Table 310:
Output signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB61REL
REL 670

569
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
QB61ITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
Table 311:
Input signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
570

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
Table 312:
Output signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block
Signal
Description
QB9REL
QB9ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
Table 313:
Input signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

571
Section 11
Control
Table 314:
Output signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA2CLREL
QA2CLITL
QB62REL
QB62ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QC4REL
QC4ITL
QC5REL
QC5ITL
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
11.4.11
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)
11.4.11.1
Introduction
The interlocking modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B are used for
lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 292.
572

REL 670
Section 11
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB2
QB1
QC1
QC1
QA1
QA1
QC2
QC2
QB6
QB6
QC3
BH_LINE_A
QC3
QB61
QA1
BH_LINE_B
QB62
QB9
QB9
QC1
QC2
QC9
QC9
BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd
Figure 292:
Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard
layout.
11.4.11.2
Function blocks
REL 670

573
Section 11
Control
IL01BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB6_OP
QB6REL
QB6_CL
QB6ITL
QB1_OP
QB1REL
QB1_CL
QB1ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC3_OP
QC3REL
QC3_CL
QC3ITL
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9ITL
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9ITL
CQA1_OP
QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL
QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP
VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
en05000352.vsd
Figure 293:
574
IL function block

REL 670
Section 11
Control
IM01BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLIT L
QB6_OP
QB6REL
QB6_CL
QB6IT L
QB2_OP
QB2REL
QB2_CL
QB2IT L
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1IT L
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2IT L
QC3_OP
QC3REL
QC3_CL
QC3IT L
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9IT L
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9IT L
CQA1_OP
QB2OPT R
CQA1_CL
QB2CLT R
CQB62_OP
VPQB2T R
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT _OFF
VOLT _ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
en05000353.vsd
Figure 294:
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
IM function block
IK01BH_CONN
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB61REL
QB61ITL
QB62REL
QB62ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
en05000351.vsd
Figure 295:
IK function block
11.4.11.3
Logic diagrams
REL 670

575
Section 11
Control
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB6_OP
QB6_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQB1
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
BH_LINE_A
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB6
=1
VPQC9
=1
VPQB9
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPCQA1
=1
VPCQC1
=1
VPCQC2
=1
VPCQB61
=1
VPQC11
=1
VPVOLT
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
&
&
>1
1
QB6REL
QB6ITL
&
en04000554.vsd
576

REL 670
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
VPQB1
VPQB6
QB1_OP
QB6_OP
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPCQB61
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1
VPQB6
VPQC9
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QB9_EX3
&
QB1REL
QB1ITL
>1
1
&
&
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
1
1
QC3REL
QC3ITL
&
1
&
>1
QB9REL
QB9ITL
>1
&
en04000555.vsd
REL 670

577
Section 11
Control
CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
>1
&
>1
&
&
&
QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd
578

REL 670
Section 11
Control
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB6_OP
QB6_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQB2
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
BH_LINE_B
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQB6
=1
VPQC9
=1
VPQB9
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPCQA1
=1
VPCQC1
=1
VPCQC2
=1
VPCQB62
=1
VPQC21
=1
VPVOLT
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
&
&
>1
1
QB6REL
QB6ITL
&
en04000557.vsd
REL 670

579
Section 11
Control
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB2
VPQB6
QB2_OP
QB6_OP
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPCQB62
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1
VPQB6
VPQC9
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QB9_EX3
&
QB2REL
QB2ITL
>1
1
&
&
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
1
1
QC3REL
QC3ITL
&
1
&
>1
QB9REL
QB9ITL
>1
&
en04000558.vsd
580

REL 670
Section 11
Control
CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
>1
&
>1
&
&
&
QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd
REL 670

581
Section 11
Control
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
VPQB61
VPQB62
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61
VPQB62
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
BH_CONN
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB61
=1
VPQB62
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VP1QC3
=1
VP2QC3
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
&
&
>1
1
QB61REL
QB61ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB62REL
QB62ITL
&
&
1
1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
en04000560.vsd
11.4.11.4
582

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 315:
Input signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB6_OP
QB6_CL
QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
CQA1_OP
QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL
QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP
QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL
QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP
QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL
QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
REL 670

583
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
Table 316:
Output signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB6REL
QB6ITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QB9REL
QB9ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
Table 317:
Input signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB6_OP
QB6_CL
QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
584

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
CQA1_OP
QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL
QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP
QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL
QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
Table 318:
Output signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block
Signal
Description
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB6REL
QB6ITL
REL 670

585
Section 11
Control
Signal
Description
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QB9REL
QB9ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
Table 319:
Input signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block
Signal
586
Description
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
1QC3_OP
QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL
QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP
QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL
QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 320:
Output signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB61REL
QB61ITL
QB62REL
QB62ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL

587
Section 11
Control
11.4.12
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
11.4.12.1
Function block
GR01IntlReceive
BLOCK
INSTNAME
RESRENAM
RESGRNAM
APP1NAME
APP2NAME
APP3NAME
APP4NAME
APP5NAME
APP6NAME
APP7NAME
APP8NAME
APP9NAME
APP10NAM
APP11NAM
APP12NAM
APP13NAM
APP14NAM
APP15NAM
RESREQ
RESGRANT
APP1_OP
APP1_CL
APP1VAL
APP2_OP
APP2_CL
APP2VAL
APP3_OP
APP3_CL
APP3VAL
APP4_OP
APP4_CL
APP4VAL
APP5_OP
APP5_CL
APP5VAL
APP6_OP
APP6_CL
APP6VAL
APP7_OP
APP7_CL
APP7VAL
APP8_OP
APP8_CL
APP8VAL
APP9_OP
APP9_CL
APP9VAL
APP10_OP
APP10_CL
APP10VAL
APP11_OP
APP11_CL
APP11VAL
APP12_OP
APP12_CL
APP12VAL
APP13_OP
APP13_CL
APP13VAL
APP14_OP
APP14_CL
APP14VAL
APP15_OP
APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL
en07000048.vsd
Figure 296:
GR function block
11.4.12.2
588

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 321:
Input signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Table 322:
Block of output signals
Output signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block
Signal
Description
RESREQ
Reservation request
RESGRANT
Reservation granted
APP1_OP
Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL
Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL
Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP
APP2_CL
APP2VAL
APP3_OP
APP3_CL
APP3VAL
APP4_OP
APP4_CL
APP4VAL
APP5_OP
APP5_CL
APP5VAL
APP6_OP
APP6_CL
APP6VAL
APP7_OP
APP7_CL
APP7VAL
APP8_OP
APP8_CL
APP8VAL
APP9_OP
APP9_CL
APP9VAL
APP10_OP
APP10_CL
APP10VAL
APP11_OP
REL 670

589
Section 11
Control
Signal
11.4.12.3
Description
APP11_CL
APP11VAL
APP12_OP
APP12_CL
APP12VAL
APP13_OP
APP13_CL
APP13VAL
APP14_OP
APP14_CL
APP14VAL
APP15_OP
APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL
Receive communication status is valid
Setting parameters
Table 323:
Basic general settings for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function
Parameter
Operation
11.5
Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation Off/On
Logic rotating switch for function selection and

LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
Function block name: SLxx
ANSI number:
SLGGIO
11.5.1
Introduction
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block) is used within
the CAP tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one
provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used
extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set
590

REL 670
Section 11
Control
values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate
all these problems.
11.5.2
The SLGGIO has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received
on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,
in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates
the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the
DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,
in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates
the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output
settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case
of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in CAP configuration tool, there are other executable
inputs that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating
the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a select before execute
dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this
case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The
operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation
is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected.
The SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual
position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead
of a number.
REL 670

591
Section 11
Control
11.5.2.1
Functionality and behaviour

From the menu:
REC 670/Control
Single Line Diagram
Commands
REC 670 1.1

Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language
REC 670/Ctrl/Com
Single Command
Selector Switch (GGIO)
2
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw
SL01
SL02
..
..
SL15
3
../Com/Sel Sw/SL03
Damage ctrl
../Com/Sel Sw/SL03
Damage ctrl
P:Disc All
OK
N: Disc Fe
Cancel
4
5
../Com/Sel Sw/
DmgCtrl
Damage ctrl:
The dialog window that appears

shows the present position (P:)
and the new position (N:), both
in clear names, given by the
user (max. 13 characters).
Modify the position with arrows.

The pos will not be modified (outputs
will not be activated) until you press
the E-button for O.K.
Figure 297:
en06000420.vsd
Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
1 The SLGGIO instances in CAP configuration tool

2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters)
3 Position number, up to 32 positions
4 Change position
5 New position
11.5.2.2
Graphical display
There are two possibilities for the SLGGIO:
592

REL 670
Section 11
Control
if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters);
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but
only the first three letters of the name will be used;
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control,
the following sequence of commands will ensue:
From the graphical display:
Change to the "Switches" page

of the SLD by left-right arrows.
Select switch by up-down
arrows
../Control/SLD/Switch
AR control
WFM
REC 670 1.1

Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language
REC 670 1.1/Control

Single Line Diagram
Commands
AR control
WFM
Select switch. Press the

I or O key. A dialog box
appears.
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DAL
The pos will not be modified

(outputs will not be activated) until
you press the E-button for O.K.
Pilot setup
OFF
P: Disc
OK
N: Disc Fe
Cancel
AR control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
en06000421.vsd
Figure 298:
REL 670
Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.

593
Section 11
Control
11.5.3
Function block
SL01SLGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
UP
DOWN
SWPOS01
SWPOS02
SWPOS03
SWPOS04
SWPOS05
SWPOS06
SWPOS07
SWPOS08
SWPOS09
SWPOS10
SWPOS11
SWPOS12
SWPOS13
SWPOS14
SWPOS15
SWPOS16
SWPOS17
SWPOS18
SWPOS19
SWPOS20
SWPOS21
SWPOS22
SWPOS23
SWPOS24
SWPOS25
SWPOS26
SWPOS27
SWPOS28
SWPOS29
SWPOS30
SWPOS31
SWPOS32
SWPOSN
INSTNAME
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
NAME17
NAME18
NAME19
NAME20
NAME21
NAME22
NAME23
NAME24
NAME25
NAME26
NAME27
NAME28
NAME29
NAME30
NAME31
NAME32
en05000658.vsd
Figure 299:
594
SL function block, example for SL01SL15

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.5.4

Table 324:
Input signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
PSTO
UP
Binary "UP" command
DOWN
Binary "DOWN" command
Table 325:
Output signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block
Signal
Description
SWPOS01
Selector switch position 1
SWPOS02
SWPOS03
SWPOS04
SWPOS05
SWPOS06
SWPOS07
SWPOS08
SWPOS09
SWPOS10
SWPOS11
SWPOS12
SWPOS13
SWPOS14
SWPOS15
SWPOS16
SWPOS17
SWPOS18
SWPOS19
SWPOS20
SWPOS21
SWPOS22
SWPOS23
SWPOS24
SWPOS25
SWPOS26
SWPOS27
SWPOS28
REL 670

595
Section 11
Control
Signal
11.5.5
Description
SWPOS29
SWPOS30
SWPOS31
SWPOS32
SWPOSN
Switch position (integer)
Setting parameters
Table 326:
Basic general settings for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function
Parameter
11.6
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
NrPos
32
2 - 32
Number of positions
in the switch
OutType
Pulsed
Steady
Steady
Output type, steady or

pulse
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate pulse
duration, in [s]
tDelay
0.000 - 60000.000
0.010
0.000
Time delay on the

output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Stop when min or max

position is reached
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Function block name: VS
ANSI number:
VSGGIO
11.6.1
Introduction
The VSGGIO function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose
function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general purpose
switch.
The switch can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the SLD of the
LHMI.
596

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.6.2
This function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as the switch controller
(SCSWI) functions are used:
for indication, receiving position through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and
distributing it in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs or to
IEC61850 through reporting or GOOSE
for command, receiving commands via the HMI. HMI symbols Select button or
Indication button from menu (Control / Commands / Versatile Switch) or
IEC61850 and sending them in the configuration and especially to the outputs
(through a SMBO function block)
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place , operation from local HMI (Local pos) or through IEC 61850 (Remote
pos). An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block will allow operation
from Local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit
representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result:
11.6.3
POS2
POS1
RESULT
POS (integer output)
intermediate
POS1
POS2
bad state
Function block
VS01VSGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2
NAME_UND
NAM_POS1
NAM_POS2
NAME_BAD
BLOCKED
POSITION
POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
en06000508.vsd
Figure 300:
VS function block
11.6.4
REL 670

597
Section 11
Control
Table 327:
Input signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
PSTO
IPOS1
Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2
Position 2 indicating input
Table 328:
Output signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block
Signal
11.6.5
The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION
Position indication, integer
POS1
Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2
Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12
Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21
Execute command from position 2 to position 1
Setting parameters
Table 329:
Parameter
11.7
Description
BLOCKED
Basic general settings for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
Dir Norm
Specifies the type for

control model
according to IEC
61850
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Operation mode
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
Max time between

select and execute
signals
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Command pulse
lenght
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)

Function block name: DPx--
ANSI number:
DPGGIO
598

REL 670
Section 11
Control
11.7.1
Introduction
The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems or
equipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlocking
and reservation station-wide logics.
11.7.2
Upon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signals
over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be
able to get the signals, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual,
Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which
equipment or system should receive this information.
11.7.3
Function block
DP01DPGGIO
OPEN
CLOSE
VALID
POSITION
en07000200.vsd
Figure 301:
11.7.4
DP function block

Table 330:
Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal
Description
OPEN
Open indication
CLOSE
Close indication
VALID
Valid indication
Table 331:
Output signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal
POSITION
11.7.5
Description
Double point indication
Setting parameters
REL 670

599
Section 11
Control
11.8
Single point generic control 8 signals

(SPC8GGIO)
Function block name: SCx--
ANSI number:
SPC8GGIO
11.8.1
Introduction
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring
in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic
configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability
to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the
result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary
inputs and SPGGIO function blocks.
11.8.2
The PSTO input will determine which the allowed position for the operator (LOCAL,
REMOTE, ALL) is. Upon sending a command from an allowed operator position,
one of the 8 outputs will be activated. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is
the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the
pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in
case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
11.8.3
Function block
SC01SPC8GGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
en07000143.vsd
Figure 302:
SPC function block
11.8.4
600

REL 670
Section 11
Control
Table 332:
Input signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK
Blocks the function operation
PSTO
Table 333:
11.8.5
Description
Output signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block
Signal
Description
OUT1
Output 1
OUT2
Output2
OUT3
Output3
OUT4
Output4
OUT5
Output5
OUT6
Output6
OUT7
Output7
OUT8
Output8
Setting parameters
Table 334:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
Latched1
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 1
tPulse1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output1 Pulse Time
Latched2
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 2
tPulse2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output2 Pulse Time
Latched3
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 3
tPulse3
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output3 Pulse Time
Latched4
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 4
tPulse4
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output4 Pulse Time
Latched5
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 5
tPulse5
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output5 Pulse Time
REL 670

601
Section 11
Control
Parameter
602
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Latched6
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 6
tPulse6
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output6 Pulse Time
Latched7
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 7
tPulse7
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output7 Pulse Time
Latched8
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 8
tPulse8
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output8 pulse time

REL 670
Section 12
Scheme communication
Section 12 Scheme communication

About this chapter
This chapter describes the scheme communication logic that is used in distance and
earth fault protection function to obtain almost instantaneous fault clearance for faults
on the protected line. The chapter considers scheme communication logic (ZCOM),
current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ZCAL) for the distance protection
function and scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)
and current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (EFC) for the residual overcurrent
function.
Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) is discussed which is a function that can
generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any
telecommunication.
The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block
diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting
parameters.
12.1
Scheme communication logic for distance

protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: ZCOM-
ANSI number: 85
ZCPSCH
12.1.1
Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, a scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach,
permissive overreach, blocking, intertrip etc. are available. The built-in
communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signalling
when included.
Phase segregated communication is also available for correct operation at
simultaneous faults when three distance protection communication channels are
available between the line ends
REL 670

603
Section 12
12.1.2
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a
received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking
scheme.
12.1.2.1
Blocking scheme
The principal of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is
allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal.
The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone
to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see
figure 303.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable
timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 303.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by
activating the input BLKTR, Block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.
tCoord
CACC
CR
AND
TRIP
en05000512.vsd
Figure 303:
Basic logic for trip carrier in blocking scheme
Channels for communication in each direction must be available.
12.1.2.2
Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element
(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected
in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone
to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive underreach
schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 304.
604

REL 670
Section 12
tCoord
CACC
CR
AND
TRIP
en05000513.vsd
Figure 304:
Logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme
The permissive underreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above.
12.1.2.3
Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element
(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected
in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone
to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive overreach
schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, i.e. figure 304.
The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above.
12.1.2.4
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by
using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a
time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 305. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after
the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated
for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
REL 670

605
Section 12
CR
1
tSecurity
t
CRG
200 ms
t
CRL
>1
150 ms
AND
OR
AND
LCG
en05000746.vsd
Figure 305:
Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off:
The unblocking function is out of operation
No restart:
Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored

If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart

It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling
12.1.2.5
Intertrip scheme
In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole
tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.
12.1.2.6
Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 306.
606

REL 670
Section 12
Unblock =
Off
CR
Unblock =
NoRestart
Unblock =
Restart
CRG
CRL
CRL
OR
AND
tSecurit
y
1
200 ms
t
AND
150 ms
AND
OR
LCG
AND
SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSUR
tSendMi
n
BLOCK
CSBLK
CRL
AND
OR
AND
OR
Schemetype =
Permissive UR
AND
AND
CACC
CS
OR
tCoord
OR
25 ms
t
TRIP
Schemetype =
Permissive OR
OR
CSOR
AND
AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCS
AND
en05000515.vsd
Figure 306:
REL 670
Scheme communication logic for distance protection, simplified logic

diagram

607
Section 12
12.1.3
Function block
ZCOMZCPSCH_85
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKCS
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
TRIP
CS
CRL
LCG
en06000286.vsd
Figure 307:
12.1.4
ZCOM function block

Table 335:
Input signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Signal for block of trip output from communication logic
BLKCS
Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking schemes
CSBLK
Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC
Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR
Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR
Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR
Carrier Signal Received
CRG
Carrier guard signal received
Table 336:
Output signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block
Signal
Description
TRIP
Trip output
CS
Carrier Send signal
CRL
Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard signal
LCG
Loss of carrier guard signal
12.1.5
Setting parameters
608

REL 670
Section 12
Table 337:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SchemeType
Off
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Permissive UR
Scheme type
tCoord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Co-ordination time for

blocking
communication
scheme
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Minimum duration of a
carrier send signal
Table 338:
Parameter
12.1.6
Basic parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Unblock
Off
NoRestart
Restart
Off
Operation mode of
unblocking logic
tSecurity
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Security timer for loss

of carrier guard
detection
Technical data
Table 339:
Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking

communication scheme
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum duration of a carrier send

signal
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Security timer for loss of carrier guard

detection
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operation mode of unblocking logic
Off
NoRestart
Restart
12.2
Phase segregated scheme communication

logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
REL 670

609
Section 12
Function block name: ZCIP-
ANSI number: 85
ZC1PPSCH
12.2.1
Introduction
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on
a power line. All possible types of communication schemes e.g. permissive
underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage
problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated
communication is needed. This will then replace the standard scheme communication
module (ZCOM) on important lines where three communication channels (in each
subsystem) are available for the distance protection communication.
The main purpose of the ZC1P scheme communication logic is to supplement the
distance protection function such that:
fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on
the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for
faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.
To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, i.e. one per phase, each
capable of transmitting a signal in each direction are required.
The Phase segregated communication logic can be completed with the current
reversal and WEI logic for phase segregated communication, when found necessary
in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes.
12.2.2
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a
received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking
scheme.
The ZC1P function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a
supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs
from the distance protection and the communication equipment.
The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the
settings.
610

REL 670
Section 12
The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of the
scheme communication logic makes this logic able to support practically any scheme
communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The
outputs to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in
accordance with the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s)
and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated.
When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes
communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive
criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the
transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.
12.2.2.1
Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is
allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The received signal
(sent by a reverse looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to
CRLx, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault
instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is
connected to the input CACCLx, see figure 308. In case of external faults, the
blocking signal (CRLx) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to
prevent an unneccesary trip, see figure 308.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is
achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by
activating the input BLKCSLx.
CACCLx
CRLx
tCoord
AND
25 ms
TRLx
en06000310.vsd
Figure 308:
12.2.2.2
Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme
Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element
(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed.
The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for
trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 309. Three channels for
communication in each direction must be available.
REL 670

611
Section 12
CACCLx
CRLx
tCoord
AND
25 ms
TRLx
en07000088.vsd
Figure 309:
12.2.2.3
Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach

scheme
Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element
(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is
in permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the
same as for permissive underreach, see figure 308.
The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current
reversal logic when this function is included.
Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.
12.2.2.4
Unblocking scheme
In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome
by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create
a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As phase segregated
communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is typically connected
single phase or phase to phase it is not possible to evaluate which of the phases to
release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been supported.
12.2.2.5
Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for
tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase
segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection
and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.
12.2.2.6
Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx) is shown in figure 310.
612

REL 670
Section 12
SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSURLx
tSendMin
BLOCK
CSBLKLx
CRLx
AND
OR
AND
OR
Schemetype =
Permissive UR
AND
AND
CACCLx
CSLx
OR
OR
tCoord
t
25 ms
t
TRLx
Schemetype =
Permissive OR
OR
CSORLx
AND
AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCSx
AND
CSL1
CSL2
AND
CSL2
CSL3
AND
OR
CSMPH
CSL3
CSL1
AND
CSL1
CSL2
OR
GENERAL
CSL3
en06000311.vsd
Figure 310:
REL 670
Simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx)

613
Section 12
12.2.3
Function block
ZC1PZC1PPSCH_85
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKTRL1
BLKTRL2
BLKTRL3
CACCL1
CACCL2
CACCL3
CSURL1
CSURL2
CSURL3
CSORL1
CSORL2
CSORL3
CSBLKL1
CSBLKL2
CSBLKL3
BLKCSL1
BLKCSL2
BLKCSL3
CRL1
CRL2
CRL3
CRMPH
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
CSL1
CSL2
CSL3
CSMPH
CRLL1
CRLL2
CRLL3
en06000427.vsd
Figure 311:
12.2.4
ZC1P function block

Table 340:
Input signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Common signal for block of trip output from communication

logic in all phases
BLKTRL1
Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in

Phase L1
BLKTRL2

Phase L2
BLKTRL3

Phase L3
CACCL1
Accelerated Distance protection zone start in Phase L1
CACCL2
Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CACCL3
Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSURL1
Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSURL2
CSURL3
CSORL1
Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSORL2
CSORL3
614

REL 670
Section 12
Signal
Description
CSBLKL1
Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSBLKL2
CSBLKL3
BLKCSL1
Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase

L1
BLKCSL2

L2
BLKCSL3

L3
CRL1
Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRL2
CRL3
CRMPH
Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault
Table 341:
Output signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block
Signal
12.2.5
Common trip output in any of the phase
TRL1
Trip output in Phase L1
TRL2
TRL3
CSL1
Carrier Send in phase L1
CSL2
CSL3
CSMPH
carrier Send for mulitphase fault
CRLL1
CRLL2
CRLL3
Setting parameters
Table 342:
Parameter
REL 670
Description
TRIP
Parameter group settings for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation On / Off
Scheme Type
Off
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Permissive UR
Scheme type
tCoord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Trip coordinate time
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Minimum duration of
Carrier Send signal

615
Section 12
12.2.6
Technical data
Table 343:
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function
12.3
Range or value
Accuracy
Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking

communication scheme
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum duration of a carrier send

signal
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Security timer for loss of carrier guard

detection
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operation mode of unblocking logic
Off
NoRestart
Restart
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: ZCAL-
ANSI number: 85
ZCRWPSCH
12.3.1
Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to
accelerate the sending end.
Three phase or phase segregated scheme logic is available.
616

REL 670
Section 12
12.3.2
12.3.2.1
Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRLVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been
activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided
trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see
figure 312.
Figure 312:
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLx and activating of the TRIPLx in
the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal
to input BLOCK in the ZCOM function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set
to zero.
12.3.2.2
Weak end infeed logic

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition
that no fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 313, when:
REL 670
No active signal present on the input BLOCK.

The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRL
output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM.
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLKL1 functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually
configured to the BLOCK functional output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional
input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

617
Section 12
Figure 313:
Echo of a received carrier signal by the WEI function
When an echo function is used in both terminals (should generally be avoided), a

spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lockup of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.
An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping
of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI
function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 314.
Figure 314:
618
Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram

REL 670
Section 12
12.3.3
Function block
ZCALZCRWPSCH_85
U3P
BLOCK
IRVBLK
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL
IRVL
TRWEI
TRWEIL1
TRWEIL2
TRWEIL3
ECHO
en06000287.vsd
Figure 315:
12.3.4
ZCAL function block

Table 344:
Input signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
IRVBLK
Block of current reversal function
IRV
Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1
Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2
Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ
Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN
Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL
POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 345:
Output signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block
Signal
Description
IRVL
Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI
Trip of WEI logic
TRWEIL1
Trip of WEI logic in phase L1
TRWEIL2
TRWEIL3
ECHO
Carrier send by WEI logic
12.3.5
Setting parameters
REL 670

619
Section 12
Table 346:
Parameter
12.3.6
Basic parameter group settings for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function

Range
Default
Unit
Description
CurrRev
Off
On
Off
Operating mode of
Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Pickup time for

current reversal logic
tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060
Time Delay to prevent

Carrier send and local
trip
WEI
Off
Echo
Echo & Trip
Off
Operating mode of
WEI logic
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010
Coordination time for

the WEI logic
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

voltage level
UPP<
10 - 90
70
%UB
Phase to Phase
voltage for detection
of fault condition
UPN<
10 - 90
70
%UB
Phase to Neutral
of fault condition
Technical data
Table 347:
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function
12.4
Step
Range or value
Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral

voltage
(10-90)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Detection level phase to phase

voltage
(10-90)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Reset ratio
<105%
Operate time for current reversal
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end

infeed logic
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Local acceleration logic (PLAL)

Function block name: ZCLC-
ANSI number:
ZPLAL
620

REL 670
Section 12
12.4.1
Introduction
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel
is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLC) can be used. This logic enables fast fault
clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a
communication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the auto re-closer (zone extension) or by the
loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).
12.4.2
12.4.2.1
Zone extension
The overreaching zone is connected to the input -EXACC. For this reason, configure
the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device,
see figure 316.
This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.
Figure 316:
Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic
After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching
zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function
at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.
On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous
zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".
The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss of
load acceleration).
REL 670

621
Section 12
12.4.2.2
Loss-of-load acceleration
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used
for "acceleration" connected to LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during
normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above
the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be
allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of the
phase currents will become low due to a three phase trip at the opposite terminal, see
figure 317. The current measurement is performed internally and the STILL signal
becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy
phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that
this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase
currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.
Figure 317:
Loss of load acceleration - simplified logic diagram
Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.
12.4.3
Function block
ZCLCZCLCPLAL
I3P
BLOCK
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC
TRZE
TRLL
en05000333.vsd
Figure 318:
ZCLC function block
12.4.4
622

REL 670
Section 12
Table 348:
Input signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
BLOCK
Block of function
ARREADY
Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip
NDST
Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip
EXACC
Connected to function used for tripping at zone xtension
BC
Breaker Close
LLACC
Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load
Table 349:
Output signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block
Signal
12.4.5
TRZE
Trip by zone extension
TRLL
Trip by loss of load
Setting parameters
Table 350:
Parameter
REL 670
Description
Basic parameter group settings for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current values
LoadCurr
1 - 100
10
%IB
Load current before

disturbance in % of
IBase
LossOfLoad
Off
On
Off
Enable/Disable
operation of Loss of
load.
ZoneExtension
Off
On
Off
Enable/Disable
operation of Zone
extension
MinCurr
1 - 100
%IB
Lev taken as curr loss

due to remote CB trip
in % of IBase
tLowCurr
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay on pick-up

for MINCURR value
tLoadOn
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay on pick-up

for load current
release
tLoadOff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Time delay on drop off

for load current
release

623
Section 12
12.5
Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: EFC--
ANSI number: 85
ECPSCH
12.5.1
Introduction
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual
overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication
channels.
In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be
transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, an operate time of the
protection of 50 60 ms including a channel transmission time of 20 ms, can be
achieved. This short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault
clearance.
The communication logic module for directional residual current protection for the
REx670 IEDs enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreach schemes. The
logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end-infeed and current
reversal, included in the EFCA function.
12.5.2
The directional residual overcurrent protection (TEF) is configured to give input
information, i.e. directional fault detection signals, to the EFC logic:
624
CACC: Signal to be used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally

the start signal of a forward overreach step of STFW.
CSBLK: Signal to be used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally the startpickup signal of a reverse overreach
step of STRV.
CSUR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the underreach
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
underreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underacting step.
CSOR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the overreach
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
overreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreach step.

REL 670
Section 12
In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to

the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.
12.5.2.1
Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element
detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element
operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the
other line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the communication
transmission time and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is
needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero
and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance-measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
power line carrier communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal
attenuation will occur due to the fault.
Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is
no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to
current reversals because the received carrier signal is maintained long enough to
avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weakend-infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking
signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally
longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (carrier receive)
the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
Figure 319:
REL 670
Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme.

625
Section 12
12.5.2.2
Permissive under/overreach scheme

In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth fault measuring element sends a
permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward direction.
The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before
activating an operation signal. Independent channels must be available for the
communication in each direction.
An impedance measuring relay which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring relay works
in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can be used in single-line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect
a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.
Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the
distance or earth fault protection.
In case of an internal earth fault, the forward directed measuring element operates
and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (carrier send). Local
tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a
permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (carrier receive).
The permissive scheme can of either underreach or overreach type. In the underreach
alternative an underreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will
be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSUR.
In the overreach alternative an overreach directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal
CSOR. Also the underreach signal CSUR can initiate sending.
626

REL 670
Section 12
12.5.2.3
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by
using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a
time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 320. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after
the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated
for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
CR
1
tSecurity
t
>1
CRG
200 ms
t
CRL
150 ms
AND
OR
AND
LCG
en05000746.vsd
Figure 320:
REL 670
Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme

627
Section 12
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off:
The unblocking function is out of operation
No restart:

If CRG disappeares a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Communication failure shorter than tSecure will be ignored
Restart
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling
12.5.3
Function block
EFC1ECPSCH_85
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKCS
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
TRIP
CS
CRL
LCG
en06000288.vsd
Figure 321:
12.5.4
EFC function block

Table 351:
Input signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block
Signal
628
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKTR
Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS
Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking schemes
CSBLK
Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CACC
Signal to be used for tripping by Communication Scheme
CSOR
Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CSUR
Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CR
Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG
Carrier guard signal received

REL 670
Section 12
Table 352:
Output signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block
Signal
12.5.5
TRIP
Trip by Communication Scheme Logic
CS
Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL
Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme Logic
LCG
loss of carrier guard signal
Setting parameters
Table 353:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function

Range
Default
Unit
Description
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SchemeType
Off
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Permissive UR
Scheme type, Mode

of Operation
tCoord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Communication
scheme coordination
time
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Minimum duration of a
carrier send signal
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Unblock
Off
NoRestart
Restart
Off
Operation mode of
unblocking logic
tSecurity
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Security timer for loss

of carrier guard
detection
Technical data
Table 355:
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function
REL 670
Step
Operation
Table 354:
12.5.6
Description
Range or value
Accuracy
Communication scheme
coordination time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Scheme type
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

629
Section 12
12.6

residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: EFCA-
ANSI number: 85
ECRWPSCH
12.6.1
Introduction
The EFCA additional communication logic is a supplement to the EFC scheme
communication logic for the residual overcurrent protection.
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth-fault
protection function can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels.
REx670 terminals have for this reason available additions to scheme communication
logic.
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching
permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on
the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between
the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic
(transient blocking logic) can be used.
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection, can basically
operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The
detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this terminal.
The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high positive and/or zero
sequence source impedance behind this terminal. To overcome these conditions, weak
end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.
12.6.2
12.6.2.1
Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and
permissive overreach schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal
and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking
overreach scheme.
630

REL 670
Section 12
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection
module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions
and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.
Figure 322 and figure 323 show the logic circuits.
Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input
of the directional comparison module.
12.6.2.2
Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to IRV,
which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse direction
element is activated during the tPickUp time, the IRVL signal is activated, see
figure 322. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. IRVL
will be connected to the block input on the permissive overreach scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the non faulty line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The reset of IRVL is delayed by the tDelay time, see
figure 322. This ensures the reset of the carrier receive CR signal.
Figure 322:
12.6.2.3
Simplified logic diagram, current reversal
Weak and infeed logic

The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or
an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). See figure 323 and figure 324.
The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element,
connected to WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 323. If neither the forward nor the
reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weakend-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See figure 323.
If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth-fault function that is in operation.
REL 670

631
Section 12
Figure 323:
Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - echo.
With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates
the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral
point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0>
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth-fault function that is in operation.
Figure 324:
Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - Trip.
The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200
ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to
be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the
weak end echo is selected for both line ends.
632

REL 670
Section 12
12.6.3
Function block
EFCAECRWPSCH_85
U3P
BLOCK
IRVBLK
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL
IRVL
TRWEI
ECHO
CR
en06000289.vsd
Figure 325:
12.6.4
EFCA function block

Table 356:
Input signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
BLOCK
Block of function
IRVBLK
Block of current reversal function
IRV
Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1
Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2
Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ
Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN
CRL
POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 357:
Output signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block
Signal
Description
IRVL
TRWEI
Trip of WEI logic
ECHO
Carrier send by WEI logic
CR
POR Carrier signal received from remote end
12.6.5
Setting parameters
REL 670

633
Section 12
Table 358:
Parameter
12.6.6
Basic parameter group settings for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function

Range
Default
Unit
Description
CurrRev
Off
On
Off
Operating mode of
Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Pickup time for

tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060

trip
WEI
Off
Echo
Echo & Trip
Off
Operating mode of
WEI logic
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

the WEI logic
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

voltage level
3U0>
5 - 70
25
%UB
Neutral voltage
setting for fault
conditions
measurement
Technical data
Table 359:
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH,
85)
Function
12.7
Step
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage 3Uo for WEI trip
(5-70)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Reset ratio
>95%
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

infeed logic
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

phase segregated communication (PSCH)
Function block name: ZC1W-
ANSI number:
ZC1WPSCH
634

REL 670
Section 12
12.7.1
Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to
accelerate the sending end.
12.7.2
12.7.2.1

The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been
activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided
trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see
figure 326.
IRVLn
tPickUpRev 10 ms
t
t
tPickUpRev
t
&
IRVBLKLn
tDelayRev
t
IRVOPLn
en06000474.vsd
Figure 326:
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLn and activating of the TRIPLn in
the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVOPLn
signal to input BLOCKLn in the ZCOM function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set
to zero.
The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition
that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
REL 670

635
Section 12
VTSZ
BLOCK
>1
CRLLn
tWEI
t
&
50 ms
t
ECHOLn - cont.
200 ms
t
&
WEIBLK1
200 ms
t
WEIBLK2
200 ms
t
ECHOLn
en07000085.vsd
Figure 327:
The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 327, when:
The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx
output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM.
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLKLx functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually
configured to the STGEN functional output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional
input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.
When an echo function is used in both terminals (should generally be avoided), a

spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lockup of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An
undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of
the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo &Trip, together with the WEI
function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 328.
636

REL 670
Section 12
WEI = Echo&Trip
ECHOLn - cont.
CBOPEN
STUL1N
STUL2N
AND
100 ms
t
STUL3N
OR
OR
TRWEI
AND
15 ms
t
TRWEIL1
AND
15 ms
t
TRWEIL2
AND
15 ms
t
TRWEIL3
en00000551.vsd
Figure 328:
12.7.3
Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram
Function block
ZC1WZC1WPSCH_85
U3P
BLOCK
BLKZ
CBOPEN
CRL1
CRL2
CRL3
IRVL1
IRVL2
IRVL3
IRVBLKL1
IRVBLKL2
IRVBLKL3
WEIBLK
WEIBLKL1
WEIBLKL2
WEIBLKL3
WEIBLKOP
WEIBLKO1
WEIBLKO2
WEIBLKO3
TRPWEI
TRPWEIL1
TRPWEIL2
TRPWEIL3
IRVOP
IRVOPL1
IRVOPL2
IRVOPL3
ECHO
ECHOL1
ECHOL2
ECHOL3
en06000477.vsd
Figure 329:
ZC1W function block
12.7.4
REL 670

637
Section 12
Table 360:
Input signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
Voltage
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKZ
Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure function
CBOPEN
CRL1
Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1
CRL2
CRL3
IRVL1
Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVL2
Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVL3
Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3
IRVBLKL1
Block of current reversal function in Phase L1
IRVBLKL2
IRVBLKL3
WEIBLK
Block of WEI logic
WEIBLKL1
Block of WEI logic in Phase L1
WEIBLKL2
WEIBLKL3
WEIBLKOP
Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protection
WEIBLKO1
Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of other

protection
WEIBLKO2

protections
WEIBLKO3

protections
Table 361:
Output signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block
Signal
638
Description
TRPWEI
Trip of WEI logic
TRPWEIL1
Trip of WEI logic in Phase L1
TRPWEIL2
TRPWEIL3
IRVOP
IRVOPL1
Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVOPL2
IRVOPL3
ECHO
Carrier Send by WEI logic
ECHOL1
Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L1
ECHOL2
ECHOL3

REL 670
Section 12
12.7.5
Setting parameters
Table 362:
Parameter
12.7.6
Basic parameter group settings for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function

Step
Default
Unit
UBase
Range
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

Voltage level
OperCurrRev
Off
On
Off
Operating mode of
Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Pickup time for

tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060

trip
OperationWEI
Off
Echo
Echo & Trip
Off
Operating mode of
WEI logic
UPE<
10 - 90
70
%UB
Phase to Earth
of fault condition
UPP<
10 - 90
70
%UB
Phase to Phase
of fault condition
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010

the WEI logic
Technical data
Table 363:
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(PSCH, 85)
Function
REL 670
Description
Range or value
Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral

voltage
(10-90)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Detection level phase to phase

voltage
(10-90)% of Ubase
1.0% of Ur
Reset ratio
<105%
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

infeed logic
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

639
640
Section 13
Logic
Section 13 Logic
About this chapter
This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the
functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals
and technical data are included for each function.
13.1
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Function block name: TRPx-
ANSI number: 94
SMPPTRC
13.1.1
I->O
Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved
in the tripping of the fault. It provides the pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of
sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with
autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lockout.
13.1.2
The duration of a trip output signal from the TRPx function is settable (tTripMin).
The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening.
For three-pole tripping, TRPx function has a single input (TRIN) through which all
trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external
protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a
single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs,
as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
REL 670

641
Section 13
Logic
BLOCK
tTripMin
TRIN
AND
OR
TRIP
Operation Mode = On
Program = 3Ph
en05000789.vsd
Figure 330:
Simplified logic diagram for three phasetrip
The TRPx function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated
inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable
single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase
selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase
segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the
expanded TRPx function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual
overcurrent protections. The expanded TRPx function has two inputs for these
functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the
scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output
from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final
trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase
selection signals.
The expanded TRPx function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the
trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary
outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There
are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip.
These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function.
The expanded TRPx function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation
for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is
also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be
three-pole.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one TRPx function block is used for each breaker.
This can be the case if single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used.
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three pole trip,
if desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing
only the choice is by setting TripLockout.
642

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
13.1.2.1
Logic diagram
TRINL1
TRINL2
OR
TRINL3
OR
1PTRZ
1PTREF
OR
TRIN
AND
RSTTRIP - cont.
Program = 3ph
en05000517.vsd
Figure 331:
Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram
TRIN
TRINL1
PSL1
L1TRIP
OR
AND
TRINL2
PSL2
L2TRIP
OR
AND
TRINL3
PSL3
L3TRIP
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
-loop
-loop
OR
AND
AND
AND
1PTREF
50 ms
OR
1PTRZ
AND
t
en05000518.vsd
Figure 332:
REL 670
Phase segregated front logic

643
Section 13
Logic
L1TRIP
150 ms
OR
RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
L2TRIP
150 ms
AND
OR
STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
L3TRIP
150 ms
AND
OR
TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
OR
OR
P3PTR
AND
OR
-loop
en05000519.vsd
Figure 333:
644
Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
L1TRIP - cont.
150 ms
OR
RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
L2TRIP
150 ms
OR
STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
AND
L3TRIP
150 ms
OR
TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
OR
AND
OR
TRIP
OR
-loop
en05000520.vsd
Figure 334:
REL 670
Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

645
Section 13
Logic
BLOCK
RTRIP
TRL1
AND
OR
STRIP
TRL2
AND
OR
TTRIP
TRL3
AND
OR
RSTTRIP
TRIP
OR
AND
OR
TR3P
AND
-loop
10 ms
AND
AND
AND
5 ms
AND
AND
TR1P
TR2P
OR
-loop
en05000521.vsd
Figure 335:
13.1.3
Final tripping circuits
Function block
TRP1SMPPTRC_94
BLOCK
BLKLKOUT
TRIN
TRINL1
TRINL2
TRINL3
PSL1
PSL2
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TR1P
TR2P
TR3P
CLLKOUT
en05000707.vsd
Figure 336:
TRP function block
13.1.4
646

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
Table 364:
Input signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
BLKLKOUT
Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN
Trip all phases
TRINL1
Trip phase 1
TRINL2
Trip phase 2
TRINL3
Trip phase 3
PSL1
Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2
PSL3
1PTRZ
Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF
Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase selection
P3PTR
Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT
Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT
Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
Table 365:
Output signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block
Signal
13.1.5
General trip output signal
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TR1P
Tripping single-pole
TR2P
Tripping two-pole
TR3P
Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT
Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
Setting parameters
Table 366:
Parameter
REL 670
Description
TRIP
Basic parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
Program
3 phase
1ph/3ph
1Ph/2Ph/3Ph
1ph/3ph
Three ph; single or

three ph; single, two
or three ph trip
tTripMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Minimum duration of
trip output signal

647
Section 13
Logic
Table 367:
Parameter
13.1.6
Advanced parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function

Range
Default
Unit
Description
TripLockout
Off
On
Off
On: activate output

(CLLKOUT) and trip
latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock
Off
On
Off
On: lockout from input

(SETLKOUT) and
trip, Off: only inp
Technical data
Table 368:
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)
Function
13.2
Step
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip action
3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph
Minimum trip pulse length
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Function block name: TRxx-
ANSI number:
TRMGGIO
13.2.1
Application
Twelve trip matrix logic blocks are included in the IED. The function blocks are used
in the configuration of the IED to route trip signals and/or other logical output signals
to the different output relays.
The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool
and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according
to the specific application needs.
13.2.2
Tripping matrix logic block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals.
The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the
necessary grouping of connected input signals (e.g. for tripping and alarming
purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.
648

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1.
2.
3.
when any one of first 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the first output signal (i.e. OUTPUT1) will get logical value
1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT1 via
setting parameters "PulseTime1", "OnDelayTime1" & "OffDelayTime1".
when any one of second 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the second output signal (i.e. OUTPUT2) will get logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT2
via setting parameters "PulseTime2", "OnDelayTime2" & "OffDelayTime2"
when any one of all 32 input signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 (i.e. TRUE) the third output signal (i.e. OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1
(i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT3 via setting
parameters "PulseTime3", "OnDelayTime3" & "OffDelayTime3".
Detailed logical diagram is shown in see figure 337

Pulse Time 1
&
Pulse
Input 1
Input 2
Input 16
t pulse
On Delay Time 1
&
1
t on
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
t off
Off Delay Time 1
Pulse Time 2
t pulse
Pulse
Input 17
Input 18
Input 32
&
On Delay Time 2
&
1
t on
t off
Off Delay Time 2
Pulse Time 3
&
Pulse
t pulse
On Delay Time 3
&
1
t on
t off
Off Delay Time 3
en06000514.vsd
Figure 337:
Tripping Matrix Internal Logic.
Output signals from this function block are typically connected to other logic blocks
or directly to output contacts from the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay on that output signal shall be set to approximately
0,150s in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit
breaker trip coils.
Twelve such function blocks are available in the IED.
REL 670

649
Section 13
Logic
13.2.3
Function block
T R01TRMGGIO
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
INPUT 17
INPUT 18
INPUT 19
INPUT 20
INPUT 21
INPUT 22
INPUT 23
INPUT 24
INPUT 25
INPUT 26
INPUT 27
INPUT 28
INPUT 29
INPUT 30
INPUT 31
INPUT 32
OUT PUT 1
OUT PUT 2
OUT PUT 3
en05000370.vsd
Figure 338:
13.2.4
TR function block

Table 369:
Input signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT1
Binary input 1
INPUT2
Binary input 2
INPUT3
Binary input 3
INPUT4
Binary input 4
INPUT5
Binary input 5
INPUT6
Binary input 6
INPUT7
Binary input 7
INPUT8
Binary input 8
INPUT9
Binary input 9
INPUT10
Binary input 10
INPUT11
Binary input 11
INPUT12
Binary input 12
INPUT13
Binary input 13
650

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
Signal
Description
INPUT14
Binary input 14
INPUT15
Binary input 15
INPUT16
Binary input 16
INPUT17
Binary input 17
INPUT18
Binary input 18
INPUT19
Binary input 19
INPUT20
Binary input 20
INPUT21
Binary input 21
INPUT22
Binary input 22
INPUT23
Binary input 23
INPUT24
Binary input 24
INPUT25
Binary input 25
INPUT26
Binary input 26
INPUT27
Binary input 27
INPUT28
Binary input 28
INPUT29
Binary input 29
INPUT30
Binary input 30
INPUT31
Binary input 31
INPUT32
Binary input 32
Table 370:
Output signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block
Signal
13.2.5
Description
OUTPUT1
OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2
OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3
OR function between inputs 1 to 32
Setting parameters
Table 371:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
ON
Operation Off / On
PulseTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Output pulse time
OnDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Output on delay time
OffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Output off delay time
REL 670

651
Section 13
Logic
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ModeOutput1
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output ,1

steady or pulsed
ModeOutput2
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output 2,

steady or pulsed
ModeOutput3
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output 3,

steady or pulsed
13.3
Configurable logic blocks (LLD)
13.3.1
Introduction
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the configuration
to the specific application needs.
13.3.2
Inverter function block (INV)

I001INV
INPUT
OUT
en04000404.vsd
Figure 339:
INV function block
Table 372:
Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT
Table 373:
Input
Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal
OUT
13.3.3
Description
Output
OR function block (OR)

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs
is inverted.
652

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
O001OR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
OUT
NOUT
en04000405.vsd
Figure 340:
OR function block
Table 374:
Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT1
Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2
Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3
Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4
Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5
Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6
Input 6 to OR gate
Table 375:
Output signals for the OR (O001-) function block
Signal
13.3.4
Description
OUT
Output from OR gate
NOUT
Inverted output from OR gate
AND function block (AND)

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables.The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the inputs
and one of the outputs are inverted.
A001AND
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4N
OUT
NOUT
en04000406.vsd
Figure 341:
REL 670
AND function block

653
Section 13
Logic
Table 376:
Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT1
Input 1
INPUT2
Input 2
INPUT3
Input 3
INPUT4N
Input 4 inverted
Table 377:
Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal
13.3.5
Description
OUT
Output
NOUT
Output inverted
Timer function block (Timer)

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (parameter T).
T M01Timer
INPUT
T
ON
OFF
en04000378.vsd
Figure 342:
TM function block
Table 378:
Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT
Table 379:
Input to timer
Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal
Output from timer , pick-up delayed
OFF
Output from timer, drop-out delayed
Table 380:
Parameter
T
654
Description
ON
General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function

Range
0.000 - 90000.000

Step
0.001
Default
Unit
0.000
Description
Time delay of function
REL 670
Section 13
Logic
13.3.6
Pulse timer function block (PULSE)

The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.
TP01Pulse
INPUT
OUT
en04000407.vsd
Figure 343:
PULSE function block
Table 381:
Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT
Input to pulse timer
Table 382:
Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal
Description
OUT
Output from pulse timer
Table 383:
General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function
Parameter
Range
13.3.7
0.000 - 90000.000
Step
0.001
Default
Unit
0.010
Description
Time delay of function
Exclusive OR function block (XOR)

The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. The function block XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of
the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0
if they are equal.
XO01XOR
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
OUT
NOUT
en04000409.vsd
Figure 344:
XOR function block
Table 384:
Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
INPUT1
Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2
Input 2 to XOR gate

655
Section 13
Logic
Table 385:
Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal
13.3.8
Description
OUT
Output from XOR gate
NOUT
Inverted output from XOR gate
Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)

The Set-Reset function SRM is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output
from two inputs respectively. Each SRM function block has two outputs, where one
is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption
will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
Table 386:
SET
Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRM) function block

RESET
OUT
NOUT
SM01SRM
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
en04000408.vsd
Figure 345:
SM function block
Table 387:
Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal
Description
SET
Set input
RESET
Reset input
Table 388:
Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal
656
Description
OUT
Output
NOUT
Output inverted

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
Table 389:
Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function
Parameter
Range
Memory
13.3.9
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operating mode of
the memory function
Controllable gate function block (GT)

The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from
the input to the output or not depending on a setting.
GT 01GT
INPUT
OUT
en04000410.vsd
Figure 346:
GT function block
Table 390:
Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT
Table 391:
Input to gate
Output signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Signal
Description
OUT
Table 392:
Parameter
Operation
13.3.10
Output from gate
Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function

Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation Off/On
Settable timer function block (TS)

The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at
pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On, Off
that controls the operation of the timer.
REL 670

657
Section 13
Logic
TS01TimerSet
INPUT
ON
OFF
en04000411.vsd
Figure 347:
TS function block
Table 393:
Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT
Table 394:
Input to timer
Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal
Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF
Output from timer, drop-out delayed
Table 395:
Parameter
13.3.11
Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
Delay for settable

timer n
Technical data
Table 396:
Logic block
658
Description
ON
Configurable logic blocks

Quantity with update rate
fast
medium
normal
Range or value
Accuracy
LogicAND
60
60
160
LogicOR
60
60
160
LogicXOR
10
10
20
LogicInverter
30
30
80
LogicSRMemory
10
10
20
LogicGate
10
10
20
LogicTimer
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 10
ms
LogicPulseTimer
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 10
ms
LogicTimerSet
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 10
ms
LogicLoopDelay
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 10
ms

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
13.4
Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Function block name: FIXD-
ANSI number:
FixedSignals
13.4.1
Introduction
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.
13.4.2
There are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixed
to OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value;
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integer
number, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed
to 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL
is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value;
The function does not allow any settings and therefore its not present in PCM 600.
For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read the
Application Manual.
13.4.3
Function block
FIXDFixedSignals
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
en05000445.vsd
Figure 348:
FIXD function block
13.4.4
REL 670

659
Section 13
Logic
Table 397:
Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block
Signal
13.4.5
Description
OFF
Boolean signal fixed off
ON
Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO
Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE
Integer signal fixed one
REALZERO
Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL
String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL
Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF
Group signal fixed off
Setting parameters
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
13.5
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Function block name: BB--
ANSI number:
13.5.1
Introduction
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to Integer conversion function block) is
used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an
integer.
13.5.1.1
The B16I function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B1I6 function block is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.
660

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
13.5.1.2
Function block
BB01B16I
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
en07000128.vsd
Figure 349:
13.5.1.3
The B16I function block.

Table 398:
Input signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
IN1
Input 1
IN2
Input 2
IN3
Input 3
IN4
Input 4
IN5
Input 5
IN6
Input 6
IN7
Input 7
IN8
Input 8
IN9
Input 9
IN10
Input 10
IN11
Input 11
IN12
Input 12
IN13
Input 13
IN14
Input 14
IN15
Input 15
IN16
Input 16

661
Section 13
Logic
Table 399:
Output signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block
Signal
OUT
13.5.1.4
Description
Output value
Setting parameters
13.6
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic

node representation (B16IGGIO)
Function block name: BA--
ANSI number:
B16IGGIO
13.6.1
Introduction
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic
node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer
to 16 binary (logic) signals.
TheIB16IGGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the
PSTO input.
13.6.2
The B16IGGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer
into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B16IGGIO can receive an integer from
a station computer for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the
logical outputs at the last value.
The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to
the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local then no change is applied
to the outputs.
662

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
13.6.3
Function block
BA01B16IGGIO
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
en07000129.vsd
Figure 350:
13.6.4
The B16IGGIO function block.

Table 400:
Input signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
IN1
Input 1
IN2
Input 2
IN3
Input 3
IN4
Input 4
IN5
Input 5
IN6
Input 6
IN7
Input 7
IN8
Input 8
IN9
Input 9
IN10
Input 10
IN11
Input 11
IN12
Input 12
IN13
Input 13
IN14
Input 14
IN15
Input 15
IN16
Input 16

663
Section 13
Logic
Table 401:
Output signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block
Signal
OUT
13.6.5
Description
Output value
Setting parameters
13.7
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)

Function block name: IY- -
ANSI number:
13.7.1
Introduction
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion function block) is
used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an
integer.
13.7.2
The IB16 function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16 function block is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.
664

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
13.7.3
Function block
IY01IB16
BLOCK
IN
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
en06000501.vsd
Figure 351:
13.7.4
The BI16 function block.

Table 402:
Input signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK
Block of function
IN
input
Table 403:
REL 670
Description
Output signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block
Signal
Description
OUT1
Output 1
OUT2
Output 2
OUT3
Output 3
OUT4
Output 4
OUT5
Output 5
OUT6
Output 6
OUT7
Output 7
OUT8
Output 8
OUT9
Output 9
OUT10
Output 10
OUT11
Output 11
OUT12
Output 12
OUT13
Output 13
OUT14
Output 14
OUT15
Output 15
OUT16
Output 16

665
Section 13
Logic
13.7.5
Setting parameters
13.8
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic

node representation (IB16GGIO)
Function block name: IX--
ANSI number:
IB16GGIO
13.8.1
Introduction
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean conversion with logic node
representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16
binary (logic) signals.
The IB16GGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the
PSTO input.
13.8.2
The IB16GGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer
into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive an integer from
a station computer for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the
logical outputs at the last value.
The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to
the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local then no change is applied
to the outputs.
666

REL 670
Section 13
Logic
13.8.3
Function block
IX01IB16GGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
en06000502.vsd
Figure 352:
13.8.4
The BI16GGIO function block.

Table 404:
Input signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK
Block of function
PSTO
Table 405:
REL 670
Description
Output signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block
Signal
Description
OUT1
Output 1
OUT2
Output 2
OUT3
Output 3
OUT4
Output 4
OUT5
Output 5
OUT6
Output 6
OUT7
Output 7
OUT8
Output 8
OUT9
Output 9
OUT10
Output 10
OUT11
Output 11
OUT12
Output 12
OUT13
Output 13
OUT14
Output 14
OUT15
Output 15
OUT16
Output 16

667
Section 13
Logic
13.8.5
Setting parameters
668

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Section 14 Monitoring
About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and
disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
14.1
Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRx-
ANSI number:
CVMMXU
Function block name: CPxx
P, Q, S, I, U, f
ANSI number:
CMMXU
Function block name: VPx-
ANSI number:
VMMXU
REL 670

669
Section 14
Monitoring
Function block name: CSQx
ANSI number:
CMSQI
Function block name: VSQx
I1, I2, I0
ANSI number:
VMSQI
14.1.1
U1, U2, U0
Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via
IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power,
reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient
production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the
system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and
control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the
measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of
the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection
function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact
of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.
670

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system
quantities:
P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
I: phase current magnitude
F: power system frequency
The measuring functions CP (CMMXU), VN (VNMMWU) and VP (VMMXU)

provides physical quantities:
I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

U: voltages (phase and phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual
hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential
quantities:
I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and
angle).
The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage
signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously
calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered)
depending on the selected settings.
14.1.2
14.1.2.1
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the preprocessing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends
on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
REL 670

671
Section 14
Monitoring
Locally by means of the local HMI

Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus
Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report
function
Phase angle reference
All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog
inputs".
Zero point clamping
Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1,
I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values
within SVR.
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity
Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 353. The monitoring
has two different modes of operating:
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 353.

Y
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
en05000657.vsd
Figure 353:
672
Presentation of operating limits

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).
The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded,
3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The
output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to
get measurement supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 353.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one
channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity
The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of the
value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following
basic reporting modes are available:
Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting

(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
REL 670

673
Section 14
Monitoring
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
t (*)
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
Figure 354:
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
en05000500.vsd
Periodic reporting
AmplitudeMagnitude dead-band supervision
If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change
is larger than the Y predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new
measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary.
Figure 355 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture
is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.
674

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
DY
DY
DY
DY
DY
DY
t
99000529.vsd
Figure 355:
Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the Y set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XZeroDb), figure 356, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 356 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
REL 670

675
Section 14
Monitoring
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
A2
Y4
Value
Reported
Value
Reported
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
Y1
A6
A5
Value
Reported
t
99000530.vsd
Figure 356:
14.1.2.2
Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
Service values (MMXU, SVR)

Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase

voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure
and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the
available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a
parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter
phase power calculation
Mode
1
Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation
L1, L2, L3
*
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
Arone
S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
*
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*
U =
3 U PosSeq
I = I PosSeq
Comment
Used when
three phaseto-earth
voltages are
available
Used when
three two
phase-tophase
voltages are
available
Used when
only
symmetrical
three phase
power shall
be measured
676

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter
phase power calculation
Mode
4
Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation
L1L2
S = U L1 L 2 ( I L1 - I L 2 )
*
U = U L1 L 2
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2
L2L3
S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
*
U = U L2 L3
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
*
U = U L 3 L1
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1
*
U =
3 U L1
I = I L1
8
L2
S = 3 U L2 I L2
*
U =
3 U L2
I = IL2
9
L3
S = 3 U L3 I L3
*
U =
3 U L3
I = I L3
Comment
Used when
only UL1L2
phase-tophase voltage
is available
Used when
only UL2L3
is available
Used when
only UL3L1
is available
Used when
only UL1
phase-toearth voltage
is available
Used when
only UL2
is available
Used when
only UL3
is available
* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 3) the measurement
function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to
9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF
are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 154)
Q = Im( S )
S = S =
REL 670
(Equation 155)
P +Q
2

(Equation 156)
677
Section 14
Monitoring
PF = cosj = P
S
(Equation 157)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging
behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor
is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".
Measured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to get
% of Ir
Amplitude
compensation
-10
IAmpComp5
Measured
current
IAmpComp30
IAmpComp100
30
% of Ir
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
-10
Degrees
100
Angle
compensation
-10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of Ir
-10
en05000652.vsd
Figure 357:
Calibration curves
678

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Low pass filtering
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I
& power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
(Equation 158)
where:
X
is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld
is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be
determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping
In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level for
current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current
or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power
(i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement
supervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zero
clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero
point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement
supervision").
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved
by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude
(i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. setting
parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two
parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value
(i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific
operating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to perform
this calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy class
available.
REL 670

679
Section 14
Monitoring
Directionality
In CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and

reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown
in the following figure 358.
Busbar
Protected
Object
en05000373.vsd
Figure 358:
Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements
That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained

from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block
as an output.
14.1.2.3
Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)

The CP function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configuration
tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get better
then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850.
This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated
current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in
between, see figure 357 above.
680

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".
14.1.2.4
Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP)

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the
configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".
14.1.2.5
Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ)

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CSQ) or
voltage (VSQ) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but XRANG,
are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to calibrate the signals.
Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to
corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer
in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
14.1.3
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
REL 670

681
Section 14
Monitoring
SVR1CVMMXU
I3P
U3P
S
S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
en05000772.vsd
Figure 359:
SVR function block
CP01CMMXU
I3P
IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
en05000699.vsd
Figure 360:
CP function block
VP01VMMXU
U3P
UL12
UL12RANG
UL23
UL23RANG
UL31
UL31RANG
en05000701.vsd
Figure 361:
VP function block
CSQ1CMSQI
I3P
3I0
3I0RANG
I1
I1RANG
I2
I2RANG
en05000703.vsd
Figure 362:
682
CS function block

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
VSQ1VMSQI
U3P
3U0
3U0RANG
U1
U1RANG
U2
U2RANG
en05000704.vsd
VSQ1VMSQI
V3P
3V0
3V0RANG
V1
V1RANG
V2
V2RANG
en05000704_ansi.vsd
Figure 363:
14.1.4
VS function block

Table 406:
Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
U3P
Table 407:
Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal
Description
Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE
Apparent Power range
P_INST
Active Power
Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE
Active Power range
Q_INST
Reactive Power
Active Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE
Reactive Power range
PF
Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE
Power Factor range
ILAG
Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD
Current is leading voltage
Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE
Calcuate voltage range
Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
REL 670

683
Section 14
Monitoring
Signal
Description
I_RANGE
Calculated current range
System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE
System frequency range
Table 408:
Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Table 409:
Group connection abstract block 1
Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal
Description
IL1
IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG
IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL
IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL
Table 410:
Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
Table 411:
Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal
684
Description
UL12
UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG
UL12 Amplitude range
UL23
UL23RANG
UL31
UL31RANG

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 412:
Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal
Description
I3P
Table 413:
Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal
Description
3I0
3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG
3I0 Amplitude range
I1
I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG
I1 Amplitude range
I2
I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG
I2 Amplitude range
Table 414:
Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal
Description
U3P
Table 415:
Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal
14.1.5
Description
3U0
3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG
3U0 Amplitude range
U1
U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG
U1 Amplitude range
U2
U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG
U2 Amplitude range
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM
600.
REL 670

685
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 416:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
VA
Low limit (physical

value)
SLowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
VA
Low Low limit

(physical value)
SMin
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
VA
Minimum value
SMax
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
VA
Maximum value
SRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-1000000000.000
Minimum value
PMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
Maximum value
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-1000000000.000
VAr
Minimum value
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current level in A
QMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
VAr
Maximum value
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

voltage level in kV
Mode
L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
L1, L2, L3
Selection of
voltage
PowAmpFact
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
1.000
Amplitude factor to
scale power
calculations
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
Angle compensation
for phase shift
between measured I
&U
686

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Step
Default
0.00 - 1.00
0.01
0.00
Low pass filter

measurement, U and
I
PFMin
-1.000 - 0.000
0.001
-1.000
Minimum value
PFMax
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum value
PFRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
400000.000
Maximum value
URepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
FrMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Hz
Minimum value
FrMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
70.000
Hz
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 417:
Parameter
Range
Unit
Description
Advanced general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
Cycl: Report interval

(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping in

0,001% of range
SHiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
VA
High High limit

(physical value)
SHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000
VA
High limit (physical

value)
SLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
REL 670

687
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
PHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
PHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000

value)
PLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800000000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
PLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900000000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
PLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
QHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
VAr
High High limit

(physical value)
QHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000
VAr

value)
QLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800000000.000
VAr
Low limit (physical

value)
QLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900000000.000
VAr
Low Low limit

(physical value)
QLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
UGenZeroDb
1 - 100

% of Ubase
PFHiHiLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
3.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IGenZeroDb
1 - 100

% of Ibase
688

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
PFHiLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
2.000

value)
PFLowLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
-2.000
Low limit (physical

value)
PFLowLowLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
-3.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
PFLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
UDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
UHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
UHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
ULowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
ULowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
ULimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
IHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
ILowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
Low limit (physical

value)
ILowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
ILimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
REL 670

689
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
690
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FrZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
FrHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
65.000
Hz
High High limit

(physical value)
FrHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
63.000
Hz

value)
FrLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
47.000
Hz
Low limit (physical

value)
FrLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
45.000
Hz
Low Low limit

(physical value)
FrLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ir
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg


REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 418:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IL1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current level in A
IL1Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IL2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IL2Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IL3Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL3RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL3AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
Table 419:
Parameter
Advanced general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IL1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IL1HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
5% of Ir
REL 670

691
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
692
Default
Unit
IAmpComp30
Range
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low limit (physical

value)
IL1LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ir
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

current at 5% of Ir
IL1Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

IL1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
common for all limits
IL2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
IL2HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IL2HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
IL2LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low limit (physical

value)
IL2LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
IL2Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IL2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
IL3ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
IL3HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IL3HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
IL3LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low limit (physical

value)
IL3LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
IL3Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IL3LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is

Step
Description
REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 420:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL12DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Mode On /
Off
UL12ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

voltage level in kV
UL12HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
UL12HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ur
UL12LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
UL12LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ur
UL12Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL12Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL12RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL12LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
UL12AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL12AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
REL 670

693
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL23ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
UL23HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
UL23HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
UL23LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
UL23LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
UL23Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL23Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL23RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
UL23AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL23AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL31ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
UL31HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
UL31HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
UL31LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
UL31LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
UL31Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
694

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL31Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL31RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
UL31AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL31AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 421:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
3I0DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
3I0HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
3I0HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
3I0LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
Low limit (physical

value)
3I0LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
3I0Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
3I0Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
REL 670

695
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
3I0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
I1HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
I1HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
I1LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
Low limit (physical

value)
I1LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
I1Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
I1Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
I2HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
I2HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
696

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
I2LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
Low limit (physical

value)
I2LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
I2Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
I2Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 422:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
3U0DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
3U0HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
3U0HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
3U0LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
3U0LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
3U0Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
3U0Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
REL 670

697
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
3U0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
3U0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
3U0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
3U0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
U1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
U1HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
U1HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
U1LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
U1LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
U1Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
U1Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
U1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
U1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
698

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
14.1.6
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
U2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
U2HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
U2HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
U2LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
U2LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
U2Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
U2Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
U2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
U2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Technical data
Table 423:
Measurements (MMXU)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Frequency
(0.95-1.05) fr
2.0 mHz
Voltage
(0.1-1.5) Ur
0.5% of Ur at UUr
0.5% of U at U > Ur
Connected current
(0.2-4.0) Ir
0.5% of Ir at I Ir
0.5% of I at I > Ir
Active power, P
0.1 x Ur Sr
REL 670

699
Section 14
Monitoring
Function
14.2
Range or value
Accuracy
Reactive power, Q
0.1 x Ur Sr
Apparent power, S
0.1 x Ur Sr
Power factor, cos ()
0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir
0.02
Event counter (GGIO)

Function block name: CNTx-
ANSI number:
CNTGGIO
14.2.1
Introduction
The function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times
each counter input has been activated.
14.2.2
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six
counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each
positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses
per second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the
counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place.
To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism
for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This
however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a
new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored
before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values in
flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at
testing.
All inputs are configured via PCM 600, CAP531 Application configuration tool.
700

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
14.2.2.1
Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to Operators
manual for procedure.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to
Operators manual for procedure.
Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from MicroSCADA.
The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical
display.
14.2.2.2
Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six
counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each
positive edge of the input respectively.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked and are not updated. Valid number is held.
The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters
are set to 0.
14.2.3
Function block
CNT1CNTGGIO
BLOCK
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
RESET
en05000345.vsd
Figure 364:
14.2.4
CNT function block
Input signals
Table 424:
Input signals for the CNTGGIO (CNT1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
COUNTER1
Input for counter1
COUNTER2
Input for counter2
COUNTER3
Input for counter3
COUNTER4
Input for counter4
REL 670

701
Section 14
Monitoring
Signal
14.2.5
Description
COUNTER5
Input for counter5
COUNTER6
Input for counter6
RESET
Reset of function
Setting parameters
14.2.6
Technical data
Table 425:
Event counter (GGIO)
Function
14.3
Range or value
Accuracy
Counter value
0-10000
Max. count up speed
10 pulses/s
Event function (EV)

Function block name: EVxx-
ANSI number:
Event
14.3.1
Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected
to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA
communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.
14.3.2
The main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state or
value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state
transition, for which event generation is enabled.
702

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single
events, but are also intended for double indication events.
The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals
and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module.
The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have
a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. The
time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a
resolution of 1 ms.
The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, events
and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each
input is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events.
This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communication
respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is
possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate
the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is
implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted
quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be
removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the
REL 670

703
Section 14
Monitoring
maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 times
the configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.
14.3.3
Function block
EV01Event
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
en05000697.vsd
14.3.4

Table 426:
Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
INPUT1
Input 1
INPUT2
Input 2
INPUT3
Input 3
INPUT4
Input 4
INPUT5
Input 5
INPUT6
Input 6
INPUT7
Input 7
INPUT8
Input 8
INPUT9
Input 9
INPUT10
Input 10
704

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Signal
14.3.5
Description
INPUT11
Input 11
INPUT12
Input 12
INPUT13
Input 13
INPUT14
Input 14
INPUT15
Input 15
INPUT16
Input 16
Setting parameters
Table 427:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the Event (EV01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SPAChannelMask
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Off
SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Off
LON channel mask
EventMask1
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
Reporting criteria for

input 1
EventMask2
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 2
EventMask3
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 3
EventMask4
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 4
EventMask5
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 5
EventMask6
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 6
REL 670

705
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
EventMask7
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 7
EventMask8
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 8
EventMask9
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 9
EventMask10
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 10
EventMask11
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 11
EventMask12
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 12
EventMask13
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 13
EventMask14
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 14
EventMask15
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 15
EventMask16
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 16
MinRepIntVal1
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 3
706

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
14.4
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MinRepIntVal4
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 16
Fault locator (RFLO)

Function block name: FLO--
ANSI number:
LMBRFLO
14.4.1
Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.
The built-in fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to
the fault in percent, km or miles. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved
by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero sequence effect on double
circuit lines.
REL 670

707
Section 14
Monitoring
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of
the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current,
together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault
position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to
further increase the accuracy.
Specially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important)
where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can
be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.
14.4.2
The Fault Locator (FL) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring
functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy.
When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages
are selected from the Trip Value Recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the
fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The
analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool
within PCM 600.
The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance.
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
R1A+jX1A
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m
DRP
FL
Figure 365:
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
R1B+jX1B
en05000045.vsd
Simplified network configuration with network data, required for

settings of the fault location-measuring function.
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to
exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order
etc.), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance
to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also possible to
change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved.
The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part
of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via
the LHMI or PCM 600.
708

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
14.4.2.1
Measuring Principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end
infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done,
the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of
additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.
14.4.2.2
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 366 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from
both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a
distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the
algorithm.
L
F
ZA
A
IA
pZL
IB
(1-p).ZL
ZB
IF
UA
RF
xx01000171.vsd
Figure 366:
Fault on transmission line fed from both ends.
From figure 366 it is evident that:

U A = I A p Z L + IF R F
(Equation 159)
Where:
REL 670
IA
is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,
IF
is the fault current and
is a relative distance to the fault

709
Section 14
Monitoring
The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = -------DA
(Equation 160)
Where:
IFA
is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and
DA
is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and
the total fault current.
For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 p ) Z L + ZB
DA = ----------------------------------------Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 161)
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
I FA
- RF
U A = I A p Z L + ------DA
Table 428:
(Equation 162)
Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults
Fault type:
UA
IA
L1-N
UL1A
IL1A + KN x INA
L2-N
UL2A
IL2A + KN x INA
L3-N
UL3A
IL3A + KN x INA
L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2N
UL1A-UL2A
IL1A - IL2A
L2-L3, L2-L3-N
UL2A-UL3A
IL2A - IL3A
L3-L1, L3-L1-N
UL3A-UL1A
IL3A - IL1A
IFA
3
--- D ( I L1A I 0A )
2
3
--- D ( I L2A I 0A )
2
3
--- D ( I L3A I0A )
2
DIL 1 L 2 A
DIL2L3A
DIL3L1A
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal
to:
710

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Z0L Z 1L
K N = -----------------------3 Z1L
(Equation 169)
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before
the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into
the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.
For double lines, the fault equation is:
I FA
U A = I A p Z 1L + -------- RF + I 0P Z 0M
DA
(Equation 170)
Where:
I0P
is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,
Z0M
is a mutual zero sequence impedance and
DA
is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:
( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L Z 1L
Z 0M I 0P
- + ---------------- ------K N = ----------------------3 Z1L
3 Z1L I 0A
(Equation 172)
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two
cases.
Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 162 or 171 is a function of
p, the general equation 171 can be written in the form:
2
p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
(Equation 173)
Where:
UA
ZB
- + --------------------------+1
K 1 = --------------I A ZL Z L + ZA DD
UA
ZB
K2 = --------------- --------------------------- + 1
IA Z L Z L + Z A DD
REL 670

(Equation 174)
(Equation 175)
711
Section 14
Monitoring
IF A ZA + ZB
- --------------------------- + 1
K 3 = --------------
I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
(Equation 176)
and:
ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
KN is calculated automatically according to equation 172.
ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 173 applies to both single
and parallel lines.
Equation 173 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
2
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
(Equation 177)
p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
(Equation 178)
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 178,
and then inserted to equation 177. According to equation 177, the relative distance
to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.
Equation 177 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure
for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be
selected.
If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the
relative distance to the fault.
14.4.2.3
The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault
current:
U A = p Z 1 L IA + R F IA
(Equation 179)
Where:
IA
712
is according to table 428.

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated

impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only
used if the load compensated models do not function.
14.4.2.4
IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). There are two outputs that
must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX
output.
14.4.3
Function block
FLO1LMBRFLO
PHSELL1
PHSELL2
PHSELL3
CALCDIST
FLTDISTX
CALCMADE
BCD_80
BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1
en05000679.vsd
Figure 367:
14.4.4
FLO function block

Table 429:
Input signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block
Signal
Description
PHSELL1
Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2
Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3
Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST
Do calculate fault distance (release)
Table 430:
Output signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block
Signal
Description
FLTDISTX
Reactive distance to fault
CALCMADE
Fault calculation made
BCD_80
Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40
REL 670

713
Section 14
Monitoring
Signal
14.4.5
Description
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1
Setting parameters
Table 431:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DrepChNoIL1
1 - 30
Ch
Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2
1 - 30
Ch
Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3
1 - 30
Ch
Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL3
DrepChNoIN
0 - 30
Ch
Recorder input
number recording
residual current, IN
DrepChNoIP
0 - 30
Ch
Recorder input
number recording 3I0
on parallel line
DrepChNoUL1
1 - 30
Ch
Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2
1 - 30
Ch
Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3
1 - 30
Ch
Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL3
Table 432:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
R1A
0.001 - 1500.000
0.001
2.000
ohm/p
Source resistance A
(near end)
X1A
0.001 - 1500.000
0.001
12.000
ohm/p
Source reactance A
(near end)
R1B
0.001 - 1500.000
0.001
2.000
ohm/p
Source resistance B
(far end)
X1B
0.001 - 1500.000
0.001
12.000
ohm/p
Source reactance B
(far end)
714

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
14.4.6
Range
Default
Unit
Description
0.001 - 1500.000
0.001
2.000
ohm/p
Positive sequence
line resistance
X1L
0.001 - 1500.000
0.001
12.500
ohm/p
Positive sequence
line reactance
R0L
0.001 - 1500.000
0.001
8.750
ohm/p
Zero sequence line

resistance
X0L
0.001 - 1500.000
0.001
50.000
ohm/p
Zero sequence line

reactance
R0M
0.000 - 1500.000
0.001
0.000
ohm/p
Zero sequence
mutual resistance
X0M
0.000 - 1500.000
0.001
0.000
ohm/p
Zero sequence
mutual reactance
LineLength
0.0 - 10000.0
0.1
40.0
Length of line
Technical data
Table 433:
Fault locator (RFLO)
Function
14.5
Step
R1L
Value or range
Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach
(0.001-1500.000) /phase

2.0% degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Phase selection
According to input signals
Maximum number of fault

locations
100
Measured value expander block

Function block name: XP
ANSI number:
RANGE_XP
14.5.1
Introduction
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO
(MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values
can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit
and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to
be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary
REL 670

715
Section 14
Monitoring
signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or
above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable
logic.
14.5.2
The input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring function
block (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer
value to five binary output signals according to table 434.
Table 434:
Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised
value is:
Output:
LOWLOW
below low-low between low

limit
low and low
limit
between low
and high limit
between high- above highhigh and high high limit

limit
High
LOW
High
NORMAL
High
HIGH
High
HIGHHIGH
14.5.3
High
Function block
RANGE
XP01RANGE_XP
HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
en05000346.vsd
Figure 368:
14.5.4
XP function block

Table 435:
Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal
RANGE
716

Description
Measured value range
REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 436:
Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal
14.6
Description
HIGHHIGH
Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH
Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL
Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW
Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW
Measured value is below low-low limit
Disturbance report (RDRE)

Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- DRA4-,
DRB1- DRB6-
ANSI number:
ABRDRE
14.6.1
Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all
selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e. maximum
40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
Event List (EL)

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Trip Value recorder (TVR)
Disturbance recorder (DR)
Fault Locator (FL)
The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting

conditions, recording times and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy function
blocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of prefault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer.
REL 670

717
Section 14
Monitoring
The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the
recordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600
(Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbance
handling tool.
14.6.2
The disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in the
system.
The facilities included in the disturbance report are:
General disturbance information

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Event list (EL)
Trip values (phase values) (TVR)
Fault locator (FL)
Figure 369Figure "" shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included
functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary
input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input
function blocks (DRA1-3) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. The DR
function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.
718

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
DRA1-- 4-
Disturbance Report
DRP- -
FL01
RDRE
FL
A4RADR
Analog signals
Trip Value Rec
DRB1-- 6-
Binary signals
Fault Locator
Disturbance
Recorder
B6RBDR
Event List
Event Recorder
Indications
en05000124.vsd
Figure 369:
Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function
is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc.
All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories.
This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report
will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
Record no. N
General dist.
information
Record no. N+1
Indications
Trip
values
Record no. N+100
Event
recordings
Disturbance
recording
Fault locator
Event list
en05000125.vsd
Figure 370:
Disturbance report structure
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one.
The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure
371 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typical
configuration, i.e. in a 50 Hz system its possible to record 100 where the average
recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the
disturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR).
REL 670

719
Section 14
Monitoring
Number of recordings
100
3,4 s
20 analog
96 binary
3,4 s
80
40 analog
96 binary
60
6,3 s
6,3 s
50 Hz
6,3 s
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250
300
350
400 s
en05000488.vsd
Figure 371:
Number of recordings.
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire a
complete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC may
be connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for more
detailed information.)
Event recorder (ER)
The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM
600. (See section "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
Event list (EL)
The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM
600. (See section "Event list (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
720

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Trip value recorder (TVR)
The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault
and during the fault. (See section "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed
information.)
The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and
after the fault. (See section "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed
information.)
Fault locator (FL)
The fault location function calculates the distance to fault. (See section "Fault locator
(RFLO)" for more detailed information)
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report
Recording times
The disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during a

settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication function
register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which
criterion stops the current disturbance recording
tRecording =
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT
PostFaultRecT
3
en05000487.vsd
Figure 372:
The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1
Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2
Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the
limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
REL 670

721
Section 14
Monitoring
TimeLimit
Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of
a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored
disturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and line
differential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks
(SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA
input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).
External analog
signals
TRM, LDCM
SUxx
PRxx-
DRA1-
SMAI
A1RADR
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI3P
AI1
DRA2A2RADR DRA3-
INPUT1
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI2
AI3
INPUT2
AI4NAME
AI4
AIN
INPUT4
A3RADR
INPUT3
INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
Internal analog signals

T2Dx, T3Dx,
REFx, HZDx,
L3D, L6D,
LT3D, LT6D
SVRx, CPxx, VP0x,
CSQx, VSQx, MVxx
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
en05000653.vsd
Figure 373:
Analog input function blocks
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxx
function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate
(1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle
time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base
sampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.
722

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
PRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used
as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.The

signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal
is selected to be recorded when:
the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report

(operationON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the
local HMI (setLED=On/Off).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.
The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which
runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,
there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance
of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
REL 670
Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

723
Section 14
Monitoring
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600
or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal
is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to Operators
manual for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average
value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger
is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the
range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, see
table 437.
Post Retrigger
The disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a
recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the
post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig
= On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and,
during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not
start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new
trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording
a new complete recording will be fetched.
The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance
recordings.
724

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
14.6.3
Function block
DRP-RDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
en05000406.vsd
Figure 374:
DRP function block
DRA1A1RADR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
en05000430.vsd
Figure 375:
DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1DRA3
DRA4A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
NAME31
NAME32
NAME33
NAME34
NAME35
NAME36
NAME37
NAME38
NAME39
NAME40
en05000431.vsd
Figure 376:
REL 670
DRA4 function block, derived analog inputs

725
Section 14
Monitoring
DRB1B1RBDR
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
en05000432.vsd
Figure 377:
14.6.4
DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1DRB6

Table 437:
Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block
Signal
Description
DRPOFF
Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART
Disturbance recording started
RECMADE
Disturbance recording made
CLEARED
All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED
More than 80% of memory used
Table 438:
Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT1
Group signal for input 1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
726

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Signal
Description
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
Table 439:
Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block
Signal
Description
INPUT31
Analogue channel 31
INPUT32
Analogue channel 32
INPUT33
Analogue channel 33
INPUT34
Analogue channel 34
INPUT35
Analogue channel 35
INPUT36
Analogue channel 36
INPUT37
Analogue channel 37
INPUT38
Analogue channel 38
INPUT39
Analogue channel 39
INPUT40
Analogue channel 40
Table 440:
Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
INPUT1
Binary channel 1
INPUT2
Binary channel 2
INPUT3
Binary channel 3
INPUT4
Binary channel 4
INPUT5
Binary channel 5
INPUT6
Binary channel 6
INPUT7
Binary channel 7
INPUT8
Binary channel 8
INPUT9
Binary channel 9
INPUT10
Binary channel 10
INPUT11
Binary channel 11
INPUT12
Binary channel 12
INPUT13
Binary channel 13
INPUT14
Binary channel 14
INPUT15
Binary channel 15
INPUT16
Binary channel 16

727
Section 14
Monitoring
14.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 441:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
PreFaultRecT
0.05 - 1.00
0.01
0.10
Pre-fault recording
time
PostFaultRecT
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
0.5
Post-fault recording
time
TimeLimit
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Fault recording time

limit
PostRetrig
Off
On
Off
Post-fault retrig
enabled (On) or not
(Off)
ZeroAngleRef
1 - 30
Ch
Trip value recorder,

phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest
Off
On
Off
Operation mode
during test mode
Table 442:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation01
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue01
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 1
UnderTrigOp01
Off
On
Off
Use under level trig

for analogue cha 1
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
Under trigger level for

analogue cha 1 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp01
Off
On
Off
Use over level trig for

analogue cha 1 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
Over trigger level for

analogue cha 1 in %
of signal
Operation02
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue02
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 2
UnderTrigOp02
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 2
(on) or not (off)
728

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigLe02
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 2 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp02
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 2 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 2 in %
of signal
Operation03
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue03
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 3
UnderTrigOp03
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 3
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 3 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp03
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 3 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
Overtrigger level for

analogue cha 3 in %
of signal
Operation04
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue04
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 4
UnderTrigOp04
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 4
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 4 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp04
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 4 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 4 in %
of signal
Operation05
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue05
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 5
UnderTrigOp05
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 5
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 5 in %
of signal
REL 670

729
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OverTrigOp05
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 5 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 5 in %
of signal
Operation06
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue06
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 6
UnderTrigOp06
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 6
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 6 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp06
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 6 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 6 in %
of signal
Operation07
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue07
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 7
UnderTrigOp07
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 7
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 7 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp07
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 7 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe07
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 7 in %
of signal
Operation08
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue08
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 8
UnderTrigOp08
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 8
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 8 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp08
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 8 (on)
or not (off)
730

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 8 in %
of signal
Operation09
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue09
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 9
UnderTrigOp09
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 9
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 9 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp09
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 9 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 9 in %
of signal
Operation10
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue10
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 10
UnderTrigOp10
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 10
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 10 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp10
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 10 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Table 443:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation31
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue31
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 31
UnderTrigOp31
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 31
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31
0 - 200
50

of signal
REL 670

731
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OverTrigOp31
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe31
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation32
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue32
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 32
UnderTrigOp32
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 32
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp32
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe32
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation33
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue33
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 33
UnderTrigOp33
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 33
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp33
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe33
0 - 5000
200
Overtrigger level for

of signal
Operation34
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue34
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 34
UnderTrigOp34
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 34
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp34
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
732

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OverTrigLe34
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation35
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue35
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 35
UnderTrigOp35
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 35
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp35
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe35
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation36
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue36
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 36
UnderTrigOp36
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 36
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp36
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe36
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation37
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue37
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 37
UnderTrigOp37
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 37
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp37
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe37
0 - 5000
200

of signal
REL 670

733
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
734
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation38
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue38
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 38
UnderTrigOp38
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 38
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp38
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe38
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation39
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue39
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 39
UnderTrigOp39
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 39
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp39
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe39
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation40
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue40
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 40
UnderTrigOp40
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 40
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp40
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe40
0 - 5000
200

of signal

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 444:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation01
Off
On
Off
Trigger operation On/

Off
TrigLevel01
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
Trig on positiv (1) or

negative (0) slope for
binary inp 1
IndicationMa01
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 1
SetLED01
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

for binary channel 1
Operation02
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel02
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 2
IndicationMa02
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 2
SetLED02
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation03
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel03
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 3
IndicationMa03
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 3
SetLED03
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation04
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel04
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 4
IndicationMa04
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 4
SetLED04
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation05
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel05
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 5
IndicationMa05
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 5
SetLED05
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation06
Off
On
Off

Off
REL 670

735
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TrigLevel06
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 6
IndicationMa06
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 6
SetLED06
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation07
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel07
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 7
IndicationMa07
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 7
SetLED07
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation08
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel08
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 8
IndicationMa08
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 8
SetLED08
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation09
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel09
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 9
IndicationMa09
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 9
SetLED09
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation10
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel10
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 10
IndicationMa10
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 10
SetLED10
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation11
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel11
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 11
IndicationMa11
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 11
736

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SetLED11
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation12
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel12
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 12
IndicationMa12
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 12
SetLED12
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

for binary input 12
Operation13
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel13
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 13
IndicationMa13
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 13
SetLED13
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation14
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel14
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 14
IndicationMa14
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 14
SetLED14
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation15
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel15
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 15
IndicationMa15
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 15
SetLED15
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation16
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel16
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 16
IndicationMa16
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 16
SetLED16
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

FUNT1
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
REL 670

737
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNT2
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT3
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT4
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT5
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT6
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT7
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT8
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT9
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT10
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT11
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT12
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT13
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT14
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT15
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT16
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO1
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO2
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
738

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
INFNO3
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO4
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO5
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO6
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO7
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO8
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO9
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO10
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO11
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO12
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO13
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO14
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO15
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO16
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
14.6.6
Technical data
REL 670

739
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 445:
Disturbance report (RDRE)
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pre-fault time
(0.050.30) s
Post-fault time
(0.15.0) s
Limit time
(0.56.0) s
Maximum number of recordings
100
Time tagging resolution
1 ms
See table26
Maximum number of analog

inputs
30 + 10 (external + internally
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs
96
Maximum number of phasors in

the Trip Value recorder per
recording
30
Maximum number of indications in

a disturbance report
96
Maximum number of events in the

Event recording per recording
150
Maximum number of events in the

Event list
1000, first in - first out
Maximum total recording time (3.4

s recording time and maximum
number of channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100 recordings) at

50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate
1 kHz at 50 Hz
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth
(5-300) Hz
14.7
Event list (RDRE)
14.7.1
Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report
function. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher control
systems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absence
of any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the event
list.
14.7.2
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status,
the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in
740

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic
signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten
when a new event arrives.
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the
LHMI.
The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function,
which is only active during a disturbance.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function
(ER).
The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information
(ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).
14.7.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and
uses information from the DRBx- block.
14.7.4
Input signals
The event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance
Report function.
14.7.5
Technical data
Table 446:
Event list (RDRE)
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of events in the list
1000
Resolution
1 ms
Accuracy
Depending on time
synchronizing
14.8
Indications (RDRE)
14.8.1
Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary
and/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that have
REL 670

741
Section 14
Monitoring
changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective
to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status
information about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged).
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance.
The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the
IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the
information.
14.8.2
The LED indications display this information:
Green LED:
Steady light
In Service
Flashing light
Internal fail
Dark
No power supply
Yellow LED:
Steady light
A disturbance report is triggered
Flashing light
The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode
Red LED:
Steady light
Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On
Indication list:
The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder
The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of
indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of
indications the:
742

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block

the DRP parameter Operation must be set On
the DRP must be trigged (binary or analog)
the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring
the binary inputs.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the userdefined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function
(ER).
14.8.3
Function block
14.8.4
Input signals
The indication function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
Report function.
14.8.5
Technical data
Table 447:
Indications
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of indications
presented for single disturbance
96
Maximum number of recorded

disturbances
100
14.9
Event recorder (RDRE)
14.9.1
Introduction
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This
information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions)
and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
Report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
REL 670

743
Section 14
Monitoring
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED
Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
14.9.2
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be
generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal
signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels
are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total
recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report
flash memory at the end of each recording.
In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal
appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function
(ER).
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR,
IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.
14.9.3
Function block
14.9.4
Input signals
The event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
Report function.
14.9.5
Technical data
744

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 448:
Event recorder (RDRE)
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of events in disturbance report
150
Maximum number of disturbance reports
100
Resolution
1 ms
Accuracy
Depending on
time
synchronizing
14.10
Trip value recorder (RDRE)
14.10.1
Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle
before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the
IED.
The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED
Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
14.10.2
The trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault
amplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The
parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference.
The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL).
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception
is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest
number.
When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the
complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after
REL 670

745
Section 14
Monitoring
the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the
signals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as prefault and fault values.
The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function
is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is
used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER,
DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.
14.10.3
Function block
14.10.4
Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (not
DRA4).
14.10.5
Technical data
Table 449:
Trip value recorder (RDRE)
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of analog inputs
30
100
14.11
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)
14.11.1
Introduction
The Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g.
corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis).
The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analog input and
binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analog
746

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
and 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under the
event recorder function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection
functions.
The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in the
IED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list of
recordings.
The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection
and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
14.11.2
Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals.
The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals
generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input
channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential
communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI)
and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived
analog signals. For details, refer to section "Disturbance report (RDRE)".
DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The
pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously
be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is
determined by the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and
the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long
as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the postfault time and it can be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from
analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.
14.11.2.1
Memory and storage

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises:
REL 670

747
Section 14
Monitoring
Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600)
Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided
into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR and
FL). The Disturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording
in a user-friendly way.
General:
Station name, object name and unit name

Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
Record number
Sampling rate
Time synchronization source
Recording times
Activated trig signal
Active setting group
Analog:
Signal names for selected analog channels

Information e.g. trig on analog inputs
Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
Over- or Undertrig: level and operation
Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
CT direction
Binary:
Signal names
Status of binary input signals
The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret

the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency,
channel info etc.
The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for
each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence
number and time stamp for each set of samples.
748

REL 670
Section 14
Monitoring
14.11.2.2
IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance
recordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes how
to handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages)
using the public range and binary signals.
The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master.
When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will
appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).
To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first
8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private
range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to
table 450.
Table 450:
Signal
Configuration of analog channels

Disturbance recorder
IL1
DRA1
INPUT1
IL2
DRA1
INPUT2
IL3
DRA1
INPUT3
IN
DRA1
INPUT4
UL1
DRA1
INPUT5
UL2
DRA1
INPUT6
UL3
DRA1
INPUT7
UN
DRA1
INPUT8
The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The function
blocks include function type and information number.
14.11.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx and
DRBx- block.
14.11.4

For signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".
14.11.5
Setting parameters
For Setting parameters see table 441 - table 444.
14.11.6
Technical data
REL 670

749
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 451:
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of analog inputs
40
Maximum number of binary inputs
96
100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of
channels, typical value)
750

340 seconds (100

280 seconds (80
REL 670
Section 15
Metering
Section 15 Metering
About this chapter
This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to
meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting
parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included
for each function.
15.1
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Function block name: PCx--
ANSI number:
PCGGIO
15.1.1
Introduction
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the pulse counter function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must
be ordered to achieve this functionality.
15.1.2
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary
input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes
and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.
REL 670

751
Section 15
Metering
The pulse counter in REx670 supports unidirectional incremental counters. That

means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the
reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter
is reset at initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Value, Time,
and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:
Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

Wrapped around
Blocked
Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is,
the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an
integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block.
This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and
transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was
frozen by the function.
The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that
is specially adapted to the pulse counter function.
Figure 378 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and
outputs.
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
I/O-module
Pulse
INPUT OUT
Pulse length >1s
Reset counter
PulseCounter
BLOCK
INVALID
RESTART
READ_VAL
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
BI_PULSE
RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL
SMS settings
1.Operation = Off/On
2.tReporting = 0s...60min
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
Figure 378:
EVENT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
IEC EVENT
Database
Pulse counter value:
0...2147483647
en05000744.vsd
Overview of the pulse counter function
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI.
As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected
752

REL 670
Section 15
Metering
to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must
be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).
The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 13 characters.
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected
to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED
and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function
block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where
the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED startup, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked:
The BLOCK input is set, or

The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of value, time and status information.
15.1.3
Function block
PC01PCGGIO
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE
RS_CNT
NAME
INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
en05000709.vsd
Figure 379:
PC function block
15.1.4
REL 670

753
Section 15
Metering
Table 452:
Input signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
READ_VAL
Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE
Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT
Resets pulse counter value
Table 453:
Output signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block
Signal
15.1.5
Description
INVALID
The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART
The reported value does not comprise a complete integration

cycle
BLOCKED
The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL
A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL
Scaled value with time and status information
Setting parameters
Table 454:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
EventMask
NoEvents
ReportEvents
NoEvents
Report mask for

analog events from
pulse counter
CountCriteria
Off
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
RisingEdge
Pulse counter criteria
Scale
1.000 - 90000.000
0.001
1.000
Scaling value for

SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity
Count
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
Count
Measured quantity for

SCAL_VAL output
tReporting
0 - 3600
60
Cycle time for

reporting of counter
value
15.1.6
Technical data
754

REL 670
Section 15
Metering
Table 455:
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)
Function
15.2
Setting range
Accuracy
Input frequency
See Binary Input Module (BIM)
Cycle time for report of counter

value
(03600) s
Energy metering and demand handling

(MMTR)
Function block name: ETPx
ANSI number:
ETPMMTR
15.2.1
Introduction
Outputs from measurement function (MMXU) can be used to calculate energy. Active
as well as reactive values are calculated in import respectively export direction.
Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also
calculated by the function.
15.2.2
The instantaneous values outputs of active and reactive power from the Measurements
(CVMMXU) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to
measure the integrated energy. The energy values are presented as communication
outputs but also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter. Values
are in Ws resp Vars. Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction.
The accumulated energy values can be reset from the HMI reset menu or with input
RSTACC.
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXRAFD,
MAXRARD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until
reset with input RSTDMD or from the LHMI reset menu.
REL 670

755
Section 15
Metering
SVR1
CVMMXU
P
Q
PINST
QINST
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
ETP1
ETPMMTR
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD
en07000121.vsd
Figure 380:
15.2.3
Connection of the energy metering function to the outputs of the

measuring function
Function block
ETP1ETPMMTR
P
Q
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD
ACCST
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
en07000120.vsd
Figure 381:
15.2.4
ETP function block

Table 456:
Input signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block
Signal
756
Description
Measured active power
Measured reactive power
STACC
Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACC
Reset accumulated energy values. Level sensitive
RSTDMD
used by ch: reset maximum demand

REL 670
Section 15
Metering
Table 457:
Output signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block
Signal
15.2.5
Description
ACCST
Start of accumulating energy values.
EAFPULSE
Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE
Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE
Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE
Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM
Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM
Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
ERFALM
Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval
ERRALM
Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC
Accumulated forward active energy value in KWh
EARACC
Accumulated reverse active energy value in kWh
ERFACC
Accumulated forward reactive energy value in kVArh
ERRACC
Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in kVArh
MAXPAFD
Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD
Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD
Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set

interval
MAXPRRD
Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction
Setting parameters
Table 458:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
StartAcc
Off
On
Off
Activate the
accumulation of
energy values
tEnergy
1 Minute
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
1 Minute
Time interval for

energy calculation
tEnergyOnPls
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Energy accumulated
pulse ON time in secs
tEnergyOffPls
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Energy accumulated
pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MWh
Pulse quantity for

active forward
accumulated energy
value
REL 670

757
Section 15
Metering
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MWh
Pulse quantity for

active reverse
accumulated energy
value
ERFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MVAr
h
Pulse quantity for

reactive forward
accumulated energy
value
ERVAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MVAr
h
Pulse quantity for

reactive reverse
accumulated energy
value
Table 459:
Parameter
758
Range
EARAccPlsQty
Advanced general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
EALim
0.001 10000000000.000
0.001
1000000.000
MWh
Active energy limit
ERLim
0.001 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
MVAr
h
Reactive energy limit
DirEnergyAct
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of active
energy flow Forward/
Reverse
DirEnergyReac
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of reactive
energy flow Forward/
Reverse
EnZeroClamp
Off
On
On
Enable of zero point

clamping detection
function
LevZeroClampP
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
10.000
MW
Zero point clamping

level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
10.000
MVAr
Zero point clamping

level at reactive
Power
EAFPrestVal
0.000 - 10000.000
0.001
0.000
MWh
Preset Initial value for

forward active energy
EARPrestVal
0.000 - 10000.000
0.001
0.000
MWh

reverse active energy
ERFPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
0.001
0.000
MVAr
h

forward reactive
energy
ERVPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
0.001
0.000
MVAr
h

reverse reactive
energy

REL 670
Section 16
Station communication
Section 16 Station communication

About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the
substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their
setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are
included for each function.
16.1
Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one
or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation
(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

LON communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol
Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
16.2
16.2.1
Introduction
Single or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communication
standard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allows
intelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and
simplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is part
of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.
When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports
are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IPaddress 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0
REL 670

759
Section 16
16.2.2
Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)
16.2.2.1
Introduction
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systems
or equipment in the substation.
16.2.2.2
Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signal
over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To be able
to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual,
Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which
equipment or system should receive this information.
16.2.2.3
Function block
SP01SPGGIO
BLOCK
IN
NAME
en07000124.vsd
Figure 382:
760
SP function block

REL 670
Section 16
MP01SP16GGIO
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
NAMEOR
en07000125.vsd
Figure 383:
16.2.2.4
MP function block

Table 460:
Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block
Signal
IN
16.2.2.5
Description
Input status
Setting parameters
16.2.3
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)
16.2.3.1
Introduction
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog
output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the
REL 670

761
Section 16
same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement
supervision on that value.
16.2.3.2
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give the
instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it
will send over IEC61850-8-1 the value and the deadband, to other equipment or
systems in the substation.
16.2.3.3
Function block
MV01MVGGIO
IN
VALUE
RANGE
en05000408.vsd
Figure 384:
16.2.3.4
MV function block

Table 461:
Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
IN
Analogue input value
Table 462:
Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal
Description
VALUE
Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE
Range
16.2.3.5
Setting parameters
762

REL 670
Section 16
Table 463:
Parameter
16.2.4
Range
Default
Unit
Description
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
m%

0,001% of range
MV hhLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
90.000
High High limit
MV hLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
80.000
High limit
MV lLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-80.000
Low limit
MV llLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-90.000
Low Low limit
MV min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-100.000
Minimum value
MV max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Maximum value
MV dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
Setting parameters
Parameter
Basic general settings for the IEC61850-8-1 (IEC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off/On
GOOSE
Front
OEM311_AB
OEM311_CD
OEM311_AB
Port for GOOSE

communication
Technical data
Table 465:
Function
REL 670
Step
MV db
Table 464:
16.2.5
Basic general settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function
Value
Protocol
IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs
100BASE-FX

763
Section 16
16.3
16.3.1
Introduction
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This
enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators
workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.
The LON protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from
Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These
networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few
bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low
maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the
needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the
reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International
Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related
documents".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol in
general.
16.3.2
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the
maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all
the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own
subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per
one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent
to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example,
interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages,
such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals.
Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events
and explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
764

REL 670
Section 16
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network
variables.
Introduction of LON protocol
For more information see LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control,
Users manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON
Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks
network is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the Operators
manual.
Activate LONCommunication
Activate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings ->
General settings > Communication > SLM configuration > Rear optical LON,
where ADE should be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT
A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing
the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT
IED 670 package version 1p2 r03.
LON net address
To be able to establish a LON connection with the 670IEDs, the IED has to be given
a unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is
accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.
Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.
Events and indications
Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H)
with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is
changed in the 670IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted
from terminal.
Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs.
The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 466 shows the LON
addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the other
inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example,
input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
REL 670

765
Section 16
For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can
be used for other type of events at the same event block.
As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms)
is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runs
with a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event
blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data
from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service values
function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs.
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 466
Table 466:
Function block
LON adresses for Event functions

First LON address in
function block
EV01
1024
EV02
1040
EV03
1056
EV04
1072
EV05
1088
EV06
1104
EV07
1120
EV08
1136
EV09
1152
EV10
1168
EV11
1184
EV12
1200
EV13
1216
EV14
1232
EV15
1248
EV16
1264
EV17
1280
EV18
1296
EV19
1312
EV20
1328
Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter Setting
Tool (PST) Under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event function
as.
766

REL 670
Section 16
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event
function block.
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the event function block.
Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an event function block.
00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

01 generates an open event with the read status 1
10 generates a close event with the read status 2
11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the
event function block.
REL 670

767
Section 16
Figure 385:
Connection of protection signals for event handling.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N)
are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only
one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending
the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. the
function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA
addresses are according to table 467
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. The
supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used
to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the information
to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the
application by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontal
768

REL 670
Section 16
communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be set
to 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM function
blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the
service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables
Configure the Network variables according to your application from the LON
network Tool. For more details see LNT 505 in Operators manual. The following
is an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlocking
between two 670IEDs.
LON
BAY E1
BAY E3
MT07
CM09
BAY E4
CM09
en05000718.vsd
Figure 386:
Examples connections between MT and CM function blocks in three

terminals.
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From
LNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New
REL 670

769
Section 16
en05000719.vsd
Figure 387:
The network variables window in LNT.
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-anddrop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the
Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or the
traditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...
770

REL 670
Section 16
en05000720.vsd
Figure 388:
The download configuration window in LNT.
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available
depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver
input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic
cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling,
connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the
label on the module.
Table 467:
SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI01
1 I 5115
SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD
SCSWI02
1 I 5139
BL_CMD
SCSWI02
1 I 5161
BL_CMD
SCSWI04
1 I 5186
BL_CMD
SCSWI05
1 I 5210
BL_CMD
SCSWI06
1 I 5234
BL_CMD
SCSWI07
1 I 5258
BL_CMD
SCSWI08
1 I 5283
BL_CMD
SCSWI09
1 I 5307
REL 670

771
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI10
1 I 5331
BL_CMD
SCSWI11
1 I 5355
BL_CMD
SCSWI12
1 I 5379
BL_CMD
SCSWI13
1 I 5403
BL_CMD
SCSWI14
1 I 5427
BL_CMD
SCSWI15
1 I 5451
BL_CMD
SCSWI16
1 I 5475
BL_CMD
SCSWI17
1 I 5499
BL_CMD
SCSWI18
1 I 5523
BL_CMD
SCSWI19
1 I 5545
BL_CMD
SCSWI20
1 I 5571
BL_CMD
SCSWI21
1 I 5594
BL_CMD
SCSWI22
1 I 5619
BL_CMD
SCSWI23
1 I 5643
BL_CMD
SCSWI24
1 I 5667
BL_CMD
SCSWI25
1 I 5691
BL_CMD
SCSWI26
1 I 5715
BL_CMD
SCSWI27
1 I 5739
BL_CMD
SCSWI28
1 I 5763
BL_CMD
SCSWI29
1 I 5787
BL_CMD
SCSWI30
1 I 5811
BL_CMD
SCSWI31
1 I 5835
BL_CMD
SCSWI32
1 I 5859
CANCEL
SCSWI01
1 I 5107
SPA parameters for cancel

command
CANCEL
SCSWI02
1 I 5131

command
CANCEL
SCSWI03
1 I 5153

command
CANCEL
SCSWI04
1 I 5178

command
CANCEL
SCSWI05
1 I 5202

command
CANCEL
SCSWI06
1 I 5226

command
CANCEL
SCSWI07
1 I 5250

command
CANCEL
SCSWI08
1 I 5275

command
CANCEL
SCSWI09
1 I 5299

command
CANCEL
SCSWI10
1 I 5323

command
772

REL 670
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
CANCEL
SCSWI11
1 I 5347

command
CANCEL
SCSWI12
1 I 5371

command
CANCEL
SCSWI13
1 I 5395

command
CANCEL
SCSWI14
1 I 5419

command
CANCEL
SCSWI15
1 I 5443

command
CANCEL
SCSWI16
1 I 5467

command
CANCEL
SCSWI17
1 I 5491

command
CANCEL
SCSWI18
1 I 5515

command
CANCEL
SCSWI19
1 I 5537

command
CANCEL
SCSWI20
1 I 5563

command
CANCEL
SCSWI21
1 I 5586

command
CANCEL
SCSWI22
1 I 5611

command
CANCEL
SCSWI23
1 I 5635

command
CANCEL
SCSWI24
1 I 5659

command
CANCEL
SCSWI25
1 I 5683

command
CANCEL
SCSWI26
1 I 5707

command
CANCEL
SCSWI27
1 I 5731

command
CANCEL
SCSWI28
1 I 5755

command
CANCEL
SCSWI29
1 I 5779

command
CANCEL
SCSWI30
1 I 5803

command
CANCEL
SCSWI31
1 I 5827

command
CANCEL
SCSWI32
1 I 5851

command
REL 670

773
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01,
SELOpen+ILO=10,
SELClose+ILO=11,
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01
1 I 5105
SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command before
operate command
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI02
1 I 5129

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI03
1 I 5151

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI04
1 I 5176

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI05
1 I 5200

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI06
1 I 5224

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI07
1 I 5248

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI08
1 I 5273

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI09
1 I 5297

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI10
1 I 5321

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI11
1 I 5345

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI12
1 I 5369

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI13
1 I 5393

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI14
1 I 5417

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI15
1 I 5441

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI16
1 I 5465

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI17
1 I 5489

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI18
1 I 5513

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI19
1 I 5535

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI20
1 I 5561

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI21
1 I 5584

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI22
1 I 5609

Close) command
774

REL 670
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI23
1 I 5633

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI24
1 I 5657

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI25
1 I 5681

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI26
1 I 5705

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI27
1 I 5729

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI28
1 I 5753

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI29
1 I 5777

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI30
1 I 5801

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI31
1 I 5825

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI32
1 I 5849

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01,
ExcOpen+ILO=10,
ExcClose+ILO=11,
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01
1 I 5106
SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command before
operate command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI02
1 I 5130

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI02
1 I 5152

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI04
1 I 5177

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI05
1 I 5201

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI06
1 I 5225

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI07
1 I 5249

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI08
1 I 5274

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI09
1 I 5298

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI10
1 I 5322

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI11
1 I 5346

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI12
1 I 5370

Close) command
REL 670

775
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI13
1 I 5394

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI14
1 I 5418

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI15
1 I 5442

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI16
1 I 5466

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI17
1 I 5490

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI18
1 I 5514

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI19
1 I 5536

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI20
1 I 5562

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI21
1 I 5585

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI22
1 I 5610

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI23
1 I 5634

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI24
1 I 5658

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI25
1 I 5682

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI26
1 I 5706

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI27
1 I 5730

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI28
1 I 5754

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI29
1 I 5778

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI30
1 I 5802

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI31
1 I 5826

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI32
1 I 5850

Close) command
Sub Value
SXCBR01
2 I 7854
SPA parameter for position to be

substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value
SXCBR02
2 I 7866

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR03
2 I 7884

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR04
2 I 7904

substituted
776

REL 670
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Value
SXCBR05
2 I 7923

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR06
2 I 7942

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR07
2 I 7961

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR08
2 I 7980

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR09
3I7

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR10
3 I 26

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR11
3 I 45

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR12
3 I 56

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR13
3 I 74

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR14
3 I 94

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR15
3 I 120

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR16
3 I 133

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR17
3 I 158

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR18
3 I 179

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI01
3 I 196

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI02
3 I 216

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI03
3 I 235

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI04
3 I 254

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI05
3 I 272

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI06
3 I 292

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI07
3 I 310

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI08
3 I 330

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI09
3 I 348

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI10
3 I 359

substituted
REL 670

777
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Value
SXSWI11
3 I 378

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI12
3 I 397

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI13
3 I 416

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI14
3 I 435

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI15
3 I 454

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI16
3 I 473

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI17
3 I 492

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI18
3 I 511

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI19
3 I 530

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI20
3 I 549

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI21
3 I 568

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI22
3 I 587

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI23
3 I 606

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI24
3 I 625

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI25
3 I 644

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI26
3 I 663

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI27
3 I 682

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI28
3 I 701

substituted
Sub Enable
SXCBR01
2 I 7855
SPA parameter for substitute enable

command
Note: Send the Value before Enable
Sub Enable
SXCBR02
2 I 7865

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR03
2 I 7885

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR04
2 I 7903

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR05
2 I 7924

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR06
2 I 7941

command
778

REL 670
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXCBR07
2 I 7962

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR08
2 I 7979

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR09
3I8

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR10
3 I 25

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR11
3 I 46

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR12
3 I 55

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR13
3 I 75

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR14
3 I 93

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR15
3 I 121

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR16
3 I 132

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR17
3 I 159

command
Sub Enable
SXCBR18
3 I 178

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI01
3 I 197

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI02
3 I 215

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI03
3 I 234

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI04
3 I 252

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI05
3 I 271

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI06
3 I 290

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI07
3 I 309

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI08
3 I 328

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI09
3 I 347

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI10
3 I 360

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI11
3I 379

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI12
3 I 398

command
REL 670

779
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXSWI13
3 I 417

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI14
3 I 436

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI15
3 I 455

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI16
3 I 474

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI17
3 I 493

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI18
3 I 512

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI19
3 I 531

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI20
3 I 550

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI21
3 I 569

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI22
3 I 588

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI23
3 I 607

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI24
3 I 626

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI25
3 I 645

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI26
3 I 664

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI27
3 I 683

command
Sub Enable
SXSWI28
3 I 702

command
Update Block
SXCBR01
2 I 7853
SPA parameter for update block

command
Update Block
SXCBR02
2 I 7864

command
Update Block
SXCBR03
2 I 7883

command
Update Block
SXCBR04
2 I 7905

command
Update Block
SXCBR05
2 I 7922

command
Update Block
SXCBR06
2 I 7943

command
Update Block
SXCBR07
2 I 7960

command
Update Block
SXCBR08
2 I 7981

command
780

REL 670
Section 16
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Update Block
SXCBR09
3I6

command
Update Block
SXCBR10
3 I 27

command
Update Block
SXCBR11
3 I 44

command
Update Block
SXCBR12
3 I 57

command
Update Block
SXCBR13
3 I 73

command
Update Block
SXCBR14
3 I 92

command
Update Block
SXCBR15
3 I 122

command
Update Block
SXCBR16
3 I 131

command
Update Block
SXCBR17
3 I 160

command
Update Block
SXCBR18
3 I 177

command
Update Block
SXSWI01
3 I 198

command
Update Block
SXSWI02
3 I 214

command
Update Block
SXSWI03
3 I 236

command
Update Block
SXSWI04
3 I 253

command
Update Block
SXSWI05
3 I 273

command
Update Block
SXSWI06
3 I 291

command
Update Block
SXSWI07
3 I 311

command
Update Block
SXSWI08
3 I 329

command
Update Block
SXSWI09
3 I 349

command
Update Block
SXSWI10
3 I 358

command
Update Block
SXSWI11
3 I 377

command
Update Block
SXSWI12
3 I 396

command
Update Block
SXSWI13
3 I 415

command
Update Block
SXSWI14
3 I 434

command
REL 670

781
Section 16
Name
16.3.3
SPA
address
Description
Update Block
SXSWI15
3 I 453

command
Update Block
SXSWI16
3 I 472

command
Update Block
SXSWI17
3 I 491

command
Update Block
SXSWI18
3 I 510

command
Update Block
SXSWI19
3 I 529

command
Update Block
SXSWI20
3 I 548

command
Update Block
SXSWI21
3 I 567

command
Update Block
SXSWI22
3 I 586

command
Update Block
SXSWI23
3 I 605

command
Update Block
SXSWI24
3 I 624

command
Update Block
SXSWI25
3 I 643

command
Update Block
SXSWI26
3 I 662

command
Update Block
SXSWI27
3 I 681

command
Update Block
SXSWI28
3 I 700

command
Setting parameters
Table 468:
Parameter
Operation
Table 469:
Parameter
782
Function
block
General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function

Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation
General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation
TimerClass
Slow
Normal
Fast
Slow
Timer class

REL 670
Section 16
16.3.4
Technical data
Table 470:
Function
Value
Protocol
LON
Communication speed
1.25 Mbit/s
16.4
SPA communication protocol
16.4.1
Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related
documents".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.
16.4.2
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data
bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommended
baud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the Technical reference
manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol
The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated
need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves
and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to
the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling
(e.g. for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information
to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common
a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit
and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data
to an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found in
table471
REL 670

783
Section 16
Table 471:
SPA addresses for the MIM (MI03-MI16) function
Function block
SPA address
MI03-CH1
4-O-6508
MI03-CH2
4-O-6511
MI03-CH3
4-O-6512
MI03-CH4
4-O-6515
MI03-CH5
4-O-6516
MI03-CH6
4-O-6519
MI04-CH1
4-O-6527
MI04-CH2
4-O-6530
MI04-CH3
4-O-6531
MI04-CH4
4-O-6534
MI04-CH5
4-O-6535
MI04-CH6
4-O-6538
MI05-CH1
4-O-6546
MI05-CH2
4-O-6549
MI05-CH3
4-O-6550
MI05-CH4
4-O-6553
MI05-CH5
4-O-6554
MI05-CH6
4-O-6557
MI06-CH1
4-O-6565
MI06-CH2
4-O-6568
MI06-CH3
4-O-6569
MI06-CH4
4-O-6572
MI06-CH5
4-O-6573
MI06-CH6
4-O-6576
MI07-CH1
4-O-6584
MI07-CH2
4-O-6587
MI07-CH3
4-O-6588
MI07-CH4
4-O-6591
MI07-CH5
4-O-6592
MI07-CH6
4-O-6595
MI08-CH1
4-O-6603
MI08-CH2
4-O-6606
MI08-CH3
4-O-6607
MI08-CH4
4-O-6610
MI08-CH5
4-O-6611
MI08-CH6
4-O-6614
MI09-CH1
4-O-6622
MI09-CH2
4-O-6625
784

REL 670
Section 16
Function block
SPA address
MI09-CH3
4-O-6626
MI09-CH4
4-O-6629
MI09-CH5
4-O-6630
MI09-CH6
4-O-6633
MI10-CH1
4-O-6641
MI10-CH2
4-O-6644
MI10-CH3
4-O-6645
MI10-CH4
4-O-6648
MI10-CH5
4-O-6649
MI10-CH6
4-O-6652
MI11-CH1
4-O-6660
MI11-CH2
4-O-6663
MI11-CH3
4-O-6664
MI11-CH4
4-O-6667
MI11-CH5
4-O-6668
MI11-CH6
4-O-6671
MI12-CH1
4-O-6679
MI12-CH2
4-O-6682
MI12-CH3
4-O-6683
MI12-CH4
4-O-6686
MI12-CH5
4-O-6687
MI12-CH6
4-O-6690
MI13-CH1
4-O-6698
MI13-CH2
4-O-6701
MI13-CH3
4-O-6702
MI13-CH4
4-O-6705
MI13-CH5
4-O-6706
MI13-CH6
4-O-6709
MI14-CH1
4-O-6717
MI14-CH2
4-O-6720
MI14-CH3
4-O-6721
MI14-CH4
4-O-6724
MI14-CH5
4-O-6725
MI14-CH6
4-O-6728
MI15-CH1
4-O-6736
MI15-CH2
4-O-6739
MI15-CH3
4-O-6740
MI15-CH4
4-O-6743
MI15-CH5
4-O-6744
REL 670

785
Section 16
Function block
SPA address
MI15-CH6
4-O-6747
MI16-CH1
4-O-6755
MI16-CH2
4-O-6758
MI16-CH3
4-O-6759
MI16-CH4
4-O-6762
MI16-CH5
4-O-6763
MI16-CH6
4-O-6766
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 PC16 are found in table 472
Table 472:
Function block
SPA addresses for the PCGGIO (PC01-PC16 function)

SPA address CNT_VAL
SPA address NEW_VAL
PC01
3-O-5834
3-O-5833
PC02
3-O-5840
3-O-5839
PC03
3-O-5846
3-O-5845
PC04
3-O-5852
3-O-5851
PC05
3-O-5858
3-O-5857
PC06
3-O-5864
3-O-5863
PC07
3-O-5870
3-O-5869
PC08
3-O-5876
3-O-5875
PC09
3-O-5882
3-O-5881
PC10
3-O-5888
3-O-5887
PC11
3-O-5894
3-O-5893
PC12
3-O-5900
3-O-5899
PC13
3-O-5906
3-O-5905
PC14
3-O-5912
3-O-5911
PC15
3-O-5918
3-O-5917
PC16
3-O-5924
3-O-5923
I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function
block are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 BI16. The SPA addresses are found in a
separate document, refer to section "Related documents".
Single command function
The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving
function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage
apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be
used.
786

REL 670
Section 16
The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 CD03 for
16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the single
command function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command function
block, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow
consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function block
has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 CD03 are found in
table 473
Table 473:
SPA addresses for the SingleCmd (CD01-CD03) function
Function block
SPA address CMD Input
SPA address CMD output
CD01-Cmd1
4-S-4639
5-O-511
CD01-Cmd2
4-S-4640
5-O-512
CD01-Cmd3
4-S-4641
5-O-513
CD01-Cmd4
4-S-4642
5-O-514
CD01-Cmd5
4-S-4643
5-O-515
CD01-Cmd6
4-S-4644
5-O-516
CD01-Cmd7
4-S-4645
5-O-517
CD01-Cmd8
4-S-4646
5-O-518
CD01-Cmd9
4-S-4647
5-O-519
CD01-Cmd10
4-S-4648
5-O-520
CD01-Cmd11
4-S-4649
5-O-521
CD01-Cmd12
4-S-4650
5-O-522
CD01-Cmdt13
4-S-4651
5-O-523
CD01-Cmd14
4-S-4652
5-O-524
CD01-Cmd15
4-S-4653
5-O-525
CD01-Cmd16
4-S-4654
5-O-526
CD02-Cmd1
4-S-4672
5-O-527
CD02-Cmd2
4-S-4673
5-O-528
CD02-Cmdt3
4-S-4674
5-O-529
CD02-Cmd4
4-S-4675
5-O-530
CD02-Cmd5
4-S-4676
5-O-531
CD02-Cmd6
4-S-4677
5-O-532
CD02-Cmd7
4-S-4678
5-O-533
CD02-Cmd8
4-S-4679
5-O-534
CD02-Cmd9
4-S-4680
5-O-535
CD02-Cmd10
4-S-4681
5-O-536
CD02-Cmd11
4-S-4682
5-O-537
CD02-Cmd12
4-S-4683
5-O-538
REL 670

787
Section 16
Function block
SPA address CMD Input
SPA address CMD output
CD02-Cmd13
4-S-4684
5-O-539
CD02-Cmd14
4-S-4685
5-O-540
CD02-Cmd15
4-S-4686
5-O-541
CD02-Cmd16
4-S-4687
5-O-542
CD03-Cmd1
4-S-4705
5-O-543
CD03-Cmd2
4-S-4706
5-O-544
CD03-Cmd3
4-S-4707
5-O-545
CD03-Cmd4
4-S-4708
5-O-546
CD03-Cmd5
4-S-4709
5-O-547
CD03-Cmd6
4-S-4710
5-O-548
CD03-Cmd7
4-S-4711
5-O-549
CD03-Cmd8
4-S-4712
5-O-550
CD03-Cmd9
4-S-4713
5-O-551
CD03-Cmd10
4-S-4714
5-O-552
CD03-Cmd11
4-S-4715
5-O-553
CD03-Cmd12
4-S-4716
5-O-554
CD03-Cmd13
4-S-4717
5-O-555
CD03-Cmd14
4-S-4718
5-O-556
CD03-Cmd15
4-S-4719
5-O-557
CD03-Cmd16
4-S-4720
5-O-558
Table 473 SPA addresses for the signals on the single command functions
Figure 389 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection
terminal for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in CD01 are shown
in table 473
788

REL 670
Section 16
Figure 389:
Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of

a circuit breaker.
The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be off, steady or
pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting > General
Settings > Control > Commands > Single Command.
Event function
This event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g.
operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event
list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input
channels. All must The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module,
while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The
events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event
mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear
before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an
overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal,
Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Setting > General Setting > Monitoring > Event Function as.
No events
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 474
REL 670

789
Section 16
Table 474:
Status and event codes
Event block
Status
Single indication1)
Double indication
Set event
Reset event Intermedia Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
te 00
11
EV01
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
22O1
22O2
22O3
22O4
22O5
22O6
22O7
22O8
22O9
22O10
22O11
22O12
22O13
22O14
22O15
22O16
22E33
22E35
22E37
22E39
22E41
22E43
22E45
22E47
22E49
22E51
22E53
22E55
22E57
22E59
22E61
22E63
22E32
22E34
22E36
22E38
22E40
22E42
22E44
22E46
22E48
22E50
22E52
22E54
22E56
22E58
22E60
22E62
22E0
22E4
22E8
22E12
22E16
22E20
22E24
22E28
-
22E1
22E5
22E9
22E13
22E17
22E21
22E25
22E29
-
22E2
22E6
22E10
22E14
22E18
22E22
22E26
22E30
-
22E3
22E7
22E11
22E15
22E19
22E23
22E27
22E31
-
EV02
EV03
EV20
230..
240..
410..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
23E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
Connection of signals as events
Signals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent as
events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event
function block according to figure 390
790

REL 670
Section 16
Figure 390:
Connection of protection signals for event handling.
Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via the
Parameter Setting Tool (PST), under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring
> Event Function as.
16.4.2.1
No events
Communication ports
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
depending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,
REL 670

791
Section 16
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of
the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation
and commissioning manual for respective IED.
16.4.3
Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the
rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:
Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC
When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware
is needed plus telephone modems.
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600.
When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a
front-connection cable.
16.4.4
Setting parameters
Table 475:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on
serial line
Table 476:
Parameter
792
General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function
General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on
serial line

REL 670
Section 16
Table 477:
General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function
Parameter
16.4.5
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
Technical data
Table 478:
SPA communication protocol
Function
Value
Protocol
SPA
Communication speed
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or

38400 Bd
Slave number
1 to 899
16.5
16.5.1
Introduction
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection
terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system
must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
16.5.2
16.5.2.1
General
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and
a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.
Introduction of IEC 608705103 protocol
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of these

functions:
REL 670
Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Command handling

793
Section 16
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files)

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part
5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103
The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by the
IED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the
protection and control IED.
Commands in control direction
Terminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined terminal signals.
Number of instances: 1
Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no
Message
Supported
19
LED Reset
Yes
23
Activate setting group 1
Yes
24
Yes
25
Yes
26
Yes
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no.
794
Message
Supported
16
Auto-recloser on/off
Yes
17
Teleprotection on/off
Yes
18
Protection on/off
Yes

REL 670
Section 16
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD
Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are
defined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance.
INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1
- 8.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
Output signal 01
Yes
Output signal 02
Yes
Output signal 03
Yes
Output signal 04
Yes
Output signal 05
Yes
Output signal 06
Yes
Output signal 07
Yes
Output signal 08
Yes
Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions.
Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
19
LED reset
Yes
23
Setting group 1 active
Yes
24
Yes
25
Yes
26
Yes
21
Test mode active
Yes
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef

Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
defined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance.
REL 670

795
Section 16
INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values are
defined in range 1 - 8
Info. no.
Message
Supported
Input signal 01
Yes
Input signal 02
Yes
Input signal 03
Yes
Input signal 04
Yes
Input signal 05
Yes
Input signal 06
Yes
Input signal 07
Yes
Input signal 08
Yes
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
32
Measurand supervision I
Yes
33
Measurand supervision U
Yes
37
I>>back-up operation
Yes
38
VT fuse failure
Yes
46
Group warning
Yes
47
Group alarm
Yes
Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
51
Earth fault forward
Yes
52
Earth fault reverse
Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
796

REL 670
Section 16
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
64
Start L1
Yes
65
Start L2
Yes
66
Start L3
Yes
67
Start IN
Yes
84
General start
Yes
69
Trip L1
Yes
70
Trip L2
Yes
71
Trip L3
Yes
68
General trip
Yes
74
Fault forward/line
Yes
75
Fault reverse/busbar
Yes
78
Zone 1
Yes
79
Zone 2
Yes
80
Zone 3
Yes
81
Zone 4
Yes
82
Zone 5
Yes
76
Signal transmitted
Yes
77
Signal received
Yes
73
SCL, Fault location in ohm
Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfault
protection functions.
FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
64
Start L1
Yes
65
Start L2
Yes
66
Start L3
Yes
REL 670

797
Section 16
Info. no.
Message
Supported
67
Start IN
Yes
84
General start
Yes
69
Trip L1
Yes
70
Trip L2
Yes
71
Trip L3
Yes
68
General trip
Yes
74
Fault forward/line
Yes
75
Fault reverse/busbar
Yes
85
Breaker failure
Yes
86
Trip measuring system L1
Yes
87
Yes
88
Yes
89
Trip measuring system N
Yes
90
Over current trip I>
Yes
91
Over current trip I>>
Yes
92
Earth fault trip IN>
Yes
93
Earth fault trip IN>>
Yes
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
16
Autorecloser active
Yes
128
CB on by Autorecloser
Yes
130
Autorecloser blocked
Yes
Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU.
Measurands in public range, I103Meas
The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
798

REL 670
Section 16
Info. no.
Message
Supported
148
IL1
Yes
144, 145,
148
IL2
Yes
148
IL3
Yes
147
IN, Neutral current
Yes
148
UL1
Yes
148
UL2
Yes
148
UL3
Yes
145, 146
UL1-UL2
Yes
147
UN, Neutral voltage
Yes
146, 148
P, active power
Yes
146, 148
Q, reactive power
Yes
148
f, frequency
Yes
Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr

defined in private range 25 27. One for each instance.
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
Meas1
Yes
Meas2
Yes
Meas3
Yes
Meas4
Yes
Meas5
Yes
Meas6
Yes
Meas7
Yes
Meas8
Yes
Meas9
Yes
Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
REL 670
IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1


799
Section 16
IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1

VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1
VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private
range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance Upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for
transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the
master) will not be reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded
disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances will
be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when a
disturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has been
recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however,
some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder
in Rex67x.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF
(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates
whether:
Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start/pick-up
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information
is always set (hard coded) to:
800

REL 670
Section 16
TP
Recorded fault with trip. [1]
TM
Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV
Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to

the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes
action. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each
disturbance.
ASDU26
When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate fault
number in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip and
auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is in
Rex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the
disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever
he connects to the corresponding input.
Interoperability, physical layer
Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485
No
number of loads
No
Optical interface
glass fibre
Yes
plastic fibre
Yes
Transmission speed
96000 bit/s
Yes
19200 bit/s
Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used
Yes
Connectors
REL 670
connector F-SMA
No
connector BFOC/2.5
Yes

801
Section 16
Interoperability, application layer
Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU
Yes
Time-tagged message
Yes
Time-tagged message with rel. time
Yes
Measurands I
Yes
Time-tagged message with rel. time
Yes
Identification
Yes
Yes
End of general interrogation
Yes
Measurands II
Yes
10
Generic data
No
11
Generic identification
No
23
List of recorded disturbances
Yes
26
Ready for transm. of disturbance data
Yes
27
Ready for transm. of a channel
Yes
28
Ready for transm of tags
Yes
29
Transmission of tags
Yes
30
Transmission fo disturbance data
Yes
31
End of transmission
Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction

ASDU
Yes
Yes
General interrogation
Yes
10
Generic data
No
20
General command
Yes
21
Generic command
No
24
Order for disturbance data transmission
Yes
25
Acknowledgement for distance data transmission
Yes
Selection of basic application functions
802
Test mode
No
Blocking of monitoring direction
Yes
Disturbance data
Yes
Private data
Yes
Generic services
No

REL 670
Section 16
16.5.2.2
Communication ports
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
depending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of
the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
16.5.3
Function block
BLOCK
ICMAI103IEDCMD
19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
en05000689.vsd
ICMDI103CMD
BLOCK
16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
en05000684.vsd
BLOCK
ICM1I103UserCMD
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
en05000693.vsd
IEV1I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
21_TESTM
en05000688.vsd
REL 670

803
Section 16
IS01I103UsrDef
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
en05000694.vsd
ISU1I103Superv
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
en05000692.vsd
ISEFI103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
en05000685.vsd
IZ01I103FltDis
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
73_SCL
FLTLOC
ARINPROG
en05000686.vsd
804

REL 670
Section 16
IFL1I103FltStd
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
en05000687.vsd
IAR1I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_UNSU
en05000683.vsd
IMM1I103Meas
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F
en05000690.vsd
IMU1I103MeasUsr
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
en05000691.vsd
16.5.4
REL 670

805
Section 16
Table 479:
Input signals for the I103AR (IAR1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of status reporting
16_ARACT
Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON
Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser
130_UNSU
Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing
Table 480:
Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Table 481:
Block of commands
Input signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Table 482:
Block of commands
Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
Information number 19, reset LEDs
23_GRP1
Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
21_TESTM
Information number 21, test mode is active
Table 483:
Input signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Table 484:
Block of commands
Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
INPUT1
Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2
Binary signal input 2
806

REL 670
Section 16
Signal
Description
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
Table 485:
Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
32_MEASI
Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU
Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP
Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF
Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA
Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL
Information number 47, group alarm
Table 486:
Input signals for the I103EF (ISEF-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
51_EFFW
Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV
Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
Table 487:
Input signals for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
64_STL1
Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
Information number 67, start residual current IN
84_STGEN
Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1
Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
Information number 68, trip general
74_FW
Information number 74, forward/line
REL 670

807
Section 16
Signal
Description
75_REV
Information number 75, reverse/bus
78_ZONE1
Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
76_TRANS
Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV
Information number 77, signal recevied
73_SCL
Information number 73, fault location in ohm
FLTLOC
Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)
ARINPROG
Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
Table 488:
Input signals for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function block
Signal
808
Description
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
Information number 67, start residual curent IN
84_STGEN
Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
Information number 68, trip general
74_FW
Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV
Information number 75, reverse/bus
85_BFP
Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1
Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC
Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC
Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF
Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF
Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG
Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

REL 670
Section 16
Table 489:
Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of service value reporting
INPUT1
Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
Table 490:
Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of service value reporting
IL1
Service value for current phase L1
IL2
IL3
IN
Service value for residual current IN
UL1
Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN
Service value for residual voltage UN
Service value for active power
Service value for reactive power
Service value for system frequency
Table 491:
Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal
REL 670
Description
19-LEDRS
Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1
Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

809
Section 16
Table 492:
Output signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal
Description
16-AR
Information number 16, block of autorecloser
17-DIFF
Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT
Information number 18, block of protection
Table 493:
Output signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block
Signal
16.5.5
Command output 1
OUTPUT2
Command output 2
OUTPUT3
Command output 3
OUTPUT4
Command output 4
OUTPUT5
Command output 5
OUTPUT6
Command output 6
OUTPUT7
Command output 7
OUTPUT8
Command output 8
Setting parameters
Table 494:
Parameter
General settings for the I103SLM (IECC-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
0 - 255
30
Slave address
BaudRate
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on serial
line
RevPolarity
Off
On
On
Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTim
e
1.0 - 3600.0
0.1
5.0
Cyclic reporting time

of measurments
Table 495:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 496:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
810
Description
OUTPUT1
General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
255
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
General settings for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function

Range
1 - 255

Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
REL 670
Section 16
Table 497:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 498:
Parameter
General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
PULSEMOD
0-1
Mode
Pulse mode
0=Steady, 1=Pulsed
0.200 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
INFNO_1
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 1 (1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
Table 499:
Parameter
General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
INFNO_1
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 1
(1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 2
(1-255)
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 3
(1-255)
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 4
(1-255)
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 5
(1-255)
REL 670

811
Section 16
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 6
(1-255)
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 7
(1-255)
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 8
(1-255)
Table 500:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 501:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 502:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 503:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 504:
Parameter
General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103EF (ISEF-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
160
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
128
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
25
FunT
INFNO
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for measurands
(1-255)
RatedMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 1
RatedMeasur2
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 2
812

REL 670
Section 16
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 3
RatedMeasur4
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 4
RatedMeasur5
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 5
RatedMeasur6
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 6
RatedMeasur7
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 7
RatedMeasur8
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 8
RatedMeasur9
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 9
Table 505:
Parameter
REL 670
Range
RatedMeasur3
Basic general settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function

Default
Unit
RatedIL1
Range
1 - 99999
3000
Rated current phase

L1
RatedIL2
1 - 99999
3000
Rated current phase

L2
RatedIL3
1 - 99999
3000
Rated current phase

L3
RatedIN
1 - 99999
3000
Rated residual
current IN
RatedUL1
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated voltage for

phase L1
RatedUL2
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated voltage for

phase L2
RatedUL3
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated voltage for

phase L3
RatedUL1-UL2
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated voltage for

phase-phase L1-L2
RatedUN
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated residual
voltage UN
RatedP
0.00 - 2000.00
0.05
1200.00
MW
Rated value for active

power
RatedQ
0.00 - 2000.00
0.05
1200.00
MVA
Rated value for

reactive power
RatedF
50.0 - 60.0
10.0
50.0
Hz
Rated system
frequency
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT

Step
Description
813
Section 16
16.5.6
Technical data
Table 506:
Function
Value
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed
9600, 19200 Bd
16.6
Automation bits (AUBI)
16.6.1
Introduction
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the
CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the
DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the
BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON).
16.6.2
The AUBI function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as
a Binary Output point in DNP. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP. This
object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate
a AUBI output point you send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulseOff, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex:
pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give you 5 positive 100 ms
pulses, 300 ms apart. There is a BLOCK inputs signal, which will disable the
operation of the function, in the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That
means that upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be
set on 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receiving data from
the DNP master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will
be set by the DNP master again, momentarily. For the AUBI, the PSTO input
determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in
Remote. If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
814

REL 670
Section 16
16.6.3
Function block
ABI1AutoBits
BLOCK
PSTO
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
NAME17
NAME18
NAME19
NAME20
NAME21
NAME22
NAME23
NAME24
NAME25
NAME26
NAME27
NAME28
NAME29
NAME30
NAME31
NAME32
CMDBIT1
CMDBIT2
CMDBIT3
CMDBIT4
CMDBIT5
CMDBIT6
CMDBIT7
CMDBIT8
CMDBIT9
CMDBIT10
CMDBIT11
CMDBIT12
CMDBIT13
CMDBIT14
CMDBIT15
CMDBIT16
CMDBIT17
CMDBIT18
CMDBIT19
CMDBIT20
CMDBIT21
CMDBIT22
CMDBIT23
CMDBIT24
CMDBIT25
CMDBIT26
CMDBIT27
CMDBIT28
CMDBIT29
CMDBIT30
CMDBIT31
CMDBIT32
en06000504.vsd
Figure 391:
16.6.4
AUBI function block

Table 507:
Input signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
PSTO
Table 508:
Output signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block
Signal
Description
CMDBIT1
Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2
Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3
Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4
Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5
Command out bit 5
REL 670

815
Section 16
Signal
16.6.5
Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7
Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8
Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9
Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10
Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11
Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12
Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13
Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14
Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15
Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16
Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17
Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18
Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19
Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20
Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21
Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22
Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23
Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24
Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25
Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26
Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27
Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28
Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29
Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30
Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31
Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32
Command out bit 32
Setting parameters
Table 509:
Parameter
Operation
Table 510:
Parameter
Operation
816
Description
CMDBIT6
Basic general settings for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function

Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation Off / On
Basic general settings for the DNP3 (DNP--) function

Range
Off
ON

Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
On
REL 670
Section 16
Table 511:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
Serial-Mode
Off
Operation mode
BaudRate
300 Bd
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
Baud-rate for serial

port
WireMode
Four-wire
Two-wire
Two-wire
RS485 wire mode
Table 512:
Parameter
REL 670
Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DLinkConfirm
Never
Sometimes
Always
Never
Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Data-link confirm
timeout in s
DLinkRetries
0 - 255
Data-link maximum
retries
tRxToTxMinDel
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Rx to Tx minimum
delay in s
DataBits
5-8
Data bits
StopBits
1-2
Stop bits
Parity
No
Even
Odd
Even
Parity
RTSEnable
No
Yes
No
RTS enable
tRTSWarmUp
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.050
RS485 back-off delay

in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
RS485 maximum
back-off random
delay in s

817
Section 16
Table 513:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept

UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDP portfor initial

NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote

client/master
Table 514:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch3TCPIP (DNC3-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept

UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port for initial

NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote

client/master
Table 515:
Parameter
818

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept

UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000

NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote

client/master

REL 670
Section 16
Table 516:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept

UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000

NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote

client/master
Table 517:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
REL 670

819
Section 16
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation
Table 518:
Parameter
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
Address query enable
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
Enable application for

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
Confirm each multiple

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
Unsolicited response,
event class mask
820

REL 670
Section 16
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
request after timeout
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
Allow DNP to set time

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
Use average of 3 time

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
Table 519:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
REL 670

821
Section 16
Parameter
822
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation

REL 670
Section 16
Table 520:
Parameter
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

generated
REL 670

823
Section 16
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 521:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
824

REL 670
Section 16
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation
Table 522:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retry mode
REL 670

825
Section 16
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 523:
Parameter
Range
Description

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
826

REL 670
Section 16
Parameter
REL 670
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation

827
Section 16
Table 524:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

generated
828

REL 670
Section 16
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 525:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
REL 670

829
Section 16
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation
Table 526:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retry mode
830

REL 670
Section 16
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
tURRetryDelay
Range
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
16.7
Single command, 16 signals (CD)
16.7.1
Introduction
Description
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from
the local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputs
that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user
defined functionality.
REL 670

831
Section 16
16.7.2
The single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary output
signals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation
system or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a
maximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool.
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting
is done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. The
length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has a
memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a
BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to
built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the
IED.
16.7.3
Function block
CD01SingleCmd
BLOCK
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
en05000698.vsd
16.7.4

Table 527:
Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK
832

Description
Block single command function
REL 670
Section 16
Table 528:
Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal
16.7.5
Description
OUT1
Single command output 1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
Setting parameters
Table 529:
Basic general settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function
Parameter
Mode
Range
Off
Steady
Pulsed
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation mode
16.8
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit

(MT)
16.8.1
Introduction
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from
other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/
inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control
purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with
other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with
16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
REL 670

833
Section 16
16.8.2
Two multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmit
function blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670.
Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command
block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).
Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48
multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time are
available in the IED 670s.
The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which
can be controlled from other IEDs.
The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to
built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the
terminal.
The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID
to 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.
16.8.3
Design
16.8.3.1
General
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on
the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool.
0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,
that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from
the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic
connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer
than the execution cycle time for the command function block.
16.8.4
Function block
834

REL 670
Section 16
CM01MultiCmd
BLOCK
ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
en06000007.vsd
Figure 392:
CM function block
MT01MultiTransm
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
ERROR
en06000008.vsd
Figure 393:
16.8.5
MT function block

Table 530:
Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK
REL 670

Description
Block of function
835
Section 16
Table 531:
Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal
Description
BLOCK
Block of function
INPUT1
Input 1
INPUT2
Input 2
INPUT3
Input 3
INPUT4
Input 4
INPUT5
Input 5
INPUT6
Input 6
INPUT7
Input 7
INPUT8
Input 8
INPUT9
Input 9
INPUT10
Input 10
INPUT11
Input 11
INPUT12
Input 12
INPUT13
Input 13
INPUT14
Input 14
INPUT15
Input 15
INPUT16
Input 16
Table 532:
Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal
Description
ERROR
MultiReceive error
NEWDATA
New data is received
OUTPUT1
Output 1
OUTPUT2
Output 2
OUTPUT3
Output 3
OUTPUT4
Output 4
OUTPUT5
Output 5
OUTPUT6
Output 6
OUTPUT7
Output 7
OUTPUT8
Output 8
OUTPUT9
Output 9
OUTPUT10
Output 10
OUTPUT11
Output 11
OUTPUT12
Output 12
OUTPUT13
Output 13
OUTPUT14
Output 14
836

REL 670
Section 16
Signal
Description
OUTPUT15
Output 15
OUTPUT16
Output 16
VALID
Output data is valid
Table 533:
Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal
Description
ERROR
16.8.6
Setting parameters
Table 534:
Parameter
General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function

Default
Unit
tMaxCycleTime
0.050 - 200.000
0.001
11.000
Maximum cycle time

between receptions of
input data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum cycle time

between receptions of
input data
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output

signals
tPulseTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Pulse length for multi

command outputs
Table 535:
Parameter
REL 670
MultiSend error
Range
Step
Description
General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
5.000
Maximum time
interval between
transmission of output
data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum time interval

between transmission
of output data

837
838
Section 17
Remote communication
Section 17 Remote communication

About this chapter
This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware
functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
17.1
Binary signal transfer to remote end

Function block name: BSR--, BST--
ANSI number:
BSDGGIO
Function block name: BRx--;BTx--
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO
17.1.1
Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection in
RED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other
600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for
any purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other
binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an
LDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a
64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communication
with four remote IEDs.
REL 670

839
Section 17
17.1.2
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s
channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same
in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is
C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be
transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated
with C37.94).
Start
flag
8 bits
Information
n x 16 bits
CRC
Stop
flag
16 bits
8 bits
en01000134.vsd
Figure 394:
Data message structure
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition.
The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing
is included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function
detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight
binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented
as sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity
of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the
capacity of 192 signals.
17.1.3
Function block
The function blocks are not represented in CAP 531 configuration
tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a LDCM is
included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the
SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMBI) of
the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.
840

REL 670
Section 17
CRM1LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
en07000043.vsd
CRM2LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
en07000044.vsd
Figure 395:
CRM function blocks
CRB1LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGT HERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL
en05000451.vsd
Figure 396:
17.1.4
CRB function block

Table 536:
Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function block
Signal
Description
COMFAIL
Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT
Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR
No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS
No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR
Incoming message from a wrong terminal
REL 670

841
Section 17
Signal
Description
LNGTHERR
Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR
Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR
Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR
Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF
Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
REMGPSER
Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU
Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL
Low signal level on the receive link
Table 537:
Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function block
Signal
Description
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR
Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU
Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL
Table 538:
Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block
Signal
842
Description
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL

REL 670
Section 17
17.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 539:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode
when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
CT-GRP1
Summation mode for

transmitted current
values
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Reset delay before

communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
Time delay before

switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
20
ms
Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
REL 670

843
Section 17
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
600
us
Maximum time diff for

ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
300
us
Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off
Invert polarization for

X21 communication
Table 540:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode
when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChann
el
CT-GRP1
Summation mode for

transmitted current
values
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Reset delay before

communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
Time delay before

switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

switching back from
redundant channel
844

REL 670
Section 17
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
20
ms
Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
600
us
Maximum time diff for

ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
300
us
Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off

X21 communication
Table 541:
Parameter
REL 670
Range
Description
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Reset delay before

communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off

X21 communication

845
846
Section 18
Hardware
Section 18 Hardware
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includes
diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals
and modules.
18.1
Overview
18.1.1
Variants of case- and HMI display size
xx04000458.eps
Figure 397:
REL 670
1/2 19 case with medium HMI display.

847
Section 18
Hardware
xx04000459.eps
Figure 398:
1/2 19 case with small HMI display.
Figure 399:
xx05000763.eps
Figure 400:
848

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
xx04000460.eps
Figure 401:
xx04000461.eps
Figure 402:
18.1.2
Case from the rear side
REL 670

849
Section 18
Hardware
Table 542:
Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM, SOM or IOM
X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and

X52
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

GSM
X51, X52
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B 1)
X302
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2) 3)
X312
LDCM 2)
X313
TRM
X401
1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2 or P31:3
3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2
Note!
1 One LDCM can be included depending of availability of
IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.
850

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Table 543:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11

MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to

X101 and X102
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM,

MIM or GSM
X101, X102
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B or LDCM 1) 2)
X302
LDCM 2)
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2) 3)
X312
LDCM 2)
X313
TRM
X401

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2
and P30:3
Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability
of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.
REL 670

851
Section 18
Hardware
Table 544:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11

MIM

X72
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM,

MIM or GSM
X71, X72
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2)
X302
LDCM 2)
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2) 3)
X312
LDCM 2)
X313
LDCM 2)
X322
LDCM 2)
X323
TRM 1
X401
TRM 2
X411

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2, P32:3,
P30:2 and P30:3
Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIGB respective RS485 modules.
Table 545:
852

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM, SOM,

IOM or MIM

X162
BIM, BOM, SOM,

IOM, MIM or GSM
X161, X162
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B or LDCM
1,2)
X302
LDCM 2)
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2)
3)
X312
LDCM 2)
X313
TRM
X401

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2
and P30:3
Note!
REL 670

853
Section 18
Hardware
Table 546:
Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM, SOM,

IOM or MIM

X132
BIM, BOM, SOM,

IOM, MIM or GSM
X131, X132
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B or LDCM
1,2)
X302
LDCM 2)
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2)
3)
X312
LDCM 2)
X313
LDCM 2)
X322
LDCM 2)
X323
TRM 1
X401
TRM 2
X411

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2,
P32:3, P30:2 and P30:3
Note!
18.2
Hardware modules
18.2.1
Overview
Table 547:
Basic modules, always included
Module
Description
Combined backplane module (CBM)
A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals

between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is not
connected directly to this board.
Universal backplane module (UBM)
A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED

backplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc.
Power supply module (PSM)
Including a regulated DC/DC converter that

supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
An internal fail alarm output is available.
854

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Module
Description
Numerical module (NUM)
Module for overall application control. All

information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push

button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to
connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM)
Transformer module that galvanically separates the

internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has
12 analog inputs.
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Table 548:
Application specific modules
Module
Description
Binary input module (BIM)
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM)
Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole

command outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM)
Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10

outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Line data communication modules (LDCM), short

range, medium range, longrange, X21
Modules used for digital communication to remote

terminal.
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103

communication modules (SLM)
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103

communication
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
mA input module (MIM)
Analog input module with 6 independent,

galvanically separated channels.
GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
Used to provide the IED with GPS time

synchronization.
Static output module (SOM)
Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over

output relays.
IRIG-B Time synchronization module
Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both

pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude
modulated signals and one is used for optical input
type ST for PPS time synchronization.
18.2.2
Combined backplane module (CBM)
18.2.2.1
Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.
18.2.2.2
Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM
backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
REL 670

855
Section 18
Hardware
Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able
to communicate with CAN based modules.
If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal
Fail signal IRF.
18.2.2.3
Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM:
with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on

the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are
used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs.
See figure 404
with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on
the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used
by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 403
Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are
connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.
2
en05000516.vsd
Figure 403:
CBM for 1 TRM.
Pos Description
856
CAN slots
CPCI slots

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
en05000755.vsd
Figure 404:
CBM for 2 TRM.
Pos Description
1
CAN slots
CPCI slots
en05000756.vsd
Figure 405:
CBM position, rear view.
Pos Description
1
REL 670
CBM

857
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.3
Universal backplane module (UBM)
18.2.3.1
Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted
above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog
digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
18.2.3.2
Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the
transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical
processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on
the front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM
which provides the signal path to the NUM board.
18.2.3.3
Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion
module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
The UBM exists in 2 versions.
for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and
one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 407
for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and
one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 408.
The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The
48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.
858

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
TRM
ADM
NUM
AD Data
X1
X2
X3
X4
RS485
X10
X10
Ethernet
Front
LHMI connection
port
Ethernet
X5
en05000489.vsd
Figure 406:
UBM block diagram.
en05000757.vsd
Figure 407:
UBM for 1 TRM.
en05000758.vsd
Figure 408:
REL 670
UBM for 2 TRM.

859
Section 18
Hardware
en05000759.vsd
Figure 409:
UBM position, rear view.
Pos Description
1
UBM
18.2.4
Power supply module (PSM)
18.2.4.1
Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output
is available.
18.2.4.2
Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC
input voltage ranges see table 549. The power supply module contains a built-in, selfregulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the
external battery system.
860

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Power
supply
Filter
Backplane connector
Input connector
Block diagram
Supervision
99000516.vsd
Figure 410:
18.2.4.3
PSM Block diagram.
Technical data
Table 549:
PSM - Power supply module
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input)
EL = (24 - 60) V
EL = (90 - 250) V
EL 20%
EL 20%
Power consumption
50 W typically
Auxiliary DC power in-rush
< 5 A during 0.1 s
18.2.5
Numeric processing module (NUM)
18.2.5.1
Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is
the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.
REL 670

861
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.5.2
Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf
compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the
backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots
onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash
file system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of
the real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.
862

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.5.3
Block diagram
Compact
Flash
Logic
PMC
connector
Memory
Ethernet
UBM
connector
PC-MIP
PCI-PCIbridge
Backplane
connector
North
bridge
CPU
en04000473.vsd
Figure 411:
18.2.6
Numeric processing module block diagram
Local human-machine interface (LHMI)

Refer to Chapter "Local human-machine interface" for information.
18.2.7
Transformer input module (TRM)
18.2.7.1
Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The
module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
REL 670

863
Section 18
Hardware
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
18.2.7.2
Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions:
6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

12 current channels
6 current channels
The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order.

The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM.
Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix
for analog inputs (SMAI)".
18.2.7.3
Technical data
Table 550:
Quantity
Rated value
Current
Ir = 1 or 5 A
Operative range
(0-100) x Ir
Permissive overload
4 Ir cont.
100 Ir for 1 s *)
Burden
< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A
Ac voltage
Ur = 110 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
< 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency
fr = 50/60 Hz
*)
864
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Nominal range
(0.2-40) Ir
0.5288 V
5%
max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.8

(ADM)
18.2.8.1
Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC
slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards
according to table 551. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).
Table 551:
PC-MIP cards
PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PMC cards
LDCM
SLM
LR-LDCM
OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM
OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485
18.2.8.2
Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic
voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate
A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is
obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz
and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
REL 670

865
Section 18
Hardware
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
AD1
AD2
1.2v
AD3
AD4
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
en05000474.vsd
Figure 412:
866
The ADM layout

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.9
Binary input module (BIM)
18.2.9.1
Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs
to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable
and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also
be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables
extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated
electrical circuits.
18.2.9.2
Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level
of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
inputs (SMBI)".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a
hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Figure 413 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage
levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand
disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.
REL 670

867
Section 18
Hardware
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
18
24/30V
48/60V
110/125V
220/250V
xx06000391.vsd
Figure 413:
Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Guaranteed operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the
CAN-bus on the backplane.
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 414 and 415.
868

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
[mA]
30
1
35
70
[ms]
en07000104.vsd
Figure 414:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of

BIM.
[mA]
30
1
3.5
7.0
[ms]
en07000105.vsd
Figure 415:
REL 670
Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

869
Section 18
Hardware
Opto isolated input
Process connector
Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Microcontroller
Opto isolated input
Process connector
Opto isolated input
Memory
Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
CAN
Opto isolated input
Backplane connector
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
99000503.vsd
Figure 416:
Block diagram of the Binary input module.
18.2.9.3
Technical data
870

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Table 552:
BIM - Binary input module
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
16
DC voltage, RL
24/40 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/40 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency
10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator
Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz
Table 553:
BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
16
DC voltage, RL
24/40 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/40 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency
10 pulses/s max
Balanced counter input frequency
40 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator
Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz
18.2.10
Binary output modules (BOM)
18.2.10.1
Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output
or any signalling purpose.
18.2.10.2
Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each
pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 417. This
should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the
back of the IED.
REL 670

871
Section 18
Hardware
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker
trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker
auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is
required.
For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for
binary outputs (SMBO)".
Output module
3
xx00000299.vsd
Figure 417:
Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2
872

REL 670
Relay
Relay
Relay
Process connector
Relay
Relay
Relay
Section 18
Hardware
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Backplane connector
Relay
Microcontroller
Relay
Relay
CAN
Process connector
Relay
Relay
Relay
Memory
Relay
Relay
99000505.vsd
Figure 418:
18.2.10.3
Block diagram of the Binary Output Module
Technical data
Table 554:
BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity
Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs
24
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min
1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity

Continuous
1s
8A
10 A
REL 670

873
Section 18
Hardware
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
18.2.11
Static binary output module (SOM)
18.2.11.1
Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
18.2.11.2
Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of:
An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing
CAN-bus to backplane CBM

IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)
The following parts are supervised:
874
Interruption in relay coil

Short circuit of relay coil
Driver failure

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Drive &
Read back
Process connector
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Codeflash
Drive &
Read back
MCU
Drive &
Read back
CANdriver
Drive &
Read back
DC/DC
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Internal_fail_n
AC_fail_n
RCAN_ID
Sync
Drive &
Read back
Backplane connector
Process connector
Drive &
Read back
Reset
Drive &
Read back
en07000115.vsd
Figure 419:
REL 670
Block diagram of the static output module

875
Section 18
Hardware
Figure 420:
18.2.11.3
Connection diagram of the static output module
Technical data
Table 555:
SOM - Static output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
876
Static binary outputs
Electromechanical relay outputs
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min
1000 V rms

Continuous
1s
8A
10 A
Static binary outputs:

Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum
capacitance of 0.2 mF
0.2 s
1.0 s
20 A
10 A
Electromechanical relay outputs:

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
20 A
10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time, Static outputs
<1 ms

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.12
Binary input/output module (IOM)
18.2.12.1
Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels
are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signalling
purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where
short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for
required binary input information.
18.2.12.2
Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase
the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved
with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure
414. Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 413.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays.
One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other
group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see
figure 421.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay
is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal
matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and section "Signal matrix for binary outputs
(SMBO)".
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.
REL 670

877
Section 18
Hardware
Figure 421:
Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds

to rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rear
position X32, X42, etc.
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.
878

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
xx04000069.vsd
Figure 422:
18.2.12.3
IOM with MOV protection, relay example
Technical data
Table 556:
IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
DC voltage, RL
24/40 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/40 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
Table 557:
IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
REL 670
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
Trip and signal relays
Fast signal relays (parallel reed

relay)
Binary outputs
10
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact,

1 min
1000 V rms
800 V DC

Continuous
1s
8A
10 A
8A
10 A
Making capacity at inductive load

with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos >

0.4
250 V/8.0 A
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R

< 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load
10 nF

879
Section 18
Hardware
Table 558:
IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 60255-23)
Fast signal relays (parallel

reed relay)
Binary outputs
IOM: 10
IOM: 2
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact,

1 min
250 V rms
250 V DC

Continuous
1s
8A
10 A
8A
10 A
Making capacity at inductive

loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos

j>0.4
250 V/8.0 A
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R

< 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load
10 nF
18.2.13
Line data communication module (LDCM)
18.2.13.1
Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <150 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 423.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each module
has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available.
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.
Never look into the laser beam.
880

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.13.2
Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:
the ADM
the NUM
ID
ST
16.000
MHz
32,768
MHz
IO-connector
ST
en07000087.vsd
Figure 423:
The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector
X1
2.5V
ADN
2841
MAX
3645
DS
3904
DS
3904
ID
FPGA
256 FBGA
PCI9054
TQ176
3
2
en06000393.vsd
Figure 424:
The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width

format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
18.2.13.3
Technical data
REL 670

881
Section 18
Hardware
Table 559:
Line data communication modules (LDCM)
Characteristic
Type of LDCM
Range or value
Short range (SR)
Type of fibre
Graded-index
multimode
62.5/125 mm or
50/125 mm
Singlemode 8/125
mm
Singlemode
8/125 mm
Wave length
820 nm
1310 nm
1550 nm
20 dB (typical
distance 80 km *)
26 dB (typical
distance 120
km *)
Optical budget
Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm,
Graded-index multimode 50/125 mm
11 dB (typical
distance about 3
km *)
7 dB (typical
distance about 2
km *)
Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Optical connector
Type ST
Type FC/PC
Type FC/PC
Protocol
C37.94
C37.94
implementation **)
C37.94
implementatio
n **)
Data transmission
Synchronous
Synchronous
Synchronous
Transmission rate / Data rate
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
2 Mb/s / 64
kbit/s
Clock source
Internal or derived
from received
signal
Internal or derived
from received
signal
Internal or
derived from
received
signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation

**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as
C37.94
18.2.14
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)
18.2.14.1
Introduction
The galvanic X21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IED:s.
Examples of applications:
18.2.14.2
Line differential protection

Binary signal transfer
Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.
882

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
en07000196.vsd
Figure 425:
Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

3
en07000195.vsd
Figure 426:
1.
2.
3.
The X.21 LDCM module external connectors
Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

Ground pin
X.21: Micro D-sub 15 pole female connector according to the V11 (X.27)
balanced version
Soft ground
To avoid ground loops when the grounds are connected, a soft ground connection for
the IO-ground can be used. This is handled in the ground selection connector.
Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set:
1.
2.
3.
REL 670
No ground - leave the connector without any connection

Direct ground - connect the ground pin directly to earth
Soft ground - connect the two pins to each other

883
Section 18
Hardware
X.21 connector
Table 560:
18.2.14.3
Pinout for the X.21 communication connector
Pin number
Signal
Shield (ground)
TXD A
Control A
RXD A
Signal timing A
Ground
TXD B
10
Control B
11
RXD B
13
Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15
Not used
Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64
kbit/s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission
is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a
DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal
is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control
register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set
as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal
Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.
884

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.14.4
Technical data
Table 561:
Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity
Range or value
Connector, X.21
Micro D-sub, 15-pole female, 1.27 mm (0.050")

pitch
Connector, ground selection
2 pole screw terminal
Standard
CCITT X21
Communication speed
64 kbit/s
Insulation
1 kV
Maximum cable length
100 m
18.2.15
Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication

module (SLM)
18.2.15.1
Introduction
LON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serial
communication and one dedicated for LON communication.
18.2.15.2
Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical
fiber connectors, see figure 427. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and
the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
Figure 427:
A
REL 670
The SLM variants

Snap in connector for plastic fiber

885
Section 18
Hardware
ST connector for glass fiber
LON port
SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port
Figure 428:
18.2.15.3
The SLM layout overview
Receiver, LON
Transmitter, LON
Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103
Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103
Technical data
Table 562:
SLM LON port
Quantity
Range or value
Optical connector
Glass fibre: type ST

Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget
Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)

Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *)
Fibre diameter
Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fibre: 1 mm
886

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Table 563:
SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port
Quantity
Range or value
Optical connector
Glass fibre: type ST

Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget
Glass fibre: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *)

Plastic fibre: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *)
Fibre diameter
Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fibre: 1 mm
18.2.16
Galvanic RS485 communication module
18.2.16.1
Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0
communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a
balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a
multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires
however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX
and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves.
No special control signal is needed in this case.
18.2.16.2
Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 429:
PCI-con
PCIController
Local bus
to
wishbone
Status
Register
ID-chip
Figure 429:
Control
Register
RS485
tranceiver
Isolation
Rx
6-pole-connector
PCI-bus
Tx
Isolation
UART
Isolation
Termination
Info
Register
Isolated
DC/DC
Soft
ground
2-pole
connector
PCI-con
Internal
bus
Wishbone interconnect switch
FPGA
32 MHz
The internal structure of the RS485 card
RS485 connector pinouts
The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 430) are presented in
table 564:
REL 670

887
Section 18
Hardware
Table 564:
The arrangement for the pins
Pin
Name 2-wire
Name 4-wire
Description
RS485+
TX+
Receive/transmit high or transmit high
RS485
TX
Receive/transmit
Term
T-Term
Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver

in 2wir case) (connect to TX+)
N.A.
R-Term
Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
N.A.
RX
Receive low
N.A.
RX+
Receive high
Angle
bracket
Screw
terminal
X3
Screw
terminal
X1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
RS485
PWB
Backplane
Figure 430:
RS485 connector
2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5
Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3
Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6
Soft ground connector pinouts
A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:
Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .
Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV
18.2.16.3
Technical data
888

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Table 565:
Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity
Range or value
Communication speed
240019200 bauds
External connectors
RS-485 6-pole connector

Soft ground 2-pole connector
18.2.17
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
18.2.17.1
Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication
buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The module has one
or two optical ports with ST connectors.
18.2.17.2
Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according
to IEC6185081 have been implemented.
18.2.17.3
Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card
on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or
double channel unit.
PCI - bus Connector
100Base-FX
Transmitter
EEPROM
Ethernet Controller
ST fiber optic
connectors
100Base-FX
Receiver
PCI - PCI Bridge
100Base-FX
Transmitter
ID chip
Ethernet Controller
EEPROM
IO - bus Connector
100Base-FX
Receiver
ST fiber optic
connectors
en04000472.vsd
Figure 431:
REL 670
OEM block diagram.

889
Section 18
Hardware
ID chip
LED
Transmitter
IO bus
Receiver
Ethernet cont.
25MHz oscillator
LED
Transmitter
Ethernet cont.
25MHz oscillator
PCI to PCI
bridge
PCI bus
Receiver
en05000472.vsd
Figure 432:
18.2.17.4
OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels
Technical data
Table 566:
OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity
Rated value
Number of channels
1 or 2
Standard
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber
62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length
1300 nm
Optical connector
Type ST
Communication speed
Fast Ethernet 100 MB
18.2.18
mA input module (MIM)
18.2.18.1
Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to
+20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure
transducers.The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
18.2.18.2
Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for mA
inputs (SMMI)".
890

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter
has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately
The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory
on the module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module
communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.
Protection
& filter
Protection
& filter
Volt-ref
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
A/D Converter
Protection
& filter
Volt-ref
Volt-ref
Memory
DC/DC
Optoisolation
DC/DC
Optoisolation
DC/DC
Optoisolation
DC/DC
Optoisolation
DC/DC
A/D Converter
Protection
& filter
Optoisolation
Optoisolation
DC/DC
Microcontroller
Backplane connector
Protection
& filter
A/D Converter
CAN
Process connector
Protection
& filter
99000504.vsd
Figure 433:
MIM block diagram
18.2.18.3
Technical data
REL 670

891
Section 18
Hardware
Table 567:
MIM - mA input module
Quantity:
Rated value:
Nominal range:
Input range
5, 10, 20mA
0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Input resistance
Rin = 194 Ohm
Power consumption
each mA-board
each mA input
4W
0.1 W
18.2.19
18.2.19.1
Introduction
This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has
one SMA contact for connection to an antenna.
18.2.19.2
Design
The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slot
closest to the NUM shall always be used.
The GSM consists of
CAN carrier module (CCM)

GPS clock module (GCM)
GPS receiver unit
The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PMC card and GPS unit, see
figure 435. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of the
GCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electromagnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded
plate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS and
the GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. All
communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus.
The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide
1s accuracy at sampling level.
892

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
PMC
GPS antenna
GPS
receiver
GPS clock
module
CAN
controller
CAN
Backplane CAN
connector
CMPPS
en05000675.vsd
Figure 434:
GSM block diagram
en07000086.vsd
Figure 435:
A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables
1 GPS receiver
REL 670

893
Section 18
Hardware
2 GPS Clock module (GCM)

3 CAN carrier module (CCM)
4 Antenna connector
18.2.19.3
Technical data
Table 568:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Receiver
1s relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new

position or after power loss longer than 1 month
<30 minutes
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer

than 48 hours
<15 minutes
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter

than 48 hours
<5 minutes
18.2.20
GPS antenna
18.2.20.1
Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.
18.2.20.2
Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on
an antenna mast. See figure 436
894

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
2
3
xx04000155.vsd
Figure 436:
Antenna with console
where:
1
GPS antenna
TNC connector
Console, 78x150 mm
Mounting holes 5.5 mm
Tab for securing of antenna cable
Vertical mounting position
Horizontal mounting position
Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight
visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50%
clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.
REL 670

895
Section 18
Hardware
99001046.vsd
Figure 437:
Antenna line-of-sight
Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cable
type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to
the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna
cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.
When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the
receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is
connected.
18.2.20.3
Technical data
Table 569:
GPS Antenna and cable
Function
896
Value
Max antenna cable attenuation
26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance
50 ohm
Lightning protection
Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector
SMA in receiver end

TNC in antenna end

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.2.21
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B
18.2.21.1
Introduction
This module includes the IRIG-B time synchronization and the PPS time
synchronization.
18.2.21.2
Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle
both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type
ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.
STconnector
FPGA
PCI-con
32 MHz
OPTO_INPUT
PCI-bus
Registers
PCI-con
PCI-Controller
IRIGDecoder
ID-chip
Capture1
IRIG_INPUT
ZXING
Amplitude
modulator
Isolated
receiver
IO-con
Capture2
BNCconnector
4 mm barrier
Zero-cross
detector
MPPS
PPS
TSU
CMPPS
Isolated
DC/DC
5 to +- 12V
en06000303.vsd
Figure 438:
REL 670
IRIG-B block diagram

897
A1
C
C
DC//DC
ST
Y2
A1
Section 18
Hardware
3
2
en06000304.vsd
Figure 439:
18.2.21.3
IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for
IRIG-B signal input
Technical data
Table 570:
IRIG-B
Quantity
Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B
Number of channels PPS
Electrical connector IRIG-B
BNC
Optical connector PPS
Type ST
Type of fibre
62.5/125 m multimode fibre
18.3
Dimensions
18.3.1
Case without rear cover
898

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
D
F
Figure 440:
xx04000464.vsd
Figure 441:
Case size (mm) A
G
H
xx04000448.vsd

with 19 rack mounting kit
6U, 1/2 x 19
265.9
223.7
201.1
252.9
205.7
190.5
203.7
187.6
6U, 3/4 x 19
265.9
336.0
201.1
252.9
318.0
190.5
316.0
187.6
6U, 1/1 x 19
265.9
448.3
201.1
252.9
430.3
190.5
428.3
465.1
187.6
482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit
18.3.2
Case with rear cover
REL 670

899
Section 18
Hardware
K
D
xx05000502.vsd
xx05000501.vsd
Figure 442:
Case with rear cover.
Figure 443:
Case with rear cover

and 19 rack mounting
kit.
xx05000503.vsd
Figure 444:
Case size (mm) A
Rear cover case with

details.
6U, 1/2 x 19
265.9
223.7
242.1
255.8
205.7
190.5
203.7
228.6
6U, 3/4 x 19
265.9
336.0
242.1
255.8
318.0
190.5
316.0
228.6
6U, 1/1 x 19
265.9
448.3
242.1
255.8
430.3
190.5
428.3
465.1
228.6
482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.
900

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Case size
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19
10.47
8.81
9.53
10.07
8.10
7.50
8.02
9.00
6U, 3/4 x 19
10.47
13.23
9.53
10.07
12.52
7.50
12.4
9.00
6U, 1/1 x 19
10.47
17.65
9.53
10.07
16.86
7.50
16.86
18.31
9.00
19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.
18.3.3
Flush mounting dimensions
A
B
E
D
xx04000465.vsd
Figure 445:
Case size
Tolerance
Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm)
A
+/-1
B
+/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19"
210.1
254.3
4.0-10.0
12.5
6U, 3/4 x 19"
322.4
254.3
4.0-10.0
12.5
6U, 1/1 x 19"
434.7
254.3
4.0-10.0
12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover
REL 670

901
Section 18
Hardware
18.3.4
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions
xx06000182.vsd
Figure 446:
A 1/2 x 19 size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.
C
xx05000505.vsd
Figure 447:
902
Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.3.5
Wall mounting dimensions
A
B
E
en04000471.vsd
Figure 448:
Case size (mm)
Wall mounting
6U, 1/2 x 19
292.0
267.1
272.8
390.0
243.0
6U, 3/4 x 19
404.3
379.4
272.8
390.0
243.0
6U, 1/1 x 19
516.0
491.1
272.8
390.0
243.0
18.3.6
External resistor unit for high impedance differential

protection
WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high
voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national
low/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover
or in a separate box!
REL 670

903
[6.97]
[4.02]
[1.48]
Section 18
Hardware
[18.31]
[0.33]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[18.98]
Dimension
mm [inches]
Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit
[7.50]
[10.47]
[1.50]
Figure 449:
xx06000232.eps
[18.31]
[0.33]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[18.98]
[inches]
Figure 450:
en06000234.eps
Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit
18.4
Mounting alternatives
18.4.1
Flush mounting
18.4.1.1
Overview
All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19, cases,
can be flush mounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle
panel, for class IP54 protection.
The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x
19 and are also suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19 cases.
904

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when

IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when
mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing

must be ordered when ordering the IED.
18.4.1.2
Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1
7
2
6
5
3
4
xx06000246.vsd
Figure 451:
Flush mounting details.
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Sealing strip, used to

obtain IP54 class. The
sealing strip is factory
mounted between the
case and front plate.
Fastener
Groove
Screw, self tapping
2,9x9,5 mm
REL 670

905
Section 18
Hardware
Joining point of sealing

strip (rear view)
Panel
Screw
M5x25
18.4.2
19 panel rack mounting
18.4.2.1
Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each
size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws
for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED
size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-byside mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19.
When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that

follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
906

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
18.4.2.2
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

2
1a
1b
xx04000452.vs d
Figure 452:
19 panel rack mounting details
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
1a, 1b
Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the

left or right side of the case.
Screw
M4x6
18.4.3
Wall mounting
18.4.3.1
Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also
possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the
recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than
the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
REL 670

907
Section 18
Hardware
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules
with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON
communication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and
Line data communication module (LDCM).
18.4.3.2
Mounting procedure for wall mounting

3
4
2
1
5
6
Figure 453:
18.4.3.3
xx04000453.vs d
Wall mounting details.
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Bushing
Screw
M4x10
Screw
M6x12 or
corresponding
Mounting bar
Screw
M5x8
Side plate
How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to use
with this type of mounting. See figure 454.
908

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged
side.
View from above
3
80 mm
en06000135.vsd
Figure 454:
How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
PosNo
Description
Type
Screw
M4x10
Screw
M5x8
Rear protection cover
18.4.4
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting
18.4.4.1
Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side
up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with
other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the
IED.
REL 670

909
Section 18
Hardware
18.4.4.2
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1
xx04000456.vsd
Figure 455:
18.4.4.3
Side-by-side rack mounting details.
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Mounting plate
2, 3
Screw
16
M4x6
Mounting angle
IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending
on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type
RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of,
for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.
910

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
xx06000180.vsd
Figure 456:
IED 670 (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test
switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal
base.
18.4.5
Side-by-side flush mounting
18.4.5.1
Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required.
If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting
details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has
to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is
obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs
separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see
section "Flush mounting".
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with
other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the
IED.
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.
REL 670

911
Section 18
Hardware
18.4.5.2
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1
3
4
xx06000181.vsd
Figure 457:
Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x

19 IED).
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Mounting plate
2, 3
Screw
16
M4x6
Mounting angle
18.5
Technical data
18.5.1
Enclosure
Table 571:
912
Case
Material
Steel sheet
Front plate
Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment
Aluzink preplated steel
Finish
Light grey (RAL 7035)

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Table 572:
Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front
IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)
Rear, sides, top and

bottom
IP20
Table 573:
Weight
Case size
18.5.2
Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19
10 kg
6U, 3/4 x 19
15 kg
6U, 1/1 x 19
18 kg
Connection system
Table 574:
CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type
Rated voltage and current
Maximum conductor area
Terminal blocks of feed through

type
250 V AC, 20 A
4mm2
Terminal blocks suitable for ring

lug terminals
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2
Table 575:
Binary I/O connection system
Connector type
Rated voltage
Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type
250 V AC
2.5 mm2
2 1 mm2
Terminal blocks suitable for ring

lug terminals
300 V AC
3 mm2
Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for

Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.
18.5.3
Influencing factors
REL 670

913
Section 18
Hardware
Table 576:
Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter
Reference value
Nominal range
Influence
Ambient temperature,
operate value
+20 C
-10 C to +55 C
0.02% /C
Relative humidity
Operative range
10%-90%
0%-95%
10%-90%
Storage temperature
-40 C to +70 C
Table 577:
Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on
Reference value
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage

Operative range
max. 2%
Full wave rectified
Within nominal range Influence

12% of EL
0.01% /%
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate

value
20% of EL
0.01% /%
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage
24-60 V DC 20%
90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption interval
050 ms
Table 578:
0 s
Correct
behaviour at
power down
Restart time
<180 s
Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602556)
Dependence on
18.5.4
No restart
Within nominal range
Influence
Frequency dependence, operate

value
fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
1.0% / Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence

(20% content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr
1.0%
Harmonic frequency dependence

for distance protection (10%
content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr
6.0%
Type tests according to standard

Table 579:
Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
Type test values
Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance
2.5 kV
IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
Ring wave immunity test
2-4 kV
IEC 61000-4-12, Class III
Surge withstand capability test
2.5 kV, oscillatory

4.0 kV, fast transient
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV

IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
914

REL 670
Section 18
Hardware
Test
Type test values

15 kV air discharge
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
Fast transient disturbance
4 kV
IEC 60255-22-4,Class A
Surge immunity test
1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms

high energy
IEC 60255-22-5
Power frequency immunity test
150-300 V,
50 Hz
IEC 60255-22-7, Class A
Power frequency magnetic field test
1000 A/m, 3 s
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic field test
100 A/m
IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
Radiated electromagnetic field

disturbance
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz
IEC 60255-22-3

disturbance
20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz
EN 61000-4-3

disturbance
35 V/m
26-1000 MHz
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
Conducted electromagnetic field

disturbance
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz
IEC 60255-22-6
Radiated emission
30-1000 MHz
IEC 60255-25
Conducted emission
0.15-30 MHz
IEC 60255-25
Table 580:
Insulation
Test
Type test values
Reference standard
Dielectric test
2.0 kV AC, 1 min.
Impulse voltage test
5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance
>100 MW at 500 VDC
Table 581:
IEC 60255-5
Environmental tests
Test
Type test value
Reference standard
Cold test
Test Ad for 16 h at -25C
IEC 60068-2-1
Storage test
Test Ad for 16 h at -40C
IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat test
Test Bd for 16 h at +70C
IEC 60068-2-2
Damp heat test, steady state
Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C and

humidity 93%
IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat test, cyclic
Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 C

and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24
hours)
IEC 60068-2-30
Table 582:
CE compliance
Test
REL 670
Reference standards
Direct application
Indirect application
According to
Immunity
EN 50263
Emissivity
EN 50263
Low voltage directive
EN 50178

915
Section 18
Hardware
Table 583:
Test
916
Mechanical tests
Type test values
Reference standards
Vibration
Class I
IEC 60255-21-1
Shock and bump
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic
Class I
IEC 60255-21-3

REL 670
Section 19
Labels
Section 19 Labels
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them on
the IED.
19.1
Different labels
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
xx06000574.eps
REL 670

917
Section 19
Labels
918

Product type, description and serial number
Order number, dc supply voltage and rated

frequency
Optional, customer specific information
Manufacturer
Transformer input module, rated currents

and voltages
Transformer designations
Ordering and serial number
REL 670
Section 19
Labels
1
2
3
4
en06000573.eps
REL 670
Warning label
Caution label
Class 1 laser product label
Warning label

919
920
Section 20
Connection diagrams
Section 20 Connection diagrams

This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical
connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical
connections to the IED.
REL 670

921
Section 20
Connection diagrams
922

REL 670
Section 20
Connection diagrams
REL 670

923
Section 20
Connection diagrams
924

REL 670
Section 20
Connection diagrams
REL 670

925
Section 20
Connection diagrams
926

REL 670
Section 20
Connection diagrams
REL 670

927
Section 20
Connection diagrams
928

REL 670
Section 20
Connection diagrams
REL 670

929
Section 20
Connection diagrams
930

REL 670
Section 20
Connection diagrams
REL 670

931
Section 20
Connection diagrams
932

REL 670
Section 20
Connection diagrams
REL 670

933
Section 20
Connection diagrams
934

REL 670
Section 20
Connection diagrams
REL 670

935
Section 20
Connection diagrams
936

REL 670
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

About this chapter
This chapter describes current dependant time delay functionality. Both ANSI and
IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.
21.1
Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in
different points in the network different time delays for the different relays are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
connected in series.
I>
I>
I>
xx05000129.vsd
Figure 458:
Three overcurrent protections connected in series

Stage 3
Time
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
Figure 459:
REL 670
Definite time overcurrent characteristics

937
Section 21
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
Figure 460:
Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated

Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
Reset time of the protection
Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.

A1
B1
I>
I>
Feeder
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
en05000132.vsd
Figure 461:
Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
where:
938
t=0
is The fault occurs
t=t1
is Protection B1 trips
t=t2
is Breaker at B1 opens

REL 670
Section 21
t=t3
is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time
t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts
its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences
between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is
sent to the B1 circuit breaker.
At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault
current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.
The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at
t2 the timer of protection A1 is active.
At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible
when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type
of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:
If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults,
starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the
system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.
21.2
21.2.1
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependent
inverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based
standard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the
component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component
REL 670

939
Section 21
always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used
in timing calculations.
In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached or
until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the
reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IEC
Definite time) are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 180.
t[ s ] =
+ Bk
i p
-C
in >
(Equation 180)
where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in>
is the set start current for step n,
is set time multiplier for step n and
is the measured current.
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the
set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be
seen:
i p
- C = Ak
in >
(top - B k )
(Equation 181)
where:
top
is the operation time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according
to equation 182, in addition to the constant time delay:
i p
in > - C dt A k
0
(Equation 182)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
940

REL 670
Section 21
i( j ) p
- C A k
j =1 in >
Dt
(Equation 183)
where:
j=1
is the first protection execution cycle when a fault

has been detected, i.e. when
i
in >
>1
Dt
is the time interval between two consecutive

executions of the protection algorithm,
is the number of the execution of the algorithm

when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. when a
trip is given and
i (j)
is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list of
characteristics in table 584 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.
Table 584:
Curve name and index no.
Curve name
Curve index no.
Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
10
IEC Inverse
11
IEC Extremely. Inverse
12
IEC Short Time Inverse
13
IEC Long Time Inverse
14
For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to
table 585:
REL 670

941
Section 21
Table 585:
Inverse time curves for ANSI/IEEE characteristics
Parameter/operationMode
1 = ANSI Extremely inverse
28.2
0.1217
2.0
2 = ANSI Very inverse
19.61
0.491
2.0
3 = ANSI Inverse
0.0086
0.0185
0.02
4 = ANSI Moderately inverse
0.0515
0.1140
0.02
6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse
64.07
0.250
2.0
7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse
28.55
0.712
2.0
8 = ANSI Long-time inverse
0.086
0.185
0.02
For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to
table 586:
Table 586:
Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics
Parameter/operationMode
p (a)
9 = IEC Normal inverse
A(b)
0.14
0.02
10 = IEC Very inverse
13.5
1.0
11 = IEC Inverse
0.14
0.02
12 = IEC Extremely inverse
80.0
2.0
13 = IEC Short-time inverse
0.05
0.04
14 = IEC Long-time inverse
120
1.0
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, see
figure 462.
942

REL 670
Section 21
Operate
time
tnMin
Current
en05000133.vsd
Figure 462:
Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse.
The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical
ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 185:
k
t[ s ] =
in >
0.339 - 0.235
(Equation 185)
where:
in>
is the measured current.
The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex
protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for
REL 670

943
Section 21
sensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistive
earth faults. The curve is described by equation 186:
k in >
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
(Equation 186)
where:
in>
is the measured current
If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve
according to the general equation 187.
t[ s ] =
+ Bk
i p
-C
in >
(Equation 187)
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibility
to choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listed
in table 587.
Table 587:
Curve name
Reset type delays

Curve index no.
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant time
when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 188.
944

REL 670
Section 21
tr
t[ s ] =
i 2
-1
in >
(Equation 188)
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.
For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time
settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types of
reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time
reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three
types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set
constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current
dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 189:
tr
t[ s ] =
i pr
- cr
in >
(Equation 189)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delay
time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
21.3
Inverse characteristics
REL 670

945
Section 21
Table 588:
Inverse time characteristics ANSI
Function
Range or value
Operate characteristic:
Accuracy
k = 0.05-999 in steps of
0.01 unless otherwise
stated
ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1
A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0,

tr=29.1
ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5

+ 30 ms
ANSI Very inverse no 2
A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0,

tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse no 3
A=0.0086, B=0.0185,
P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4
A=0.0515, B=0.1140,
P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6
A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,

tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7
A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,

tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8
k=(0.01-1.20) in steps of
0.01
A=0.086, B=0.185,
P=0.02, tr=4.6
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
+ B k
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
tr
2
-1
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 589:
Inverse time characteristics IEC
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% of set time 10 ms
IEC Normal Inverse no 9
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
IEC Very inverse no 10
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse no 11
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse no 12
A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short-time inverse no 13
A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long-time inverse no 14
A=120, P=1.0
t =
A
P
k
( I - 1)
I = Imeasured/Iset
946

REL 670
Section 21
Function
Range or value
Customer defined characteristic no 17

t =
A
P
(I - C )
+ B k
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
TR
PR
- CR
I = Imeasured/Iset
RI inverse characteristic no 18
1
t =
0.339 -
Accuracy
k=0.5-999 in steps of 0.1

A=(0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of
0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of
0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in
steps of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of
0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
IEC 60255, class 5 + 40 ms
k=(0.05-999) in steps of
0.01
IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
k=(0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
0.236
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
Logarithmic inverse characteristic no 19
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
REL 670

947
Section 21
Table 590:
Inverse time characteristics for Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
U < -U
U<
U< = Uset
U = UVmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480
32 U < -U - 0.5
U <
2.0
+ 0.055
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Programmable curve:
kA
+D
t =
P
U < -U
-C
B
U <

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
948

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
REL 670
Section 21
Table 591:
Inverse time characteristics for Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
U -U >
U>
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
2.0
- 0.035
Type C curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
3.0
- 0.035
Programmable curve:
t =
REL 670
kA
B U - U >
U >
-C
+D

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
949
Section 21
Table 592:
Inverse time characteristics for Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
U -U >
U>
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
2.0
- 0.035
Type C curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
3.0
- 0.035
Programmable curve:
t =
950
kA
B U - U >
U >
-C
+D

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
REL 670
Section 21
100
10
k=
15
10
7
5
3
2
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000764.vsd
Figure 463:
REL 670
ANSI Extremely inverse

951
Section 21
100
10
k=
15
10
7
5
3
2
1
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000765.vsd
Figure 464:
952
ANSI Very inverse

REL 670
Section 21
100
10
k=
15
10
7
5
3
2
1
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000766.vsd
Figure 465:
REL 670
ANSI Inverse

953
Section 21
100
k=
15
10
10
7
5
3
2
1
0.5
0.1
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000767.vsd
Figure 466:
954
Moderately inverse

REL 670
Section 21
100
10
k=
1.1
0.9
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.1
0.01
10
100 I/I>
xx05000768.vsd
Figure 467:
REL 670
IEC Normal inverse

955
Section 21
100
10
1
k=
1.1
0.9
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000769.vsd
Figure 468:
956
Very inverse

REL 670
Section 21
100
10
k=
1.1
0.9
0.7
0.1
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.01
10
0.1
0.05
Figure 469:
REL 670
100
I/I>
xx05000770.vsd
Extremely inverse

957
958
Section 22
Glossary
Section 22 Glossary
About this chapter
This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB
technical documentation.
22.1
REL 670
Glossary
AC
Alternating current
A/D converter
Analog to digital converter
ADBS
Amplitude dead -band supervision
ADM
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AR
Autoreclosing
ArgNegRes
Setting parameter/ZD/
ArgDir
Setting parameter/ZD/
ASCT
Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD
Adaptive signal detection
AWG
American Wire Gauge standard
BBP
Busbar protection
BFP
Breaker failure protection
BIM
Binary input module
BOM
Binary output module
BR
External bi-stable relay
BS
British standard
BSR
Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST
Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94
IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals

between IEDs
CAN
Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial

communication
CAP 531
Configuration and programming tool

959
Section 22
Glossary
960
CB
Circuit breaker
CBM
Combined backplane module
CCITT
Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and

Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM
CAN carrier module
CCVT
Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C
Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS
Combined mega pulses per second
CO cycle
Close-open cycle
Co-directional
Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two

twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both
directions
COMTRADE
Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional
Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four

twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both
directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals
CPU
Central processor unit
CR
Carrier receive
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
CS
Carrier send
CT
Current transformer
CVT
Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR
Delayed auto-reclosing
DARPA
Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US

developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL
Dead bus dead line
DBLL
Dead bus live line
DC
Direct current
DFT
Discrete Fourier transform
DIP-switch
Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DLLB
Dead line live bus
DNP
Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std.

1379-2000
DR
Disturbance recorder
DRAM
Dynamic random access memory
DRH
Disturbance report handler

REL 670
Section 22
Glossary
REL 670
DSP
Digital signal processor
DTT
Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network
Extra high voltage network
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
Electro magnetic compatibility
EMF
Electro motive force
EMI
Electro magnetic interference
EnFP
End fault protection
ESD
FOX 20
Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,

data and protection signals
FOX 512/515
Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus
Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up

to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
G.703
Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by

local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM
Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver

module
GI
General interrogation command
GIS
Gas insulated switchgear
GOOSE
Generic object oriented substation event
GPS
Global positioning system
GSM
GPS time synchronization module
HDLC protocol
High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC

standard
HFBR connector
type
Plastic fiber connector
HMI
Human machine interface
HSAR
High speed auto reclosing
HV
High voltage
HVDC
High voltage direct current
IDBS
Integrating dead band supervision
IEC
International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6
IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements

for protective current transformers for transient performance

961
Section 22
Glossary
962
IEC 60870-5-103
Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial

master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850
Substation Automation communication standard
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12
A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on

twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1
PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.

References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force.
IED
Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS
Intelligent gas insulated switchgear
IOM
Binary input/output module
Instance
When several occurrences of the same function are available

in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function.
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but will have a different number in the IED user
interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item
of information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type
of function.
IP
1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol

suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,
best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet
routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link
layer.
2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard
IP 20
Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20
IP 40
IP 54
IRF
Internal fail signal
IRIG-B:
InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,

standard 200
ITU
International Telecommunications Union
LAN
Local area network
LIB 520
High voltage software module
LCD
Liquid crystal display
LDCM
Line differential communication module
LDD
Local detection device

REL 670
Section 22
Glossary
REL 670
LED
Light emitting diode
LNT
LON network tool
LON
Local operating network
MCB
Miniature circuit breaker
MCM
Mezzanine carrier module
MIM
Milli-ampere module
MPM
Main processing module
MVB
Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally

developed for use in trains.
NCC
National Control Centre
NUM
Numerical module
OCO cycle
Open-close-open cycle
OCP
Overcurrent protection
OEM
Optical ethernet module
OLTC
On load tap changer
OV
Over voltage
Overreach
A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set
reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have
seen it.
PCI
Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM
Pulse code modulation
PCM 600
Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP
Mezzanine card standard
PISA
Process interface for sensors & actuators
PMC
PCI Mezzanine card
POTT
Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus
Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM
Power supply module
PST
Parameter setting tool
PT ratio
Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT
Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC
Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX

963
Section 22
Glossary
964
RCA
REVAL
Evaluation software
RFPP
Resistance for phase-to-phase faults
RFPE
Resistance for phase-to-earth faults
RISC
Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value
Root mean square value
RS422
A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data

in point-to-point connections
RS485
Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC
Real time clock
RTU
Remote terminal unit
SA
Substation Automation
SC
Switch or push-button to close
SCS
Station control system
SCT
System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SLM
Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC

communication.
SMA connector
Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant

impedance.
SMS
Station monitoring system
SNTP
Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize

computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SPA
Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave

protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY
Switch for CB ready condition
ST
Switch or push-button to trip
Starpoint
Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC
Static VAr compensation
TC
Trip coil
TCS
Trip circuit supervision
TCP
Transmission control protocol. The most common transport

layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP
Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de

facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD

REL 670
Section 22
Glossary
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working

and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
REL 670
TEF
Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TNC connector
Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance

version of a BNC connector
TPZ, TPY, TPX,

TPS
Current transformer class according to IEC
Underreach
A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set
reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should
have seen it. See also Overreach.
U/I-PISA
Process interface components that deliver measured voltage

and current values
UTC
Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale,

maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal
Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing
the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane
and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet
stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero.
UV
Undervoltage
WEI
VT
Voltage transformer
X.21
A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom

equipment
3IO
Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the

residual or the earth-fault current
3UO
Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the

residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

965
966

REL 670 v.1.1 Technical Reference manual-UEN PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

REL 670 v.1.1 Technical Reference manual-UEN PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical reference manual

Line distance protection IED

Document ID: 1MRK506275-UEN

Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved

Local human-machine interface.....................................35

Technical reference manual

Input and output signals.........................................................51

Basic IED functions........................................................55

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Impedance protection ..................................................109

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Second harmonic blocking element.....................................276

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Measured quantities within the function...............................412

Section 10 Secondary system supervision.....................................443

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Circuit switch (SXSWI)..............................................................508

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Section 12 Scheme communication...............................................603

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Section 16 Station communication.................................................759

Technical reference manual

Technical reference manual

Section 17 Remote communication................................................839

Technical reference manual

Binary input module (BIM).........................................................867

Technical reference manual

GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................892

Technical reference manual

Section 20 Connection diagrams...................................................921

Technical reference manual

Introduction to the technical reference manual

About the complete set of manuals for an IED

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines

Technical reference manual

About the technical reference manual

The chapter Local human-machine interface describes the control panel on

Technical reference manual

The chapter Station communication describes Ethernet based communication

Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)

Technical reference manual

Logic diagram example with -int signals

Technical reference manual

Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

Technical reference manual

Input and output signals

Example of a function block

Technical reference manual

1MRK 506 276-UEN